CM1 Din 2012

BULETINUL
INSTITUTULUI
POLITEHNIC
DIN IAI
Tomul LVIII (LXII)

Fasc. 1
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
2012
Editura POLITEHNIUM
BULETINUL INSTITUTULUI POLITEHNIC DIN IAI

PUBLISHED BY
GHEORGHE ASACHI TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY OF IAI

Editorial Office: Bd. D. Mangeron 63, 700050, Iai, ROMANIA
Tel. 40-232-278683; Fax: 40-232-237666; e-mail: polytech@mail.tuiasi.ro
Editorial Board
President: Prof. dr. eng. Ion Giurma, Member of the Academy of Agricultural
Sciences and Forest, Rector of the Gheorghe Asachi Technical University of Iai
Editor-in-Chief: Prof. dr. eng. Carmen Teodosiu, Vice-Rector of the
Gheorghe Asachi Technical University of Iai
Honorary Editors of the Bulletin: Prof. dr. eng. Alfred Braier,
Prof. dr. eng. Hugo Rosman
Prof. dr. eng. Mihail Voicu, Corresponding Member of the Romanian Academy,
President of the Gheorghe Asachi Technical University of Iai
Editors in Chief of the MACHINE CONSTRUCTIONS Section
Prof. dr. eng. Radu Ibnescu, Assoc. prof. dr. eng. Aristotel Popescu
Honorary Editors: Prof. dr. eng. Gheorghe Nag, Prof. dr. eng. Cezar Oprian
Associated Editor: Assoc. prof. dr. eng. Eugen Axinte
Editorial Advisory Board

Prof.dr.eng. Nicuor Amariei, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Assoc.prof.dr.eng. Aristomenis Antoniadis, Technical
University of Crete, Greece
Prof.dr.eng. Virgil Atanasiu, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Petru Berce, Technical University of
Cluj-Napoca
Prof.dr.eng. Ion Bostan, Technical University of Chiinu,
Republic of Moldova
Prof.dr.eng. Walter Calles, Hochschule fr Technik und
Wirtschaft des Saarlandes, Saarbrcken, Germany
Prof.dr.eng. Doru Clrau, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Francisco Chinesta, cole Centrale de Nantes,
France
Assoc.prof.dr.eng. Conalves Coelho, University Nova of
Lisbon, Portugal
Prof.dr.eng. Juan Pablo Contreras Samper, University of
Cadiz, Spain
Assoc.prof.dr.eng. Mircea Cozmnc, Gheorghe Asachi
Technical University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Spiridon Creu, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Gheorghe Dumitracu, Gheorghe Asachi
Prof.dr.eng. Ctlin Fetecu, University Dunrea de Jos of
Galai
Prof.dr.eng. Mihai Gafianu, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Radu Gaiginschi, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Francisco Javier Santos Martin, University of
Valladolid, Spain
Prof. dr. Dirk Lefeber, Vrije Universiteit Brussels, Belgium
Prof.dr.eng. Dorel Leon, Gheorghe Asachi Technical

University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. James A. Liburdy, Oregon State University,
Corvallis, Oregon, SUA
Prof.dr.eng.dr. h.c. Peter Lorenz, Hochschule fr Technik
und Wirtschaft, Saarbrcken, Germany
Prof.dr.eng. Noura -Barbu Lupulescu, University
Transilvania of Braov
Prof.dr.eng. Fabio Miani, University of Udine, Italy
Prof.dr.eng. Mircea Mihailide, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Sevasti Mitsi, Aristotle University of
Thessaloniki, Salonic, Greece
Prof.dr.eng. Vasile Neculiasa, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Fernando Jos Neto da Silva, University of
Aveiro, Portugal
Prof.dr.eng. Dumitru Olaru, Gheorghe Asachi Technical
University of Iai
Prof.dr.eng. Manuel San Juan Blanco, University of
Valladolid, Spain
Prof.dr.eng. Loredana Santo,University Tor Vergata,
Rome, Italy
Prof.dr.eng. Cristina Siligardi, University of Modena, Italy
Prof.dr.eng. Filipe Silva, University of Minho, Portugal
Prof.dr.eng. Laureniu Sltineanu, Gheorghe Asachi
Lecturer dr.eng. Birgit Kjrside Storm, Aalborg
Universitet Esbjerg, Denmark
Prof.dr.eng. Ezio Spessa, Politecnico di Torino, Italy
Prof.dr.eng.Roberto Teti, University Federico II, Naples, Italy
Prof.dr.eng. Alexei Toca, Technical University of Chiinu,
Republic of Moldova
Prof.dr.eng. Hans-Bernhard Woyand, Bergische University
Wuppertal, Germany
Papers presented at the

6th INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE on
MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS
Iai, October 20th 21st, 2011
organized by the DEPARTMENT OF MACHINE TOOLS,
Faculty of MACHINE MANUFACTURING&INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Papers published with the support of

NATIONAL AUTHORITY for SCIENTIFIC RESEARCHERS
EDITORIAL BOARD
MACHINE CONSTRUCTIONS
Fascicle 1
Conf.univ.dr.ing. Irina Cozmnc

Conf.univ.dr.ing. Ctlin Ungureanu
Sef lucrari.dr.ing. Bruno Rdulescu
Drd..ing. Ana Maria Matei

BULLETIN OF THE POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE OF IAI
Tomul LVIII (LXII), Fasc. 1
2012
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
SUMAR
Pag.
MIHAI AFRSINEI, DORU CLRAU, VASILE DAMASCHIN, IRINA
MARDARE i ADRIAN OLARU, Analiza prin simulare numeric a
unui sistem hidraulic autoadaptiv destinat turbinelor eoliene (engl., rez.
rom.)...........................................................................................................
ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI i GAVRIL AXINTI, Modele dinamice pentru

sisteme de traciune (engl., rez. rom.)......................................................... 9
GAVRIL AXINTI i ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI, Modele pentru disipatoare
hidraulice de energie seismic (engl., rez. rom.)......................................... 17
CARMEN BAL, CARMEN IOANA IUHOS i NICOLAIE BAL, Cercetri
experimentale privind efectele cldurii ntr-o instalaie de acionare cu
debite armonice. (I) Instalaie de acionare cu debite armonice Montaj
n paralel (engl., rez. rom.).......................................................................... 23
VLAD BOCNE, HORIA ABITANCEI, CONSTANTIN CHIRI,
MARIUS DENE-POP i LIVIU BRNUIU, Analiza dinamic a unui
sistem de acionare hidraulic folosit n acionarea unui sistem care se
deplaseaz cu vitez redus, n condiii de sarcin mare (engl., rez. rom.) 29
ILARE BORDEAU, MIRCEA POPOVICIU, ADRIAN KARABENCIOV,
ALIN DAN JURCHELA i CONSTANTIN CHIRITA, Noi contribuii
n corelarea proprietilor mecanice cu rezistena la cavitaie a oelurilor
inoxidabile (engl., rez. rom.).....................................................................
35
CONSTANTIN CHIRI, ANDREI GRAMA i DUMITRU ZETU,

Cercetri privind pierderile prin frecare n dispozitivele de tensionare la
mersul n sarcin (engl., rez. rom.)...........................................................
43
CORNELIU CRISTESCU, PETRIN DRUMEA, CTLIN DUMITRESCU
i DRAGO ION GU, Cercetri experimentale privind comportarea
dinamic a servo-sistemelor hidraulice liniare (engl., rez. rom.) ............. 51
FLORINA-CRISTINA FILIP, Metode eficiente de repartizare a costurilor
directe, a costurilor cu fora de munc i a costurilor de regie
(engl., rez. rom.)......................................................................................... 59
ANDREI GRAMA, CONSTANTIN CHIRI, DUMITRU ZETU i MIHAI

AXINTE, Analiza prin metoda elementului finit a ansamblului bacuri de
tragere buc port-bacuri (engl., rez. rom.).............................................
65
DANIELA IONESCU, ION BOGDAN i GABRIELA APREOTESEI, Asupra

proprietilor controlabile ale straturilor subiri de YIG cu aplicaii la
fabricarea dispozitivelor de microunde (engl., rez. rom.) ..........................
75
ALIN LUCA, MIRCEA COZMNC i ANA MARIA MATEI, Stabilirea

relaiei dintre Ra i Rz la strunjirea oelului OL50 (engl., rez.
rom.)............................................................................................................
85
IRINA MARDARE i IRINA TIA, Senzor de for inclus ntr-un sistem

WIM hidrostatic (engl., rez. rom.)..............................................................
91
ANA-MARIA MATEI, MIRCEA COZMNC i ALIN LUCA, Cercetri

privind uniformizarea forelor de achiere la frezarea frontal
(engl., rez. rom.) .........................................................................................
97
MEHRAN DOULAT ABADI (Malaezia) i SHARI MOHD YUSOF

(Malaezia), Studiu preliminar asupra factorilor cheie care susin
principiile managementului calitii totale (engl., rez. rom.) ..................... 105
MARIUS MILEA i MIRCEA COZMNC, Sintez asupra evalurii
coeficientului de deformare plastic CD (engl., rez. rom.) ........................ 117
EUGEN-VLAD NSTASE i DORU CLRAU, Influena variaiei corzii
asupra performanelor unei miniturbine cinetice (engl., rez. rom.).......... 121
EUGEN-VLAD NSTASE i DORU CLRAU, Cercetri teoretice
privind influena numrului de pale asupra eficienei unei miniturbine
(engl., rez. rom.).......................................................................................... 125
VASILE NSUI, Modelarea controlului micrii la actuatorii liniari
electromecanici (engl., rez. rom.)................................................................ 129
IOANA PETRE, TUDOR DEACONESCU, ANDREA DEACONESCU i
DAN PETRE, Modelarea cu element finit a unui echipament de
reabilitare (engl., rez. rom.)........................................................................ 137
IOANA PETRE, TUDOR DEACONESCU, ANDREA DEACONESCU i
DAN PETRE, Consideraii privind calculul volumului muchiului
pneumatic (engl., rez. rom.)........................................................................ 143
TEODOR COSTINEL POPESCU i IOAN LEPDATU, Tehnici moderne de
experimentare a pompelor hidrostatice reglabile (engl., rez. rom.) ......... 149
OCTAVIAN PRUTEANU, CONSTANTIN CRUU i LUCIAN
TBCARU, Consideraii asupra deformrii plastice la rece a inelelor
de rulmeni (engl., rez. rom.) .................................................................... 157
BRUNO RDULESCU i MARA-CRISTINA RDULESCU, Estimarea
costului de producie n cazul produselor (engl., rez. rom.) ....................... 169
LUCIANA-CRISTIANA STAN i VLADIMIR MRSCU-KLEIN, Rolul

competenelor profesionale n activitatea antreprenoriala (engl., rez.
rom.) ........................................................................................................... 177
IRINA TIA i IRINA MARDARE, Aspecte privind sisteme hidraulice cu
reglare secundar (engl., rez. rom.) ............................................................ 185
ALEXANDRA TOMA i CORNEL CIUPAN, Factorii umani asociai
designului ergonomic al unei interfee om-main (engl., rez. rom.)......... 191
LILIANA TOPLICEANU, ADRIAN GHENADI i MARIUS PASCU, Studiu
despre rolul acumulatoarelor n funcionarea sistemelor hidraulice cu
reglaj secundar (engl., rez. rom.)................................................................ 197
CTLIN UNGUREANU, IRINA COZMNC i RADU IBNESCU,
Consideraii privind fiele de control utilizate n controlul statistic al
proceselor. (II) Fie de control pentru date rare i cumulative
(engl., rez. rom.) ......................................................................................... 203
DNU ZAHARIEA, Diagrame funcionale pentru modelarea procesului de
golire a unui rezervor printr-un orificiu de golire (engl., rez. rom.)........... 211
DNU ZAHARIEA, Diagrame funcionale pentru modelarea procesului de
golire a unui rezervor printr-o conduct de golire (engl., rez. rom.)........... 219
DAN POPESCU, O pledoarie pentru modernizarea mainilor unelte actuale din
industria naional (engl., rez. rom.)........................................................... 227

BULLETIN OF THE POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE OF IAI
Tomul LVIII (LXII), Fasc. 1
2012
MACHINE CONSTRUCTION
CONTENTS
Pp.
MIHAI AFRSINEI, DORU CLRAU, VASILE DAMASCHIN, IRINA
MARDARE and ADRIAN OLARU, Analysis by Numerical Simulation
of a New Self-Adaptive Hydraulic System Used at Wind Turbines
(English, Romanian summary)................................................................... 1
ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI and GAVRIL AXINTI, Dynamic Models for
Traction Systems (English, Romanian summary)...................................... 9
GAVRIL AXINTI and ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI, Models For The Hydraulic
Seismic Energy Dissipaters (English, Romanian summary)....................... 17
CARMEN BAL, CARMEN IOANA IUHOS and NICOLAIE BAL, Research
on Experimental Heat Effects in a Flow with Harmonic Drive
Installation. (I) Drive Installation of Harmony Flow Assembly in
Parallel, (English, Romanian summary)..................................................... 23
VLAD BOCNE, HORIA ABITANCEI, CONSTANTIN CHIRI,
MARIUS DENE-POP and LIVIU BRNUIU, Dynamic Analysis of a
Hydraulic Actuation System of Very Slow Moving Devices
(English, Romanian summary) .................................................................. 29
ILARE BORDEAU, MIRCEA POPOVICIU, ADRIAN KARABENCIOV,
ALIN DAN JURCHELA and CONSTANTIN CHIRI, New
Contributions in the Correlation of Mechanical Properties with the
Cavitation Resistance of Stainless Steels (English, Romanian summary)........................................................................................................... 35
CONSTANTIN CHIRI, ANDREI GRAMA and DUMITRU ZETU,
Research on Frictional Losses in Tensioning Devices at Full Load
CORNELIU CRISTESCU, PETRIN DRUMEA, CTLIN DUMITRESCU
and DRAGO ION GU, Experimental Research Regarding the
Dynamic Behaviour of Linear Hydraulic Servo-systems (Engliah,
Romanian summary)................................................................................... 51
CORNELIU CRISTESCU PETRIN DRUMEA, CTLIN DUMITRESCU i DRAGO
ION GU , Experimental Research Regarding the Dynamic Behavior of Linear Hydraulic Servo-Systems (English, Romanian Summary) ................................................................................
FLORINA-CRISTINA FILIP, Effective Methods of Cost Breakdown for

Direct Costs, Tools and Product Costs (English, Romanian
summary)..................................................................................................... 59
ANDREI GRAMA, CONSTANTIN CHIRI, DUMITRU ZETU and

MIHAI AXINTE, Analysis by Finite Element Method of Assembly
Wedge Grips - Mantle Corbel (English, Romanian summary)................... 65
DANIELA IONESCU, ION BOGDAN and GABRIELA APREOTESEI,
About the Tunable Properties of the YIG Films with Applications in
Microwave Devices Manufacturing (English, Romanian summary) ......... 75
.ALIN LUCA, MIRCEA COZMNC and ANA MARIA MATEI,
Experimental Determination of Ra and Rz on Turning Steels
(English, Romanian summary).................................................................... 85
IRINA MARDARE and IRINA TIA, Force Sensor in a WIM Hydrostatic
System (English, Romanian summary)....................................................... 91
ANA-MARIA MATEI, MIRCEA COZMNC and ALIN LUCA, Researches
Concerning the Uniformization of Cutting Forces in Face Milling
(English, Romanian summary) .................................................................. 97
MEHRAN DOULAT ABADI (Malaysia) and SHARI MOHD YUSOF
(Malaysia), A Preliminary Study of the Key Factors for Sustaining Total
Quality Practices (English, Romanian summary)....................................... 105
MARIUS MILEA and MIRCEA COZMNC, Synthesis on the Assessment
of Chips Contraction Coefficient CD (English, Romanian summary) ........ 117
EUGEN-VLAD NSTASE and DORU CLRAU, Influence of Chord
Variation on the Performance of a Kinetic Miniturbine (English,
EUGEN-VLAD NSTASE and DORU CLRAU, Theoretical Research
Regarding the Blades Number Influence of the Miniturbine Efficiency
VASILE NSUI, About Modelling The Movement Control of the
Electromechanic Linear Actuator (English, Romanian summary)............. 129
IOANA PETRE, TUDOR DEACONESCU, ANDREA DEACONESCU and
DAN PETRE, Finite Element Modeling of a Knee and Hip
Rehabilitation Equipment (English, Romanian summary).......................... 137
IOANA PETRE, TUDOR DEACONESCU, ANDREA DEACONESCU and
DAN PETRE, Some Considerations Regarding Pneumatic Muscle
Volume (English, Romanian summary)...................................................... 143
TEODOR COSTINEL POPESCU and IOAN LEPDATU, Modern
Techniques for Experimentation of Adjustable Hydrostatic Pumps
(English, Romanian summary).................................................................... 149
OCTAVIAN PRUTEANU, CONSTANTIN CRUU and LUCIAN
TBCARU, Some Considerations about Cold Plastic Deformation of
Bearing Rings (English, Romanian summary) ........................................... 157
BRUNO RDULESCU and MARA-CRISTINA RDULESCU, The Costs

Estimation for the Mechanical Production (English, Romanian
summary).................................................................................................... 169
LUCIANA-CRISTIANA STAN and VLADIMIR MRSCU-KLEIN, The
Role of Professional Competence in Business Entrepreneurship (English,
Romanian summary.) ................................................................................. 177
IRINA TIA and IRINA MARDARE, Some Aspects Regarding Hydraulic
Systems with Secondary Control (English, Romanian summary).............. 185
ALEXANDRA TOMA and CORNEL CIUPAN, Man Machine Interface
Ergonomic Design Related to Human Factors (English, Romanian
summary)..................................................................................................... 191
LILIANA TOPLICEANU, ADRIAN GHENADI and MARIUS PASCU,
Study about the Role of Accumulators in Hydraulic Secondary Control
Systems (English, Romanian summary).................................................... 197
CTLIN UNGUREANU, IRINA COZMNC and RADU IBNESCU,
Considerations about Control Charts Used in Statistical Process Control.
(II) Control Charts for Infrequent and Cumulative Data (English,
Romanian summary) .................................................................................. 203
DNU ZAHARIEA, Functional Diagrams for Modeling the Reservoir
Emptying Process through a Small Emptying Orifice (English,
DNU ZAHARIEA, Functional Diagrams for Modeling the Reservoir
Emptying Process through an Emptying Pipe (English,
DAN POPESCU, A Pleading for the Modernization of Machine Tools in
National Industry (English, Romanian summary)...................................... 227

Publicat de
Universitatea Tehnic Gheorghe Asachi din Iai,
Tomul LVIII (LXII), Fasc. 1, 2012
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
ANALYSIS BY NUMERICAL SIMULATION OF A NEW SELFADAPTIVE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM USED AT WIND TURBINES
BY
MIHAI AFRSINEI1, DORU CLRAU2, VASILE DAMASCHIN*1,

IRINA MARDARE2 and ADRIAN OLARU2
Gheorghe Asachi Technical University of Iai,
1
Department of Machine Tools
2
Department of Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulic Machines and Drives
Received: September 12 2011

Accepted for publication: September 20, 2011
Abstract. The paper presents the methodology and the results from the
analysis by numerical simulation of a self adaptive hydraulic transmission in
closed circuit for low power wind turbines. In order to analyze the simulation
model, realised using Simulink, the pump drive speed was considered as input
value. Based on the resulted unit step responses, the system has a good working
behaviour, stable dynamically to the wind speed variation and also to the load
variations at the motor shaft.
Key words: hydraulic transmission, wind turbine, Simulink, unit steps.
1. Introduction
The wind energy transmitted hidraulically to the ground represents an
actual research trend from complex programs, dealing with the non
conventional energy sources. The wind turbines with horizontal axis and low
power, fitted with adaptive hidraulic transmissions, may run with variable speed
(Bej, 2001), (Spera, 1994).
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: vasile.damaschin@hydramold.ro
Mihai Afrsinei et al.
The wind turbines run under a rigorous control of speed and power at the
electrical generator shaft. Specialized literature relieved two ways of wind
turbine control and running when the wind speed and/or its direction fluctuates
(Bej, 2001):
i) By maintaining constant the speed value of the turbine axis, using
different solutions in order to modify the incidence angle of the pales or to
determine the removing of the air flow on the pales.
ii) By maintaining constant the speed value of the generator shaft using
adaptive hydraulic transmissions.
First method is recommended especially for the medium and high power
turbines, connected to a local or national network, because this type of solutions
are increasing the turbine complexity, the costs and the static and dynamic
loads, determining loss of reliability and great maintenance costs. For low
power turbines the second method is preferred, using adaptive hydraulic
transmissions which could give good results when the wind speed varies into
acceptable limits (Bugarschi & Galeriu, 1997).
The authors are proposing a structure for a closed circuit hydraulic
transmission, self adaptive. This transmission is then studied when running in
dynamic regime by analyzing the unit step responses at step variations of the
pump speed and consumers load.
2. The Structure of the Adaptive Hydraulic Transmission
The hydraulic transmission with closed circuit and self adaptive control
has the structure presented in Fig. 1. The transmission module consists in the
pump 12 with variable flow and the hydraulic reversible motor 16, connected in
closed circuit. The pump 12 is a double pump with low flow, which supplies the
closed circuit, in order to compensate the oil losses from the circuit and to
command the flow used in the circuit for setting up the pump 12 disc inclination
angle.
Simulation of the wind speed variation, which determines a speed
variation at the pump 12 axis, is done with the capacity motor 13, remote by the
frequency converter CF. Simulation of the load at the rotary hydraulic motor
shaft 16 is realized through the loading module. The loading module consists by
the rotary hydraulic motor 17, running as a pump and driven by the axis 19.
The load value for the motor 16 to drive the pump 17 is achieved using
the outlet 20. Its output pressure is measured with the transducer 18. The flow
for supplying the pump 16 is realized through the flow transducer 21.
The hydraulic transmission may run in adaptive regime only if the speed
at the admission axis 19 is constant. If this condition is satisfied, the adjustment
of the electrical generator working parameters to the network parameters is very
easy, so no more adapting elements are necessary.
Fig. 1 The structure of the adaptive hydraulic transmission.
Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXII), f. 1, 2012

3
3. Numerical Simulation of the Adaptive Hydraulic Transmission

In order to complete the numerical simulation of the adaptive hydraulic
system the simulation model was realized, using MATLAB and Simulink
(Clrau et al., 2008). To analyze the models behavior and, implicitly the
systems functioning, the input value was considered the pump drive speed and
a signals simulation block was provided for it. The simulation model for the
hydraulic system is presented in Fig. 2.
Fig. 2 The simulation model of the adaptive hydraulic transmission.
The aim of the experimental tests by numerical simulation is to

determine the unit responses of the hydraulic adaptive system at a step signal
variation. The reference value for the simulation tests is the speed of the shaft
19 and the input values are the speed drive of the pump 12 and the load at the
hydraulic motor shaft 16 (Fig. 1).
4. Unit Step Responses at Step Variation of the Pump Drive Speed,
with Reference Value of 130 rad/s and Constant Load
Fig. 3 presents the unit step responses for the variation of the angular
velocity M(t) of the hydraulic motor (Fig. 3a), of the pump flow rate with
variable unitary volume QP(t) (Fig.3b), of the pump control element stroke c(t)
(Fig.3c) and of the pressure drop on the hydraulic motor p(t) (Fig.3d) at load
step variations M of the rotary hydraulic motor. The adaptive hydraulic
transmission must ensure a constant speed of the motor axis M = const. at step
variations of the pump speed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Fig. 3 The unit step responses at hydraulic motor load variation.
From Fig. 3a, presenting the unit step response of the motor axis for
constant speed P=const. at pump axis and two load variations M1, M2 we
can conclude that, when load step occurs, the response is periodically damped,
being stabilied on the reference value. If the pump speed changes, the variation
tendency of the motor speed registered by the speed transducer is
transmitted as a reaction signal to the servo mechanism, which modifies the
stroke of the variable flow rate pump drive element. The increasing of the pump
speed leads initially to a growing of the flow rate, the pump drive element
stroke is then modified in order to decrease the flow rate and correct the speed
error. This way, the motor axis speed remains constant.
From the unit responses we find out that, at speed increasing a tendency of
motor speed growing occurs and then it come back to the reference value. The
system is stable of oscillatory damped type.
Fig. 3b presents the unit step response of the pump flow rate QP(t) for
constant load at hydraulic motor M=const. The reference value for M is
constant. Two step variations P1, P2 for the pump axis speed are
considered. The conclusion is that when the speed increases a tendency of pump
flow growing occurs, but after that it comes back to the initial value. The
hydraulic motor supply flow remains at the imposed value so the speed keeps
constant M=const. The functionning regime is stable, of oscillatory damped
type.
Fig.3c presents the unit step response of the stroke variation c(t) for M=
=const. The reference value for M is constant. The experiments are achieved
for two values P1, P2 of the pump speed. Analyzing the dynamic regime
we can conclude that the system is stable, of oscillatory damped type. When the
speed increases, the control element stroke value is diminishing.
Fig 3d presents the unit step response for the pressure drop p(t) when the
load is constant M=const. Two step variations P1, P2 for the pump axis
speed are considered. The reference value for M remains constant. The
pressure drop on the rotary hydraulic motor does not change. For the inferior
limit of the speed value the regime has a tendancy of instability.
4. Conclusions
1. The numerical simulation of the new hydraulic system confirmed a
good functioning, stable at the wind speed variation (variable speed at the pump
axis) and also at load variation of the generator motor axis.
2. The numerical analysis aims to determine the evolution of unit step
responses of the angular velocity at the hydraulic motor, of the flow for the
variable flow pump, of the control element stroke and of the pressure drop on
the rotary motor at the step variation of its load.
3. The analysis of the dynamic regime stressed for the considered
experimental conditions tha hydraulic system stability of oscillatory damped
type.
REFERENCES
Bej A., Optimizarea construciei turbinelor eoliene cu autoplafonare de putere i
frnare aerodinamic. Tez de doctorat, Universitatea Politehnica din
Timioara, 2001.
Bugarschi A., Galeriu C.D., La simulation des sillages des agrgats oliens par des
modles statiques tourbillon. Buletinul tiinific i Tehnic al Universitii
Politehnica din Timioara, s. Mecanica, 42 (56), Timioara (1997).
Clrau D., Tia I., Ciobanu B., Scurtu D., Simulation Results for a Hydrostatic
Transmission for Use in Association with a Wind Turbine. Proc. of the
International Conference on Hydraulic Machinery and Equuipments, HME 2008,
Timioara, Romania; The Scientific Bulletin of Politehnica University of
Timioara, Transactions on Mechanics, 53 (67), Special Issue, 13-18 (2008).
Ncuiu L., Banyai D., Oprua D., Control System for Hydraulic Transmissions
Specific to Wind Machines. Ed. Politehnica, Timioara, 2010, pp. 475-482.
Spera D.A., Introduction to Modern Wind Turbines/ Wind Turbine Technology. ASME
Press, New York, USA, 1994.
ANALIZA PRIN SIMULARE NUMERIC A UNUI SISTEM HIDRAULIC

AUTOADAPTIV DESTINAT TURBINELOR EOLIENE
(Rezumat)
n lucrare sunt prezentate metodologia i o serie de rezultate obinute la analiza
prin simulare numeric a unei transmisii hidraulice n circuit nchis, autoadaptive,
destinat acionrii turbinelor eoliene de putere mic. Pentru analiza comportrii
modelului de simulare, conceput cu ajutorul bibliotecii de functii Simulink, s-a
considerat ca mrime de intrare turaia de antrenare a pompei. Pe baza rspunsurilor
indiciale obinute se poate constata buna funcionare a sistemului, stabil, n regim
dinamic, att la variaia vitezei vntului, ct i la variaia sarcinii la arborele motorului
generator.

Publicat de
Universitatea Tehnic Gheorghe Asachi din Iai
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
DYNAMIC MODELS FOR TRACTION SYSTEMS

BY
ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI and GAVRIL AXINTI

Dunrea de Jos University, Galai
Department of tiina i Ingineria Materialelor
Received: August 24, 2011
Abstract. The work presents a classification of traction systems as a function

of structure, the systems being classified into: integrally mechanic-traction
systemsSTIM, mechanic-hydrostatical traction -STMH and integrally traction
hydrostatical systems STIH. Each structural model contains the main components
from dynamic point of view: the heat engine as the source of energy, the
transmission of the traction and the system for movement formed of wheels with
tyres or of self-propelled equipment. For each structural model is the dynamic
model to which dynamic analyses should be done by excitation accomplished by
the road (the runaway). The necessity of these models has been due to the study
models of dynamic behavior and of traction systems comparison of different
structures, mechanic, mechanic and hydraulic.
Key words: dynamic model, transmission, traction, hydraulic.
1. Classification of Traction Systems

Traction systems of the consulted technologic equipments are complex
systems formed of a large number of constitutive hydrostatic, mechanic, or
combinations of these components which reciprocally interacts in the aim of
equipment movement in different conditions of movement. Dynamic modeling
for all the exploitation situations is unaccomplished, at least with the conditions
and available modeling methods this moment, the study of dynamic behavior
used dynamic simple models with one or two degrees of freedom, when the
traction system is substituted by one, two or three concentrated masses
Corresponding author: e-mail: axinti@ugal.ro
10
Adrian Sorin Axinti and Gavril Axinti
connected between them with elements of transmission being considered elastic

systems by a certain rigidity. These models permit as the influence to be studied
in dynamic behavior of certain components of the transmission (couplings,
gearbox, cardan drive, differential, the wheel, and the tyre).
A step towards the generalization of dynamic models for the traction
systems constitutes the models with a finite number of freedom degrees, which
are to be considered the factors of amortization entered by the components of
the system in the model besides the rigidity of the mechanical components
which compose the traction system structure. The parameters characterizing
these systems are the rigidities of structural elements written with kij and the
amortizations of the same elements written with cij.
In order to accomplish the mathematical models upon which to be studied
the behavior of the system to excitations produced by the dislevels of the
runaway it is necessary the realization of a classification of the characteristic
types of traction systems presented, taking count of the dynamic characteristics.
The models must answer to the following requirements:
i) to take count of dynamic features produced by the components of the
mechanic transmission and the way of coupling of these (gearings, arbors,
planetary cardans, couplings, etc.);
ii) to take count of dynamic features produced by the components of the
hydrostatical transmission and the way of coupling of these (pumps and
hydraulic motive rotative printing press, hydraulic meshes, the hydraulic usedup environment as the agent of thing, etc.);
iii) to take count of rigidities and the linear and angular amortization
being introduced by the organ of movement (tyre or caterpillar) to excitation
produced by the run way;
iv) to take count of characteristics visco-elastic of environment from
which is composed the run away and the degree of its deformability;
v) to consider the kinematic excitation produced by the dislevels of the
run away, through the resistant moments of the equipment wheels;
vi) to take count of the touch moment of the equipment adherence, and
therefore of the skids of the moment organ in report with the way;
vii) to take count of the moment angular-speed feature, from the external
feature the source (thermic engine) and the regulation laws of waterworks;
vii) to accomplish a simple model but conclusive must estimate, by
numeric modeling, the influence of the road to dynamic behavior of traction
system;
viii) to achieved models for typical traction systems which permit to
compare to miscellaneous solicitations inducted by the run away.
1.1. The Complete Integral Mechanical System STIM
This traction system is characterized by the ensemble achieved between
11
the heat engine, as source of energy and the organ of movement of the
equipment, formed of tyres or caterpillar, is exclusively composed from
constitutive mechanic in the shape of systems of denticulate wheels, axe and
organized arbors in specific components (gearboxes, planetary reductors,
differentials, transmissions cardanics, couplings, etc). This organization of the
scheme causes the touch of functional parameters bankables for systems but and
a certain dynamic behavior of this caused by the dynamic parameters of the
system (moments of inertia, features of rigidity and amortization, etc). The
tipology of the systems is rendered in Fig. 1. What comprise most the complete
systems of used-up mechanics for the actuation of technological equipments.
(Axinti, 2004), (Boazu, 1998), (Gilespi, 1992).
TC
TC
b
Fig. 1 The model of mechanical integral traction systems STIM:
a system with a power line; b system with the many power-lines;
MT thermic engine; Cv mechanic transmission with denticulate wheels of speeds;
Tc cardan transmission; Df differential; OD/SD organs/systems of movement.
1.2. The Mechanic-Hydrostatical Traction System STMH
It is characterized as the fact the accomplished system between the heat

engine as the source of energy and the organ of movement of equipment,
formed of wheels or caterpillar, it is formed of mechanical as those presented
before to which are added hydrostatic components as pumps, engine, apparatus
of casting and protection, hydraulic meshes etc.
CD
a
MT
RP
SD
RP
SD
CD
Fig. 2 The model of mechanical traction systems STMH: a equipments on tyre; b

equipments on caterpillar: MT heat engine; CD, DF, RP mechanic transmission
with denticulate wheels (cable box, differential, planetary reductor); P, M hydrostatic
transmission; OD/SD organ/system of movement.
12
This, by average used-up liquid as the hydraulic agent, conduces to the

conduction of the energy of the system to the desirable parameters, but through
own dynamical characteristics influences the dynamic behavior of draft system
of the equipment. Elastic characteristics and amortization of hydraulic agent and
of hydraulic apparatus are added to characteristics of the used-up components,
causing the dynamic behavior to the whole traction system. The typology of
these systems is rendered as in Fig. 2 which includes the most mechanical
systems used-up for the action of technological equipments. (Axinti, 2004),
(Boazu, 1998), (Gilespi, 1992).
1.3. The Complete Hydrostatic Traction System STIH
It is characterized by the action between the heat engine as the source of

energy and the organ of movement of the equipment, formed of wheels or
caterpillar it is composed by exclusively from hydrostatical coupled round open
or closed components. Dynamic characteristics of the system are influenced by
the dynamic features of hydrostatic used-up components, by the command way
and regulation of these components and of the way of coupling in system. The
typology of this system is rendered as in Fig. 3, which includes the most of
integral hydrostatical used-up systems for the action of technological
equipments (Axinti, 2004), (Borkowski, 1996), (Boazu, 1998).
MT
SD
SD
Fig. 3 The model of hydrostatical systems traction STIH. MT heat engine;

P, M hydrostatic transmission; OD/SD organ/system of movement.
In the case of this system, the heat engine acts directly the pump or the
volumic pumps (mount the tandem), and the volumic engines, acts directly the
organ of movement of the equipment. The dynamic behavior of draft system is
to influence the dynamic behavior of hydrostatical link (pump).
2. The Dynamic Fashions
2. 1. Structure of Dynamic Suggested Model for - STIM
The integral mechanical traction system STIM, having the same

mechanical components, is reduced down to a dynamic equivalent to model two
degrees of freedom, one represents the heat engine of the equipment, as source
of autonomous energy, and the other of the organ of movement of the
equipment, respectively the wheel with its tyres or caterpillar. Between these
two ascertainable components is interposed the transmission mechanical of the
equipment to characterize the equivalent rigidity Ktr of the factor of equivalent
amortization of the transmission Ctr. The system achieved is reduced to the
13
motive thermic axle, characterized of the angle of rotation. The moment of

inertia mechanic Js is similar reduced to the motive thermic axle and contains
the own moment of engine but and the moments of components of components
of the mechanical transmission. The moment Ms represents the active moment
applied to the transmission and results from external characteristic thermic
engine definite to a formal law Ms=f ( s ). The moment of inertia mechanic JR
represents the moment of inertia of the organ from the same axis of the
equipment (the wheels with tyres from the caterpillars). To this moment of
inertia is added the moment of reduced inertia of the equipment as far as Ju the
touch of the moment of adhesive MA (Fig. 4). In the same way proceed to
equipments with many axe assets. (Fig. 4b). In the case of the gearboxes with
many stairs of brave the features of rigidity, amortization, reduced moment of
inertia and the active moment shall be evaluated for each step and used
accordingly in the dynamic model.
JR
JS
KTR
JU
K
CTR
MA
M R; R
JR
KTR
JS M ;
S S
KTR
CTR
KTR
M U; U
K
C
JR
JR
CTR
MA
MA
TR
C
M U; U
JU
MA
Fig. 4 The dynamic model for the complet mechanical systems STIM:
a system with a power line; b system with many power lines.
JS,MS, S dynamic parameters of heat engine h; JR, MR, R dynamic parameters of
the organ of movement (wheels or caterpillar); JU, MU, U - dynamic parameters of the
equipment; KTR, k - the transmission of the mechanic and the active element of the
system of movement (tyres); cTR, c the factors of proper amortization of the
transmission and systems of movement; MA of adherence to the organ of movement of
the equipment.
In the situations presented, mostly the aspect of accomplishing of the

dynamic model is adverted to the determination rigidities and the factors of
equivalent amortization have the components of used-up mechanical in the
transmission mechanic. Shaping the traction system is considered for the case
14
presented the in Fig. 4 of equipment with an only motor deck and four wheels
with tyres.
2.2. The Structure of Dynamic Model Suggested for STMH
The mechanic hydraulical traction system-STMH, is reduced to a

dynamic equivalent model formed of two or many systems with two or three
degrees of freedom, which models the dynamic behavior of the mechanical
components (gearboxes, reductors, etc), bound between them through
hydrostatical components (pump) (Fig. 5).
Js
Jm
Jp
kcd
Ctm
Ccd
Ms s
Ju
Jr
ktm
Mp p
Mm m
MA
Mu u
rM r r
Ju
Jm
Js
Jp
Jr
ktm
Ctm
kcd
Mm m
Jm
Ccd
Ms s
Mp p
MA
rM r r
Jr
ktm
M
Ctm
Mm m
rM r r
MA
Mu
u
Fig. 5 The dynamic model for the mechanic hydraulical system-STMH:

a models with one power line; b model with two power lines.
For the one-track energetic systems, as are the equipments on tire with
only one motor deck (42) or the equipments on tire with two or many motor
decks (44; 64; 66), to which hydrostatical link (P-M) is interposed between
source of energy (MT) and the draft system achieved whole mechanic, the
suggested model is one from Fig. 5. The heat engine and the inclusive cable box
are modelled as a system with two degrees of freedom, characterized of rigidity
and the factor of equivalent amortization, which acts primary constitutive the
hydrostatical pump. The draft system, inclusively the system of movement, is
modeled as a system with three degrees of freedom, set secondary constitutive
the hydrostatical motor-M system. The mechanical components of the
transmission are modeled as visco-elastic elements to characterize the
equivalent rigidity and the factor of equivalent amortization ctm. By dint of these
is set the organ of movement to characterize elements sequence of the rigidity
and the factor of amortization k c, by dint is set g the equipment (Ju).
In the case of draft systems with two power lines, which is the case of
fitting-out of the equipments on caterpillars (bulldozers, chargers, dredgers,
tractors, special equipments, etc), the equipments on tire with direction through
15
side-slip (chargers, multipurpose machines, etc) or the equipments with

tractional axle (active trailers, transport platforms, etc), the model described
previously is reprographic with the number of power lines, in the case from Fig.
5b, with two power lines are enforced to the solicitation inducted of the
runaway of the two organs of equipment run (deck with tyres or caterpillar).
And in the case of the loss state analysis of adhesive the equipment is to
consider through the touch boundary value of adhesion -MA.
2.3. Structure of Suggested Dynamic Model for STIH
The draft complete system hidrostatic-stih, is modeled as a dynamic

system with two degrees of freedom, to which the connections to the dynamic
inertial components of heat engine and of the system of run (tyres or
caterpillars) are realized of hydrostatic components, without pure mechanic
components (denticulate wheels, couplings etc).
Js
Ju
Jr
k
M
MA
C
M
Ms s
Mu
u
Ju u
Jr
k
Js
M
C
P
JM
r
MA
r
k
Ms s
M
C
M
MA
Mu
u
b
Fig. 6 The dynamic model for the complete hydraulics - STIH system:
a models with a single power line; b model with two power lines.
In the dynamic model is considered an only visco-elastic connection, or

except elastic realized of the organ of movement of the equipment (wheels with
tires or caterpillars). This connection is interposed between the run away and
the equipment, being the components of the model through with is inducted he
draft force produced by the system of action
4. Conclusions
1. The draft systems of technological self-propelled equipments are
characterized through three types of structures, which cover most of the
16
practical situations. One can see the discrepancies which characterizes the
dynamic models of STIM, STMH, STIH.
2. For each of ascertainable models achieved numerical analyses the
experimental and the results are presented in another scientific works of the
main author whose conclusion is detached as for shaping of the process in a
draft system of self-propelled equipments age necessity of the model. The
conclusions contain the elemental structures of the equipment: heat engine of
the draft system formed of transmission and the system of movement (the
wheel, caterpillar) runaway.
3. The runaway constitutes the factor of excitation of draft system to
miscellaneous disturbances produced by the dislevels, the states, the humidity,
consistence etc.
REFERENCES
Axinti G., Contributii la modelarea proceselor dinamice din actionarea hidrostatica a
sistemului de deplasare a utilajelor tehnologice autopropulsate. Proc. of the 6th
Int. Conf. on Hydraulic Machinery and Hydrodynamics, Timioara, 2004, pp.
292-298.
Borkowski W., Konopka S., Prochowski L., Dynamika maszyn roboczych. Podreczniki
Akademickie. Wydawnictwa Naukowo- Techniczne, Mechanika, Warszawa, 156168,172-185 (1996).
Boazu D., Contributii privind analiza vibraiilor provocate de angrenaje. Tez de
doctorat, Univ. Dunrea de Jos din Galai, 1998, pp. 32-41.
Gilespi T., Fundamentals of Vehicle Dynamics. Society of Automotive Engineers,
Warrendale, USA, 1992.
Mladin Gh., Maini de traciune i sisteme de transport. Vol. I, II, Ed. Impuls.
Bucureti, 1999.
Untaru M., Pere Gh. et al., Dinamica autovehiculelor pe roi. Ed. Didactic i
Pedagogic, Bucureti, 1981.
MODELE DINAMICE PENTRU SISTEME DE TRACIUNE

(Rezumat)
Se prezint o clasificare a sistemelor de traciune dup structura acestora. Sistemele sunt clasificate n: sisteme de traciune integral mecanice STIM, sisteme de traciune mecano-hidrostatice STMH i sisteme de traciune integral hidrostatice STIH.
Fiecare model structural conine componentele eseniale din punct de vedere dinamic:
motorul termic, ca surs de energie; sistemul de transmisie al sistemului de traciune;
sistemul de deplasare format din roile cu pneuri sau enilele utilajului autopropulsat i
calea de rulare. Modelele au permis autorilor s analizeze comportarea dinamic produs de denivelrile drumului, consistena drumului, aderena drumului, etc. Necesitatea
realizrii acestor modele s-a datorat nevoilor de studiu a comportrii dinamice i de
comparare a sistemelor de traciune de diverse structuri, mecanice, mecano-hidralice i
hidraulice.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
MODELS FOR THE HYDRAULIC

SEISMIC ENERGY DISSIPATERS
BY
GAVRIL AXINTI and ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI

Dunrea de Jos University, Galai
Department of tiina i Ingineria Materialelor
Abstract. This article refers to the complex seismic energy dissipaters based
on hydrostatic equipments that are capable of destroying the energy of the
earthquake, shock or vibration, for various frequencies, dissipaters that connect
the body system object to the dynamic phenomenon with its ground basis.
Key words: models, hydraulic, seismic energy, dissipater, etc.
1. Introduction
At national and international level there are a lot of researches on the
developing and perfecting methods for insulating, buffering and protecting the
structures and the human beings to the effects of shocks, vibrations and
earthquakes. We know methods of insulating or absorbing the technological
shocks and vibrations, based on the same principles.
There are recent European researches, as ECOLEADER programme,
conducted between 2001-2005 by an university consortium made of Patras
University (Greece), Roma 3 University (Italy), Pescara University (Italy),
Ancona University (Italy), FIP Industriale (Italy), TARK (Great Britain). Such
studies show the actuality of the researches in the field of annihilating the
effects of the previously specified dynamic phenomena (Ptru et al., 2005).
Corresponding author: e-mail: gaxinti@ugal.ro
18
Gavril Axinti and Adrian Sorin Axinti
2. The Description of the Hydraulic Seismic Energy Dissipater

The hydraulic energy dissipater is made as a cylinder, 1 with two
chambers separated by a piston, 2, chambers filled with a viscous environment
(synthetic oil, silicon oil, particles in suspension, liquid metals etc.). The piston
is connected to a bar, 3 and a compensation tube that crosses on either side of
the piston the two chambers. A third chamber, 4, is situated inside the
compensation tube and has the role of compensating the dilatation or the
contraction of the viscous environment under thermal effect. The dissipaters
bar is connected at the base of the construction (I) and the body is connected at
the foundation of the construction, (II) with plane or spatial joints, 5. The device
works reversibly to the alternative traction and compression movements and the
dynamic behavior depends on the instantaneous frequency (speed) of the
excitation generated by the earthquake, mechanical shock or vibration. (Fig.1).
This action is generated by a system of pressure adjusting equipments 6, 7, 8
(energetic regulators) created for various dissipation domains, equipments
placed outside the dissipater. The opening of a regulator or more, or their
closing, depends on the commands given by an electronic monitoring system of
the earthquake and technological shock or vibration, according their frequency
and intensity, which leads to various stages of dissipation.
The construction of the linkage is presented in Fig.1.
6
Fig.1 Construction of the hydraulic energy dissipater.
3. The Mathematical, Nonlinear Model of the Dissipater

The dynamic model of the energy dissipater results from the flow
equation and from the equation of the forces applied on the piston (dAlembert
principle). The non linear mathematical model is described by Eqs. (1)
V dp
dy D
H
=
p3
p+ 0
,
dt A
A
AE dt
d 2 y C dy K
g
A
+
+
y=
p,
2
dt
M dt M
10 M
where
(1)
Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXI I), f. 1, 2012
D=
2d 3
4kr
and
H = d
19
2
,
represent the dissipater constants, where: d is diameter of the pressure regulator

valve; is the passive run of the pressure regulator until the total opening of
the regulator; kr the rigidity of the dissipater pressure regulator; is the
coefficient of local load losses from the hydraulic agent circulation through the
dissipater regulator; a = d 2 4 is area of the front surface of the pressure
regulator; K the rigidity of the hydraulic dissipater; C is the absorption factor
of the dissipater; M is the mass suspended on the dissipater; A is the area of the
frontal face of the hydraulic dissipater piston; V0 is the volume of hydraulic
agent (mineral oil) situated between the piston ad the dissipater regulator;
, E are the density and the elasticity of the hydraulic agent. The model
variables are ymomentary movement of the hydraulic dissipater piston; p is the
momentary regulated pressure.
4. Numerical Case
For the numerical case presented, with the values: kr=104 daN/cm,
d=0.45 cm, =0.0009 kg/cm3, =1.8 , A=115.4 cm2, V0=3460 cm3, E=16900
daN/cm2, M=60000 kg, g=9.81 m/s2, = 0.9 cm, K=8 daN/cm, C=
=0.001daNs/cm, pmax=700 bar, p [0, pmax], y [cm], y [ 0 , y0 ] . We have the
dissipater variables as functions of time according the following equations
y = y (t ),
p = p(t ), F = F (t ) = Ap(t ) and
F = F ( y) .
(2)
The model presented is made under the following hypothesis:

i) We disregarded the flow losses through gaps, because the piston sealing
do not allow losses of volume, being self deformable on the cylinder bore.
ii) The flow loses on the regulator between the high pressure chambers
and the low pressure chambers are considered neglectable taking into view the
small dimensions of the regulator compared to the dissipater cylinder.
( d Dd 10 150 = 1 15 ), where: d the diameter of the pressure regulator valve,
Dd the diameter of the dissipater cylinder bore.
iii) The friction forces are considered to be neglectable on the hydraulic
regulator, compared with the direct applicable forces.
The pressure characteristic p [bar], a function of the hydraulic dissipater
run y [m2], respectively p=p(y), obtained by modeling model (1), leads to
graphics such as those in Fig. 2a.
20
The pressure characteristic p [bar], a function of the hydraulic dissipater

run y [m2], respectively p=p(y), obtained by experiments, leads to graphics
such as in Fig. 2b.
p[bar]
p[bar]
600
600
400
400
200
200
0 20 40 60
80 100 120
y[cm]
20
40
60
y[cm]
a
b
Fig. 2 Characteristic p=p(y): a theoretical characteristic; b experimental
characteristic at constant speed v0=0.2 m/sec.
5. The Linear Mathematical Model of the Dissipater

We may notice from both the behavior of the experimental model and the
theoretical model (1) that the movement process of the body of mass M,
suspended on the dissipater, occurs with constant speed, v0 , after going through
the transition period. Under these terms we can consider that
dy
= v0 = const.
(3)
dt
With Eq. (3) the model (1), becomes
D p3 H p +
V0 dp
= Av0 and Ky = 0.1Mg Ap Cv0 .
E dt
From the first Eq. (4), changing the variable

dp AE HE
=
+
dt V0 v0V0
DE
v0V0
(4)
dp dp
=
v0 , results
dt dy
p3 ,
(5)
and from the derivative of the second Eq.(4) with respect to y, results
dp
K
= .
A
dy
(6)
From the Eq. (6) we confirm that the variation of the pressure for the run
y has an ascendant slope, meaning that the variation law of the pressure is
Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXI I), f. 1, 2012
p = p0
K
y,
A
21
(7)
where the pressure p0 is the regulated pressure of the hydraulic regulator.

From Eq. (5) results the expression that connects the building parameters
of the dissipater, the parameters of the hydraulic environment and the initial
pressure p0 , from there we can deduce the dissipaters rigidity (8), or its own
pulsation (9), that is
K=
ADE
v0V0
AE
=
V0 M
A2 E
;
V0
(8)
D p3 H p
0
0
A .
v0
v0
(9)
p03
AHE
v0V0
p0
6. Conclusions
1. The non linear model (1) satisfies accurately enough the real behavior
of a seismic energy hydraulic dissipater. The characteristics p = p (y ) ,
theoretical and real are alike at least in regard to the behavior in a permanent
working regime.
2. Imposing the conditions specific to the permanent working regime,
with a constant speed v =v0 =const. , we create the linear model of the dissipater,
and from there we obtain the descending linear character of the pressure
variation depending on the variable run of the dissipater piston.
3. We demonstrated theoretically that the own pulsation of the
mechanical linkage made with hydraulic dissipaters depends on: the area of the
hydraulic pistons surface, the elasticity of the hydraulic environment, the
volume of hydraulic agent between the active chamber of the cylinder and the
pressure regulator, the suspended mass, the regulated pressure, the piston
movement speed, the characteristics of the hydraulic regulator. The own
pulsation characterizes the transitory regime of the rigid links connected with
joints to form some mechanical structures, provided with hydraulic dissipaters,
(Axinti et al., 2008), (Axinti, 2003).
REFERENCES
Axinti G., Nedelcu F., Axinti A. S., Caracteristici ale legturilor hidraulice disipative.
The Annals of Dunrea de Jos University of Galai, XIV, Mechanical
Engineering, 1224-5615 (2008).
22
Axinti G., Dinamica solidului rigid cu legturi hidraulice. Lucrrile celei de-a XXVII a
Conferine de Mecanica Solidelor, Buletinul tiinific al Universitii din Piteti,
seria Mecanica Aplicat, 1(7), 21-31 (2003).
Denis D., Pont sur le Var Saint-Isidore. Exemple de conception parasismique.
Ouvrages dart, 45, 18-28 (2004).
Ptrut P., Betea S., Crainic L. et al., Sistem integrat de protecie a cldirilor la solicitri
seismice. Buletinul celei de-a 3-a Conferine Naionale de Inginerie Seismic,
Bucureti (2005).
***Program ECOLEADER. Comunicare program internet Laboratoire d tudes de
Mcanique Sismique, 2005, pp. 1-14.
MODELE PENTRU DISIPATOARE HIDRAULICE DE ENERGIE SEISMIC

(Rezumat)
Se prezint un model matematic creat de autori pentru sistemele hidrostatice
disipatoare seismice. Se deduc caracteristicile dinamice ale acestor aparate,
caracteristici care ajut la realizarea legturii dintre disipator i parametrii dinamici ai
seismului. Se realizeaz un studiu de caz pentru o tipodimensiune de disipator la care se
compar rezultatele teoretice cu cele experimentale, fapt ce confirm c modelul
matematic reproduce suficient de bine comportarea real.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
RESEARCH ON EXPERIMENTAL HEAT EFFECTS IN A FLOW

WITH HARMONIC DRIVE INSTALLATION
I. DRIVE INSTALLATION OF HARMONY
FLOW ASSEMBLY IN PARALLEL
BY
CARMEN BAL
CARMEN IOANA IUHOS2 and NICOLAIE BAL3
1
Technical University, Cluj-Napoca,
Department of Teacher Education and Training
2
S.C. Borker S.A., Cluj-Napoca,
3
Department of Strength of Materials

Abstract. Paper aims to highlight the phenomenon of heat conducted into a

sonic installation. Heat is produced and sent away by vibration.
Key words: sonic pressure, sonic flow, friction resistance, sonic condenser,
temperature.
1. Introduction
One of the most interesting applications of sonic proposed by Gogu
Constantinescu, is the production and transmission of heat away by vibration.
In this paper the proposed study the lows production and heat waves
sonic and practical implementation of a stand to make it possible to achieve this
objective. To produce heat vibrations to build a sonic generator phase, this
consists of a pump equipped with a moving piston and a cylinder alternative.
Pump speed is given by a DC electric motor with variable speed. The cylinder
leaves a pipe to a condenser (capacitive cylinder) filled with liquid steel. As
fluid is preferably water, with a coefficient of elasticity than oil.
Corresponding author: e-mail: balcarmen@yahoo.com
24
Carmen Bal et al.
To protect the system against rust oil was used. This capacitor can be
considered equivalent to a capacitor of electricity called capacitor. From the
other end of the condenser leaving a pipeline that is connected to a tube of small
diameter, the shape of a coil spring. Tubing (resistance of friction which acts as
an electrical resistance) is linked with a second capacitor (capacitive cylinder)
filled with liquid. This assembly of hydraulic viewpoint is nonsense as classical
hydraulic fluid compressibility is not taken into account (Fig. 1).
If you take into account the liquid compressibility factor can be put in
motion generator through a mechanism with eccentric (or rod crank), which
produces alternative movement of the piston. As a result of the reciprocating
piston pulsations occur in the first cylinders. Thus the tank becomes a kind of
sonic generator.
Sonic waves are forced to pass inside the friction resistance and capacitor
to reach its end. Movement is possible because of compressibility energy
transmission waves. Alternative energy via friction resistance thin tube made
sonic friction loss, such losses caused by passing electric current through ohmic
resistance to electricity.
2
10
11
12
13
14
15
Fig. 1 Block diagram of sonic installation: 1 DC electric motor M, 2

proximity sensor, 3 elastic coupling, 4 pump sonic,
where 1 DC electric motor M, 2 proximity sensor, 3 elastic coupling, 4

pump sonic, 5, 8, 10 pressure sensor, 6 temperature sensor, 7 friction
resistance, 9 CM - large condenser, 11 cm - small condenser, 13 pump to
achieve static pressure, 14 valve, 15 oil tank, for static pressure.
The installation is complete, multifunctional, and allows, starting from a
sonic source, determination of thermal effects.
2. Experimental Research in the Harmonic Parallel Installation
Research focused on obtaining experimental heat effect as a result of heat
25
transmission remote vibration (sonic waves in liquids). These studies were

conducted on the stand presented in Fig. 1, starting at different frequencies of
the engine that drives the piston sonic generator. For each frequency
measurements were performed for various static pressure in the system (0.25,
0.5) Pa.
Stand in Fig. 1, is small capacitor mounted in parallel with the resistance
of friction.
Fig. 2 Evolution mounting pressure over time for small capacitor in parallel.
After processing the files with experimental data, from three sensors
mounted in the system, resulting graphics illustrating developments primary
generator pressures and two capacitors, the shape of the graphics represented in
Fig. 2. You can also view the generator speed (position viewed by curve
generator). Evolutions of pressure curves reveal a phase shift between pressure
from the pressure generator and capacitors.
n = 600 rpm
ps = 0,25E+05 Pa
Fig. 3 Diagram of pressures and temperature variation

with time in static pressure of 0,25E+05 Pa.
26
Carmen Bal et al.
ps = 0,25E+05 Pa
Fig. 4 Diagram of pressures and temperature variation of speed

according to the static pressure of 0,25E+05 Pa.
The graphs in Figs. 3 and 4 amounted to a static pressure of 0,25E+05 Pa

starting a speed n = 600 rpm stabilize at 560 rpm. Pressure generator is
stabilizing after a minute of starting the installation around 70E+05 Pa and the
pressure from the large cylinder 50E+05 Pa, pressure drop across the resistance
friction being 30E+05 Pa. The surface temperature of frictional resistance
increased after about 1 minute to 85C, (Bal, 2006).
The results noted with graphics: G sonic pump pressure variation on
the sensor 5; S1 pressure variation obtained from pressure sensor 8; S2 pressure variation obtained from pressure sensor 10; T temperature.
The graphs in Figs. 5 and 6 were built for a static pressure of 0,5E+05 Pa.
and n = 1000 rpm power. Temperature reached after about one minute and a
half working at 86C continued to rise further to stabilize (Bal, 2006). Pressure
sensor to rise around de 70E+05 Pa and at the large cylinder at a pressure of
37E+05 Pa, the pressure drop on the resistance of friction is equal to 28E+05Pa.
n = 1000 rpm
ps = 0,5E+05 Pa
Fig. 5 Diagram of pressures and temperature variation

with time in static pressure of 0.5E+05 Pa.
27
ps = 0,5E+05 Pa
Fig. 6 Diagram of pressures and temperature variation of speed

according to the static pressure of 0,5E+05 Pa.
3. Conclusions
The analysis of diagrams for assembly in parallel in Fig. 1, allows to
draw the following conclusions:
1. Pressure drop across the resistance friction is around 30E+05 Pa to the
computer is 42.5 E+05 Pa. Pressure deviation between the two is 29%
acceptable deviation taking into account losses that occur across the system.
2. After stabilization is constant pressure to maintain constant speed static pressure in the system does not influence significantly the pressure drop.
3. Based on other measurements we concluded that the optimal speed for
the resistance of friction with diameter of 3mm and length 1m is comprised
between 600 and 1000 rpm as confirmed by calculation.
4. The two capacitors sonic, in parallel linked via a pipe with a small
diameter acting as capillary type hydraulic resistance, which aims to
transform the sonic waves produced by friction fluid environment with walls,
into heat
Acknowledgements. The authors would like to thank Prof. Ioan I. Pop, Ph.D for
constructive support and help given to conducting experiments in the field of sonics.
REFERENCES
Constantinescu G., The Theory of the Sonicity. Ed.Academiei, Bucureti, 1985, pp. 7-8.
Bal C., Caloric Effect in the Circuits by Harmonic Flow. Ed. Alma Mater, Cluj Napoca,
2007, pp. 17, 75, 111.
Bal C., Research and Contributions about the Drive Systems with the Harmonic Flow.
Doctoral Thesis, Technical University of Cluj Napoca, 2006, p. 97.
28
Carmen Bal et al.
Pop I. Ioan, Bal C., Marcu L. et al., The Sonicity Applications. Experimental Results.
Ed. Performantica, Iai, 2007.
CERCETRI EXPERIMENTALE PRIVIND EFECTELE CLDURII NTR-O

INSTALATIE DE ACIONARE CU DEBITE ARMONICE
I. Instalaie de acionare cu debite armonice Montaj n paralel
(Rezumat)
Transmisiile sonice se realizeaz prin vibraii, iar la nceputul secolului, se
considera c energia de vibraie constituie o form de energie degradant care nu se mai
poate transforma dect n cldur. Era de neconceput c dintr-un sistem de vibraii se
poate obine lucru mecanic cu randament ridicat.
Cercetrile privind sistemele de acionare cu debite armonice s-a bazat pe o
aplicaie interesant a sonicitii care este transmisia cldurii la distan ntr-un mod
similar nclzirii electrice. Conducta coninnd un lichid (de preferin apa) poate
transmite energie de la un generator la o rezisten sonic care se poate gsi la o mare
distan. Aceasta este transformat n cldur ntr-un tub spiral n timp ce conducta
rmne rece. Limita la care temperatura din tub va ajunge depinde de punctul de
fierbere al lichidului din interior care este influenat de presiune.
Cercetrile experimentale au vizat obinerea efectului caloric ca urmarea a
transmiterii clduri la distan prin vibraii (prin unde sonice n lichide). Aceste cercetri
s-au realizat pe standul prezentat n Fig. 1, pornind de la frecvene diferite ale motorului
de acionare a pistonului generatorului sonic. Pentru fiecare frecven s-au efectuat
msurtori pentru diferite presiuni statice n instalaie (0,25;0,5; 0,75; 1) i pentru
fiecare presiune static cte 3 msurtori. Partea experimental s-a realizat pe standul
construit n diferite variante de aranjare a cilindrilor capacitivi i a rezistenei de
friciune. O variant constructiv este prezentat n aceasta lucrare i anume varianta
montajului n paralel (condensatorul mic montat n paralel cu instalaia).Important este
ca n urma experimentrilor s-a putut demonstra ca n circuitul din Fig. 1 se obine
cldur n rezistena de friciune, iar conductele de legtura rmn reci.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
DYNAMIC ANALYSIS OF A HYDRAULIC ACTUATION

SYSTEM OF VERY SLOW MOVING DEVICES
BY
VLAD BOCNE1, HORIA ABITANCEI2, CONSTANTIN CHIRI3,

MARIUS DENE-POP1 and LIVIU BRNUIU1
1
Technical University, Cluj Napoca,

Department of Machine Tools and Industrial Robots
2
Transilvania University, Braov,
Department of Motor Vehicles and Engines
3
Gheorghe Asachi Technical University, Iai
Accepted for publication: August 31, 2011
Abstract. The paper presents research conducted for a hydraulic actuation

system designed to propel a slow moving device. During system run, the stability
of the system has to be assured, considering the slow moving velocity of the
device. In order to analyse the system, a multi-domain model was developed to
identify the influences of geometry and running conditions on system behaviour.
In order to appreciate the influences of different running parameters, the
propelling speed, pump displacement and motor displacement are considered.
Instabilities at system run-up are identified and are relative rapidly damped.
Key words: fluid power, slow moving system, multi-domain simulation etc.
1. Introduction
High load and slow moving devices are systems that may be actuated in
many cases only using fluid power systems, due to their capability of
developing high power densities and precise actuation. If the system has to
work under moving conditions, additional requirements related to mass density,
unexpected load changes and safety have to be fulfilled. Another important
Corresponding author: e-mail: vlad.bocanet@gmail.com
30
Vlad Bocne et al.
requirement of the system is the broad range of powers that have to be achieved.
First design issues for such a system have to rely on important simulation data
to assure time and resource consuming aspects. In order to meet these tasks, a
multi-domain model was used, capable of including time-dependent phenomena
(AMESIM, User Guide).
2. The Actuated System
The hydraulic powered device is a slow moving vehicle that has to meet
different running conditions. One important task is the displacement on
conventional running conditions, including different displacement surface
qualities and surfaces slopes. For this case the 5 tonne device has to be moved
on a 2% slope on a surface having the rolling resistance coefficient , 0,015 for
asphalt/concrete road and 0,3 for heavy duty earth conditions. The running
resistance that has to be covered by the propelling system is given by
R = mg cos + mg sin + 0,5cx A
v2
+ ma
2
(1)
expressed as a resistance force. Parameters in Eq. (1), have the following

meaning: rolling resistance coefficient, m vehicle mass, g acceleration
due to gravity, road slope, cx aerodynamic coefficient, air density, A
cross section area of the vehicle, v vehicle translational speed, a vehicle
linear acceleration. The aerodynamic drag force, the third term in Eq. (1) is
neglected for the slow running condition. The acceleration force may be
significant if a given acceleration is required so that the system reaches a given
displacement velocity in a given time or length restriction. A second, important
requirement is the very slow moving condition in the range of 12 m/s,
maintaining the moving stability.
To assure this second task, a hydraulic propulsion system is analysed.
3. The Multi-Domain Model of the Actuating Hydraulic System
The model, presented in Fig. 1 includes a model 1 for the internal
combustion engine as variable speed source, driving the variable displacement
pump 3 using a gear box 2. The liquid flow provided by the pump propels the
hydraulic motor having a fixed displacement 5 by the hydraulic hose 4.
Additional gears 6 and the final system transmission gear 7 are meant to avoid
minimum stable working speeds of the hydraulic motor, that are often
connected with stability and lubrication issues, especially when high load
conditions are needed. For a realistic modelling, a vehicle model 8 was used
that allow to include rolling resistance, slope resistance 10 and to also simulate
braking conditions by supplying a braking torque at port 9.
31
Fig. 1 The multi-domain model of the hydraulic propelling system.
4. The Simulation Results

The main parameters were designed using conventional hydraulic
formulae for a pre-design phase and included in the multi-domain model. The
goal of the study was to identify system behaviour for different design and
running parameters (Clrau, 2002), having as output goal and optimisation
criterion, the vehicle displacement and velocity.
4.1. The Influence of Hydraulic Energy Generation Conditions
In order to identify the influence of propelling speed, different values

were chosen. Their influence on vehicle speed is given in Fig. 2a. A
proportional dependence can be observed. System start-up is affected be
oscillations that are damped after approximately 2 seconds despite propelling
speed. A second parameter that has been considered is the volume of the
hydraulic variable displacement pump. The volume has been modified in the
range of the actual to total displacement ranging from 0,3 to 1. Engine speed
and displacement actuation time are modified in the same time range, 5s. The
vehicle speed dependence on pump displacement having a maximum value of
23 cm3 is shown in Fig. 2b. It can be noticed that at small values of the
displacement, system instability is present at low pump displacements.
It can be observed that the expected stationary behaviour is confirmed.
The dynamical behaviour is affected by oscillations at system start-up and small
scale values of the studied parameters. Inertial effects compensate oscillation
and system instabilities as far as significant parameters are getting to higher
scale values.
The causes of the unstable behaviour are the pressure oscillations
presented in Fig. 3. It can be observed that overcoming the vehicle inertia, the
pressure response of the hydraulic system is characterised by high amplitude
waves of up to 120 bar, compared to system working pressure. The relative
small absolute values of amplitudes are given by the relative high displacements
of pump and motors that contribute also to the rapid amplitude reduction.
32
Vlad Bocne et al.
Fig. 2 The influence of engine speed and pump displacement on system velocity.
The translation from accelerating to constant time conditions is also

associated with the generation of an oscillation that is rapidly damped. This
oscillation has also significant amplitude, but together with the running in
oscillations, they have practical known influence on system behaviour. Acoustic
emissions are expected to be associated with this oscillations change.
Fig. 3 Influence of running conditions on geometrical objects:

a pressure distribution; b influence of motor displacement.
4.2. The Influence of Hydraulic Power Conversion Unit
The effect of the hydraulic motor volume on system speed is presented in

Fig. 3b. It can be clearly observed that the smaller displacement motor induces
higher scale oscillations. The damping effect is supplementary confirmed by the
pressure oscillation evolution both at system start-up and displacement
condition.
5. Conclusions
1. The first conclusion of the study is that stable running conditions can
be achieved using the adopted system structure to propel the high load low
speed system.
33
2. The second conclusion reflects that a higher volume system assures

more stable running conditions contributing to the rapid damping of the
pressure waves. This damping effect is given by the dynamic properties of the
liquid, like inertial and compressibility effects. These properties are more
significant as the volume of liquid is increased.
REFERENCES
*** AMESIM User Guide. Release 10
Clrau D., Reglarea secundar a sistemelor de acionare hidrostatic n regim de
presiune cvasiconstant. Ed. Media-Tech, Iai, 1999.
Clrau D., Automatizarea sistemelor hidraulice. Ed. Gh. Asachi, Iai, 2002.
ANALIZA DINAMIC A UNUI SISTEM DE ACIONARE HIDRAULIC

FOLOSIT N ACIONAREA UNUI SISTEM CARE SE DEPLASEAZ
CU VITEZ REDUS, N CONDIII DE SARCIN MARE
(Rezumat)
Dispozitivele de putere mare care necesit vitez de micare redus pot fi
acionate de multe ori folosind sisteme hidraulice, datorit densitii mari de putere i a
preciziei de acionare. n plus, dac este vorba despre implementarea pe o aplicaie
mobil, trebuie luate n considerare alte aspecte precum masa componentelor, schimbarea neprevzut a sarcinii sau siguran n operare. O alt caracteristic care trebuie
avut n vedere este domeniul de puteri ce trebuie acoperit.
Aceast lucrare i propune s prezinte cercetri realizate pe un astfel de
dispozitiv. Pentru a optimiza consumul de timp i resurse, s-a realizat un model
interdisciplinar capabil de a ncorpora componentele dependente de timp.
Aplicaia vizat presupune punerea n micare a unui vehicul cu o mas de 5
tone pe o pant de maxim 2% cu o vitez constant de 1...2 m/s avnd o distan
maxim de atingere a acestei viteze. S-a considerat att situaia n care aceast deplasare
se realizeaz att pe beton/asfalt ct i pe pmnt.
Modelul include motorul cu ardere intern care pune n micare pompa cu debit
reglabil, conectat la motorul cu debit constant legat de puntea vehiculului prin
intermediul unor angrenaje care au rolul de a asigura stabilitatea la micarea lent sub
sarcin mare. n model se ia n considerare rezistena la naintare, nclinaia pantei i
momentul rezistent.
Simularea a avut ca scop analiza comportamentului sistemului pentru diferite
configuraii i optimizarea acestuia. Prin rularea simulrii se confirm regimul staionar
prevzut. Regimul dinamic este afectat de oscilaiile de presiune prezente la pornirea
sistemului. De asemenea se poate observa c un motor cu o cilindree mai mic introduce oscilaii de amplitudine mai mare n sistem.
n urma studiului se pot trage dou concluzii. n primul rnd se poate observa c
aceast structur poate satisface cerinele de vitez mic i sarcin ridicat. n al doilea
rnd se poate observa c folosind un sistem cu un volum mai mare asigur o amortizare
accentuat a undelor de presiune i drept urmare o funcionare mai stabil.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
NEW CONTRIBUTIONS IN THE CORRELATION OF

MECHANICAL PROPERTIES WITH THE CAVITATION
RESISTANCE OF STAINLESS STEELS
BY
1
ILARE BORDEAU MIRCEA POPOVICIU2, ADRIAN KARABENCIOV1,

ALIN DAN JURCHELA1 and CONSTANTIN CHIRI3
1
Politehnica University, Timioara
Department of Mechanical Machinery, Equipment and Transport
2
Romanian Academy, Timioara Branch
3
Gheorghe Asachi Technical University, Iai,

Abstract. The paper analyzes the cavitation resistance of twelve stainless

steels based on the correlations between the main mechanical properties
(hardness, tensile strength and flow limit) with the 1/MDPR parameter. Data
regarding the microstructure is presented. The microstructure is important for the
analysis of cavitation damage. Diagrams presented in the paper also offer the
ranking of the studied steels in terms of cavitation resistance, using the steels
mechanical properties as landmark. Final conclusions show that steels with
different values of the mechanical properties and different microstructures can
have similar cavitaton resistances, thus helping hydromechanical equipment
manufacturers in the selection of steels according to the hydrodynamic intensities
of the cavitation conditions.
Key words: cavitation erosion, mechanical properties, microstructure,
cavitation resistance.
1. Introduction
An important issue of hydromechanical equipment manufacturers is the
high price of materials, but choosing the adequate material is also important.
Today researchers are trying to find the optimal contents of alloying elements
Corresponding author: e-mail: ilarica59@gmail.com
36
Ilare Bordeau et al.
that will give mechanical characteristics with a positive influence on the

materials cavitation resistance. The alloying elements influence both the
mechanical properties of the material and its microstructure. Therefore this
paper brings contributions to the correlation of the mechanical properties of
twelve stainless steels for hydromechanical equipment, in this case for the rotors
and blades of hydraulic turbines exposed to intense cavitation. The equations
and the correlation diagrams of the mechanical properties presented in this
paper are an extension of the results obtained by (Garcia et al, 1960), and
(Bordeau, 2006), through the introduction of the Cre /Nie ratio.
2. Studied Materials. Testing Method and Used Apparatus
2.1. Studied Materials
Eight of the twelve experimental stainless steels (denoted according to

the rough chromium and nickel content: Cr6/Ni10, Cr10/Ni10, Cr18/Ni10,
Cr24/Ni10, Cr12/Ni0, Cr12/Ni2, Cr12/Ni6, Cr12/Ni10) were obtained by
casting at S.C. Zirom S.A. from Giurgiu using the Vacuum melting furnace
with electron flow EMO 1200 R (Fig.1), equipped with an electron canon with a
power of 80 kW (manufactured by the Electrical Plants for the construction of
locomotives HANS BEIMLER, Hennigsdorf , Germania). The other four
stainless steels were acquired from hydromechanical equipment exploiters, as
follows (Bordeau, 2006): OH12NDL extracted from the blades of turbines
from Iron Gates I; Stainless steel III-RNR received from the former
ICPRONAV Institute from Galati where it was used in experimental ship
propellers; steels 20Cr130 and X10CrNi18/4PH were used in experiments
regarding the manufacturing of other components exposed to intense cavitation.
Fig. 1 Vacuum melting furnace with electron flow EMO 1200 R.
All the steels originate from parts or half-finished parts. The heat
treatments of the stainless steels were achieved using the UTTIS furnace of the
Politehnica University Bucharest. The structure of the cast parts was marked by
high chemical inhomogeneity (segregation), due to the fact that the cooling
process took place at high speeds and the diffusion processes could not take
place in time.
37
The annealing process was used for the correction of flaws derived from
the casting and for the preparation of the half-finished parts for later processing
and for homogenizing.
Before the cavitation tests, the stainless steels were subjected to solution
hardening in order to improve their properties.
The solution hardening treatment was conducted at 1050C/1hour/water
(Fig. 2).
Fig. 2 Heat treatment diagrams.
Using the Schaefller diagram (Bordeau, 2006), the microstructures of the

studied stainless steels were determined, Table 1 (where simplified designations
were used in order to identify the steels in the diagrams that will follow), in
order to determine the microstructural constitution, without analysing its effect
on the cavitation resistance, but only through the Cre/Nie ratio.
Table 1
The microstructure according to the Cre / Nie ration
(using the Schaefller Diagram (Bordeau, 2006))
Designation
Material
N1
N2
N3
N4
C1
C2
C3
C4
E1
E2
E3
E4
Cr6/Ni10
Cr10/Ni10
Cr18/Ni10
Cr24/Ni10
Cr12/Ni0
Cr12/Ni2
Cr12/Ni6
Cr12/Ni10
OH12NDL
III - RNR
20Cr130
X10CrNi18/4PH
(Ni)e
%
15.173
14.854
14.138
15.101
4.81
6.25
10.145
14.74
4.45
6.1
5.4
8.125
(Cr)e
%
10.266
14.486
21.448
29.145
14.268
14.626
14.9
14.668
13.2
16.1
14.05
20.23
Structure
32%M+68%F
100%A
98%A+2%F
81%A+19%F
75%M+25%F
90%M+10%F
100%A
60%M+40%F
74%M+26%F
50%M+50%F
34%M+66%F
74%A+5%M+21%F
Table 2 presents the mechanical properties of the studied steels and of the
standard steels.
38
Table 2
Mechanical characteristics
Designation
N1
N2
N3
N4
C1
C2
C3
C4
E1
E2
E3
E4
Rm
2
N/mm
Rp0,2
1550
1450
1335
1280
1450
1336
1540
835
650
550
600
610
1120
1020
934
901
1020
935.2
1083
626
400
380
300
338
HB
N/mm
406
371
435
253
461
421
353
286
225
159
170
185
2.2. Testing Method and Used Apparatus
The cavitation erosion tests were conducted on the magnetostrictive

vibratory apparatus T1 (Bordeau, 2006), (Bordeau et al., 2007), using a
vibratory cavitational specimen (www.astm.org/Standards). The total length of
the tests for one specimen was 165 minutes. The tests were paused at regular
intervals, in order to record the mass losses and to examine the surface exposed
to the cavitation attack.
The functional parameters of the vibratory apparatus are: power: 500 W,
vibration fervency: 70000.3% Hz, double vibration amplitude: 94 m,
specimen diameter: 12 mm, supply voltage: 220 V/50 Hz, specimen type:
vibratory, working fluid: double distilled water, whose temperature was
maintained at a constant value of 21 1 0C for the duration of the tests.
The experimental procedure complied with the ASTM standards.
3. Results and Discussions
Starting from the equations established by Hammitt (Hammitt et al.,
1980) (1/MDPR=CHBD, respectively DPR=C(URHB)D) and with coefficients
established by Garcia (Garcia et al., 1960):
1
= 0.998(UR)0.811 ,
MDPR
(1)
1
= 0.734(HB)1.788 ,
MDPR
(2)
39
1
= 1.43(UR HB) 2.0 ,
MDPR
(3)
new equations were established for the correlation of the studied steels
properties with their cavitation erosion resistance, expressed by 1/MDPR.
c
Fig. 3 The variation of cavitation erosion resistance with mechanical properties: a with
the hardness; b with the tensile strength; c with the flow limit.
In Table 3 one can see analytical equations for the approximation curves
from the correlation diagrams (Fig. 3)
Table 3
The analytical forms of the curves from the correlation diagrams
Figure
Analitical form
Coeficient C
Coeficient D
2
1.54
1,77
1/MDPR= CHBD
D
0.54
1,56
3
1/MDPR= CRm
D
4
70.58
1.51
1/MDPR= CRp0.2
40
The simultaneous analysis of Table 1 and Table 3, regarding the

analytical equations and the coefficient values of the main mechanical
properties Rm, Rp0.2, indicates that the values of the parameters remain
unchanged, showing only small differences from the values established by
Hammitt and Garcia (Garcia et al., 1960). These differences show that the
established formulas can be used for the increase of the generalization degree.
Fig. 4 The influence of the mechanical properties and

the chemical constitution on the cavitation resistance.
The equations for the curves that define the cavitations resistance
domains of the stainless steels tested on the magnetostrictive vibratory
apparatus with nickel tube T1 are:
i) for curve 1
1
= 775.1869(1 e 0.004778 ) ,
MDPR
(4)
1
= 129.77(1 e 0.014426 ) ,
MDPR
(5)
1
= 46.3305(1 e 0,04097 ) .
MDPR
(6)
ii) for curve 2
iii) for curve 3
Using the principles that gowern the materials cavitation erosion

resistance, the diagram in Fig. 4 correlated the normalized resistances with the
mechanical properties and the chemical constitution contained in a single
41
formula noted with . This formula represents a generalization of the formula

established by Sakai-Shima (Bordeau, 2006), and generalized by Bordeau
(Grant CNCSIS PN II: ID-34/2007).
Following the evolution of the curves that establish the difference
between resistance levels, the following conclusions can be drawn:
1. The extension of the domains from weak to super resistant is
justifiable, because creating enhanced properties requires the application of
adequate treatments and new technologies that result in the chemical
compositions necessary for obtaining structural constituents with increased
cavitation resistance.
2. These diagrams allow the prediction of the cavitation erosion
resistance for a stainless steel with known mechanical properties.
4. Conclusions
1. It seems that the model proposed by Hammitt-Garcia for the variation
of erosion resistance with the hardness and the other mechanical properties (Rm,
Rp0,2) keeps its form, with the difference between the scale (C) and form (D)
parameters.
2. Eqs. (4) to (6) represent a generalization of the formulas established by
Sakai-Shima and late by Bordeau, with applications for the stainless steels
tested in the Cavitation Laboratory from Timioara.
3. The diagram from Fig. 4 can be used for predicting the cavitation
behavior of stainless steels used for hydromechanical equipment just by
calculating the coefficient .
4. The extension of the cavitation erosion behavior domains from weak to
super resistant is justifiable because creating increased properties requires the
application of adequate treatments and new technologies that result in the
chemical compositions necessary for obtaining structural constituents with
increased cavitation resistance
5. To generate a new method for the ranking of stainless steels further
research is required on vibratory machines with different operating parameters,
in order to broaden the data base for stainless steels, thus allowing the increase
of the degree of applicability for the formulas established in this paper.
Acknowledgments. The present work has been supported from the Grant
(CNCSIS) PNII, ID 34/77/2007 (Models Development for the Evaluation of Materials
Behavior to Cavitation),
REFERENCES
Bordeau I., Eroziunea cavitaional a materialelor. Ed Politehnica, Timioara,
http://www.grupoogman.com/og_it_manual.html, 2006.
42
Bordeau I., Popoviciu M., Mitelea I., Ghiban B., Bloiu V., ucu D., Chemical and
Mechanical Aspects of the Cavitation Phenomena. Chem.Abs. RCBUAU, 58, 12,
1300-1304 (2007).
Garcia R., Hammitt F. G., Nystrom R. E., Corelation of Cavitation Damage with Other
Material and Fluid Properties. Erosion by Cavitation or Impingement, ASTM,
STP 408 Atlantic City, 1960.
*** Developing Models for Assessing the Behavior of Materials under Cavitation
Erosion. Grant CNCSIS PN II: ID-34/2007.
Hammitt F. G., De M., He J., Okada T., Sun B-H., Scale Effects of Cavitation Including
Damage Scale Effects. Report No. UMICH, 014456 - 75 I, Conf. Cavitation,
Michigan, 1980.
NOI CONTRIBUII N CORELAREA PROPRIETILOR MECANICE CU

REZISTENA LA CAVITAIE A OELURILOR INOXIDABILE
(Rezumat)
n lucrare se analizeaz rezistena la cavitaie a 12 oeluri inoxidabile, pe baza
corelaiilor dintre principalele proprieti mecanice (duritate, rezistena mecanic la
rupere i limita de curgere) cu parametrul 1/MDPR. n vederea analizei se ofer i date
despre constituia microstructural, important n analiza distrugerii prin cavitaie.
Diagramele prezentate ofer i o ierarhizare a oelurilor cercetate, din punct de vedere al
rezistenei la cavitaie, folosind ca elemente de baza propietaile mecanice. Concluziile
finale arat c oeluri cu proprieti mecanice diferite valoric i cu constituii
microstructurale diferite pot avea rezistene cavitaionale similare, ajutnd, astfel
constructorii de echipamente hidromecanice n selectarea oelurilor, funcie de
intensitile hidrodinamice ale regimurilor cavitaionale.

Publicat de
Tomul LVIII (LXI I), Fasc. 1, 2012
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
RESEARCH ON FRICTIONAL LOSSES IN

TENSIONING DEVICES AT FULL LOAD
BY
CONSTANTIN CHIRI, ANDREI GRAMA* and DUMITRU ZETU

Gheorghe Asachi Technical University, Iai,
Abstract. In this paper determination of size of frictional losses at full load

friction tensioning devices is performed using theoretical calculations of loading
force and is compared with mesured pulling force developed by tensioning
device. It was tested a device used for reinforcement tensioning, device designed
and realized in Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems Engineering Department,
Faculty of Mechanical Engineering and Industrial Management, Technical
University "Gheorghe Asachi" Iasi. The aim of this research is to compare values
obtained with the values given in literature for tensioning devices made by
profile companies of the world.
Key words: pre-tensioning, device for tensioning, frictional force, tendon.
1. Introduction
The stand, subject of research presented in this paper, includes a
hydraulic tensioning device with mechanically driven blockings.
The structure of the tensioning device used is shown in Fig. 1 (Chiri et
al., 2009).
The construction and functioning of this device must perform the

following functions: grip the tendon; stretch the tendon until the
necessary tensioning force is reached; push some mantle corbels in the
blocking /ancorage slab; unlock the gripping system on the tendon and
remove the device off the end of tendon (Chiri et al., 2009).
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: andreiasi79@yahoo.com.
44
Constantin Chiri et al.
Fig. 1 Tensioning device with mechanically driven blockings (Chiri et al., 2009):
1 cylindrical frame, 2 left hollow rod, 3 right hollow rod, 4 piston, 5 tendon, 6
bushing; 7, 8, 9 wedge grips, tendon blocking system, 10 pipe frame, 11
bushing, 12 abutment cup, 13 bushed bearing with mantle corbel, 14 guiding
tendon pipe; 15 flange, 16 spring, 17 protection bushing, 18 shutter disk; 19
nut with blocking spline.
During pulling of reinforcement for tensioning, occure friction forces due

to friction in the working cylinder and other moving mechanical elements which
oppose to the tension force value. Thus, the active force developed by the
device must be greater than real pulling force.
The purpose of this research is to determine the size of losses at full load
friction tensioning devices used and to compare them with values given in the
literature, for the tensioning devices made by profile companies.
2. Experimental Stand for Determining the Frictional Losses in
Tensioning Devices at Full Load
Friction forces due to friction tensioning devices are opposed to the
piston advance. This force must be added to the effective force of tension.
To determine the theoretical losses of frictional force for single wire
tensioning devices, is used Eq. (1) which gives theoretical value of loading
force,
Fnc = S P,
(1)
where: S surface of the piston of the tension cylinder who release effective
strain in cm2, P pressure of power source for pre-stressing in bar.
To determine the relative losses by friction force is used Eq (2),
F f =
Fnc Fexp
Fexp
100[%] ,
(2)
were: Fexp is actual force developed by tension device measured with force
transducer at the output of hydraulic pressure source working.
45
In this paper was submitted to research two tensioning devices made in

the Department of Hydraulic and Pneumatic Systems Engineering (DISAHP) Department of Machine Tools of the Faculty of Machines Manufacturing and
Industrial Management , Gheorghe Asachi Technical University of Iai. The
devices can strain tendons force 16 tf, first working with a 200mm stroke and
second 500 mm; both devices having surface of the piston of the tension
cylinder S=43.3 cm2.
Real pulling force (Fexp) was determined with test stand in Fig. 2.

Device for tensioning
Digitally force
display
Digitally pressure
display
Stand blocks
experimental
Pressure
gauge
Pressure
controler
High pressure
hydraulic unit
Fig. 2 Experimental stand to determine of real force (Fexp):

TF force transmitter, PT pressure transmitter.
Stand components to determine of real force (Fexp) of tensioning devices

are shown in Fig. 2 as follows: high pressure hydraulic unit for tensioning with
pressure controller; wire TBP9; device measuring service (DMS) for calibrating
the display of pulling force on the high-pressure hydraulic source; pressure
transducer of 01200 bar; manufacturer SUCO, type 0620, accuracy 0.5 %
full scale at room temperature (http://www.suco-pressureswitches.com); force
transducer of 025 tf; manufacturer Aplisens, type PCE 28, accuracy 0.2 %
(http://www.aplisens.pl/); pressure display digital device; force display digital
device; power supply, 220V, AC.
A first set of tests were performed on stand with tensioning device 16 tf
and 200 mm stroke.
For each pressure step, were performed three measurements resulting in
three sets of pull force values. These values, together with theoretical load force
are shown in Table 1. Here are presented numerical and arithmetic averages of
three sets of experimental measured values of force and relative losses by
friction to the device.
46
Table 1
Experimental results obtained for losses of 16 tf tensioning device with 200 mm stroke
Pressure,
[bar]
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
Fexp , [tf]
1
2.4
2.83
3.25
3.67
4.06
4.52
4.9
5.42
5.82
6.21
6.57
6.97
7.32
7.82
8.3
8.58
9.01
9.48
9.9
10.39
10.78
11.12
11.46
11.96
12.34
12.75
13.11
13.64
14.1
14.51
14.9
15.21
15.7
16.05
2.56
2.79
3.27
3.7
4.04
4.53
5.03
5.33
5.84
6.24
6.56
6.96
7.41
8.02
8.45
8.75
9.12
9.69
10.03
10.34
10.81
11.02
11.54
12
12.52
13
13.35
13.81
14.12
14.61
15.02
15.43
15.94
16.34
2.61
2.68
3.26
3.71
4.12
4.61
5.03
5.43
5.82
6.28
6.6
7
7.46
8.06
8.42
8.72
9.15
9.62
10.02
10.34
10.82
11.21
11.6
12.02
12.65
13.06
13.35
13.81
14.2
14.62
15.02
15.43
15.93
16.26
Fnc
[tf]
Average Fexp
[tf]
Relative loss
in device, [%]
2.52
2.77
3.26
3.69
4.07
4.55
4.99
5.39
5.83
6.24
6.58
6.98
7.40
7.97
8.39
8.68
9.09
9.60
9.98
10.36
10.80
11.12
11.53
11.99
12.50
12.94
13.27
13.75
14.14
14.58
14.98
15.36
15.86
16.22
2.598
3.031
3.464
3.897
4.33
4.763
5.196
5.629
6.062
6.495
6.928
7.361
7.794
8.227
8.66
9.093
9.526
9.959
10.392
10.825
11.258
11.691
12.124
12.557
12.99
13.423
13.856
14.289
14.722
15.155
15.588
16.021
16.454
16.887
2.87
8.72
5.89
5.23
5.93
4.40
4.03
4.19
3.88
3.87
5.07
5.22
5.10
3.16
3.12
4.51
4.54
3.64
3.93
4.33
4.04
4.91
4.87
4.49
3.75
3.62
4.23
3.75
3.95
3.79
3.90
4.15
3.63
3.97
Tests performed on the same tensioning device (16 tf) but with stroke
500mm, were made by the same methodology as in the previous case, the
values obtained being presented in Table 2.
47
Table 2
Experimental results obtained for losses of 16 tf tensioning device with 500 mm stroke
Pressure
[bar]
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
Fexp [tf]
1
2.43
2.8
3.22
3.68
4.08
4.4
4.7
5.2
5.76
6.02
6.53
6.92
7.46
7.85
8.25
8.58
8.92
9.28
9.81
10.23
10.61
11.23
11.48
12.03
12.46
12.92
13.3
13.65
14.02
14.4
14.71
15.21
15.58
16.01
2.4
2.85
3.23
3.67
4.09
4.41
4.85
5.25
5.73
6.03
6.51
7.02
7.46
7.9
8.24
8.62
8.9
9.35
9.76
10.21
10.65
11.36
11.73
11.92
12.51
12.91
13.2
13.86
14
14.64
14.84
15.4
15.52
16.01
2.42
2.82
3.23
3.71
4.12
4.45
4.89
5.23
5.73
6.03
6.53
7.12
7.47
7.83
8.47
8.61
8.94
9.29
9.81
10.25
10.54
11.36
11.71
12.03
12.4
12.86
13.28
13.72
14.03
14.64
14.85
15.34
15.75
16.03
Fnc
[tf]
Average Fexp
[tf]
Relative loss
in device
[%]
2.598
3.031
3.464
3.897
4.330
4.763
5.196
5.629
6.062
6.495
6.928
7.361
7.794
8.227
8.660
9.093
9.526
9.959
10.392
10.825
11.258
11.691
12.124
12.557
12.990
13.423
13.856
14.289
14.722
15.155
15.588
16.021
16.454
16.887
2.417
2.823
3.227
3.687
4.097
4.420
4.813
5.227
5.740
6.027
6.523
7.020
7.463
7.860
8.320
8.603
8.920
9.307
9.793
10.230
10.600
11.317
11.640
11.993
12.457
12.897
13.260
13.743
14.017
14.560
14.800
15.317
15.617
16.017
6.98
6.85
6.85
5.40
5.39
7.20
7.36
7.15
5.31
7.21
5.84
4.63
4.24
4.46
3.93
5.39
6.36
6.55
5.76
5.50
5.84
3.20
3.99
4.49
4.11
3.92
4.30
3.82
4.79
3.93
5.06
4.40
5.09
5.15
Using the data in Table 1 and Table 2 was realized graph of the relative
dispersion of the friction losses amounts values for the two tensioning devices
investigated (Fig. 3).
48

10,00%
Relative loss in device [%]
9,00%
Losses by tensioning
device with pulling force
16 tF and stroke 200 mm
8,00%
7,00%
6,00%
5,00%
Losses tensioning device

with pulling force 16 tF
and stroke 500
4,00%
3,00%
2,00%
1,00%
0,00%
60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 320 340 360 380
Pressure [bar]
Fig. 3 Relative losses in tensioning devices with pulling force 16 tf,

for 200 mm and 500 mm stroke.
3. Conclusions
From Table 1 and Table 2, as well as the dispersion graph of the errors
(Fig. 3), we see that the relative losses of force by friction within the device
varies between 3.16% and 8.72%, the maximum known in literature for
tensioning devices with similar characteristics being 10% - 15%.
The studied devices performances are comparable to those of other
devices made by other manufacturers, which validates the use of this device in
the stand for tension reinforcement of pre-stressed concrete.
REFERENCES
Chiri C., Zetu D., Grama A., Afrsinei M., Device for Tensioning of Strands of
Prestressed Reinforced Concrete Structures. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, LV (LIX), 1, s.
Construcii de maini, 65-70 (2009).
*** Studiere i proiectare de modele experimentale - Dezvoltarea unui sistem de
echipamente tehnologice hidraulice de for, inovative, pentru modernizarea
pretensionrii armturilor la structurile de beton precomprimat. Hydramold,
Contract de finanare nr. 151, Tensrelax, Etapa I, 2008.
***
http://www.suco-pressureswitches.com/druckueberwachung/drucktransmitter/
drucktransmitter.php
*** http://www.aplisens.pl/en/produkty/pc.html
*** http://www.hydramold.com/produse.php?cat=SistemeMasurareDigitala.
CERCETRI PRIVIND PIERDERILE PRIN FRECARE N
DISPOZITIVELE DE TENSIONARE LA MERSUL N SARCIN
(Rezumat)
Determinarea mrimii pierderilor prin frecare la mersul n sarcin al
dispozitivelor de tensionare se realizeaz cu ajutorul calculului forei teoretice de
ncrcare n dispozitiv i a forei reale de tragere dezvoltate de dispozitivul de
tensionare.
49
Scopul acestei cercetri este de a determina mrimea pierderilor prin frecare la

mersul n sarcin al dispozitivelor de tensionare utilizate i compararea acestora cu
valorile date n literatura de specialitate, privind dispozitivele de tensionare realizate de
firmele de profil.
Pentru determinarea pe cale teoretic a pierderilor de for prin frecare la
dispozitivele de tensionare monofilare, se va pleca de la relaia (1) care d valoarea
teoretic a forei de ncrcare.
Pentru determinarea pe cale experimental a pierderilor de for prin frecare s-au
utilizat dou dispozitive de tensionare monofilare realizate n cadrul Departamentului de
Ingineria Sistemelor Acionate Hidraulic i Pneumatic (DISAHP) din cadrul Catedrei de
Maini Unelte i Scule al Facultii de Construcii de Maini i Management Industial
de la Universitatea Tehnic Gheorghe Asachi din Iai, care pot tensiona tendoane la
for de 16 tf, unul avnd cursa de lucru de 200mm i al doilea de 500 mm; ambele
dispozitive au suprafaa pistonului cilindrului care realizeaz tensionarea de: 43,3 cm2.
Pentru fiecare treapt de presiune s-au efectuat cte trei msurtori obinndu-se
seturi de cte trei valori ale forei de tragere. Aceste valori, mpreun cu fora de ncrcare
teoretic corespunztoare sunt prezentate n tabelele din lucrare. Tot aici, sunt prezentate
numeric i mediile aritmetice ale seturilor de cte 3 valori ale forei experimentale
msurate precum i pierderile relative prin frecare n dispozitiv.
Din tabele, precum i din graficul de dispersie al erorilor, se observ c pierderea
relativ de fora prin frecare din dispozitiv variaz ntre limitele 3,16% i 8,72%,
valoarea maxim cunoscut n literatura de specialitate, pentru dispozitivele de
tensionare cu caracteristici similare fiind de 10%...15%.
Cele prezentate au condus la concluzia c dispozitivele studiate realizeaz
performane comparabile cu dispozitive realizate de ali productori, ceea ce valideaz
utilizarea acestui dispozitiv n standul de tensionare a armturilor din betonul
precomprimat.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
EXPERIMENTAL RESEARCH REGARDING THE DYNAMIC

BEHAVIOR OF LINEAR HYDRAULIC SERVO-SYSTEMS
BY
CORNELIU CRISTESCU, PETRIN DRUMEA,

CTLIN DUMITRESCU and DRAGO ION GU
Hydraulics and Pneumatics Research Institute /
INOE 2000 IHP, Bucureti
Abstract. The paper presents the results of experimental research on the

dynamic behavior of linear hydraulic motors and linear positioning servosystems carried out in INOE 2000-IHP, in the framework of the NUCLEU
Program. The experimental investigations were conducted on an experimental
stand with data acquisition and computer processing. The article presents some
experimental graphic results obtained in the research, results that are of real
scientific interest, which have a practical value through the using of them in the
design activities of the fluid power components and equipments.
Key words: linear hydraulic servo-systems, dynamic behavior,
experimental research, test stand, data acquisition.
1. Introduction
In the structure of hydraulic drive systems, in addition to the equipment
for generating, conditioning, control and distribution of the hydraulic energy,
there are hydraulic operative elements (motors) that make transformation /
conversion of hydraulic energy into mechanical energy and perform mechanical
work required by the drive system (Velescu, 2003). Therefore, knowing the
dynamic behavior of hydraulic operative elements, as operative parts of the
working machines, is of particular interest to ensure performance of hydraulic
drive equipment and systems. The main operative elements used within
Corresponding author: e-mail: cristescu.ihp@fluidas.ro
52
Corneliu Cristescu et al.
hydraulic control and actuation systems are classified in two categories namely:
linear hydraulic motors and rotary hydraulic motors (Marin & Marin, 1987).
Linear hydraulic motors, which are the subject of research presented, are
operative hydraulic elements that perform a linear motion at the working
mechanism of equipment and machinery. These operative elements have as
their characteristic the rectilinear motion and they are currently known as
hydraulic cylinders, or hydraulic actuators (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1 REXROTH Linear Hydraulic Motor (MHL).
Knowing the dynamic behavior of linear hydraulic motors (MHL), early

since the design stage, involves conducting theoretical research and, also,
experimental researches, which have a substantial role to confirming the
theoretical results (Oprean et al., 1989). Based on experimental measurements,
the experimental research can determine the actual performance of the dynamic
behavior of the hydraulic operative elements. Experimental testing of the linear
hydraulic motors, in order to investigate the factors that influence the dynamic
behavior of linear hydraulic motors (MHL), there has been necessary to design
and construct an experimental test stand, which allowed conducting
experimental research in good condition. The test stand was developed inside of
the Laboratory of Servo-Control Equipments from INOE 2000-IHP.
In design and implementation of test stand for dynamic behavior linear
hydraulic motors the intention was to maximally use the existing facilities, to
which there have been added other equipment, instruments, components and
devices specially purchased, to minimize the costs of such an action. In this
respect, there was made extensive use of the facilities existing in the institute.
2. Design of Dynamic Test Stand
In design of the experimental test stand for dynamic behavior of linear
hydraulic motors, there has been considered the equipment existing in the
Laboratory of Servo-Control Equipments, in INOE 2000-IHP, taking as a base
the structure of an existing stand for testing seals of hydraulic cylinders. It is
equipped with a hydraulic cylinder with bilateral rod, which is actually a linear
hydraulic motor, mounted vertically, which may be required to lift various
weights. Supply of the linear hydraulic motor is made through a servo valve,
from a hydraulic pressure group, with manually adjustable flow and possibility
for flow measurement. The hydro-mechanical diagram of test stand for dynamic
behavior of a linear hydraulic motor is shown in Fig. 2.
53
These experimental stands are a functional group of components,

equipment, devices and proper instrumentation, aiming at allowing the
experiments to be conducted, by which to highlight the factors influencing the
dynamic behavior of linear hydraulic motors.
Fig. 2 Hydro-mechanical diagram of the stand for dynamic tests.
The main components of the dynamic test stand, according to hydromechanical diagram shown in Fig. 2, are the next ones: linear hydraulic motor,
MHL; stroke transducer, TS; mass /weight to be lifted, M/G; force transducer,
TF, pressure transducers, TP1 and TP2; servo valve SV; hydro-pneumatic
accumulators, AC1 and AC2; pressure unit RU, comprising typical parts,
mounted on a tank Rz; data acquisition board, DAQ; computer PC.
In principle, as shown in Fig. 2, the hydro-mechanical diagram of the test
stand for dynamic behavior of linear hydraulic motor includes three major
subassemblies, namely: the pressure unit, the hydro-mechanical system, which
contains the linear hydraulic motor being tested, and the data acquisition system
with computer, sensors and transducers (Calinoiu, 2009). The pressure unit, RU,
provides adjustable oil flow and it has all the elements specific to usual pressure
blocks.
The hydraulic operative system with linear motion consists of linear
hydraulic motor MHL and servo valve SV. The system is equipped with
transducers needed to capture the evolution of parameters of interest: built-in
stroke transducer TS, force transducer TF and pressure transducers PT1 and
PT2. The hydraulic operative system with linear motion, consisting of linear
54
hydraulic motor and servo valve, is actually the subject tested, for the purpose
of ascertaining the dynamic behavior of linear hydraulic operative elements.
The data acquisition system consists mainly of the data acquisition board
DAQ, computer PC and stroke transducer TS, force transducer TF and pressure
transducers PT1 and PT2, and it works on the basis of data acquisition and
processing software. Charging the operative system is performed by placing on
the motor rod, over the force transducer, some parts with masses with different,
but known, weights, M/G. To conduct experimental research on dynamic
behavior of linear hydraulic elements MHL, there was chosen, as research
object, an electro-hydro-mechanical servo system comprising a real linear
hydraulic motor with bilateral rod, MHL, controlled by an electro hydraulic
servo valve SV, manufactured by MOOG Company.
3. Physical Implementation of Dynamic Test Stand
After design, the test stand has been physically implemented by mounting
its components according to the hydro-mechanical diagram in Fig. 2 and located
in the Laboratory of Servo-Control Equipments, as it can be seen in Fig. 3.
Fig. 3 Dynamic test stand for linear hydraulic motors.
Of particular interest is how are located and mounted the transducers

required to absorb variations of the main dynamic parameters, on which
depends, ultimately, the acquisition accuracy of evolution of parameters
(Clinoiu, 2009). The control servo-valve of the hydraulic linear servo-system is
shown in Fig. 4 and the Fig. 5 shows the pressure transducer mounted on the top
of the linear hydraulic motor. In Fig. 6 is shown the flow transducer mounted on
the pump discharge circuit and in Fig. 7 can be seen the pressure transducer
with local display and the gauge mounted on the discharge circuit of the MHL.
Fig. 8 shows the force transducer, which is located under the weights as
the load charging items of MH and in Fig. 9 is shown the stroke transducer
incorporated in the structure of the hydraulic motor MHL (Clinoiu, 2009).
55
Fig. 4 Servo Valve.
Fig. 5 Pressure transducer.
Fig. 6 Flow transducer.
Fig. 7 Pressure transducer and gauge.
Fig. 8 Force transducer.
Fig. 9 Stroke transducer.
4. Conducting Experiments
Conducting experiments on the dynamic behavior of linear hydraulic
motors was based on the testing software outlined at the beginning of the tests.
For research of dynamic behavior, there must be known variations over
time of dynamic parameters of interest namely: variation of stroke, speed and
acceleration, pressure variation in the two circuits of the linear hydraulic motor
and variation of inertia force.
Therefore, after preparation and implementation of all technical
conditions necessary for the operation of this experimental stand, it proceeds as
follows: there are placed, successively, different known masses M, of weight G,
on the rod of the linear hydraulic motor, as its load/charge; there is performed
actuation of the linear hydraulic motor for one, two or three up and down,
consecutive cycles; there is measured the variation of parameters of interest by
acquiring and registering their evolution over time; finally, there are analyzed
the values and graphical evolution of dynamic parameters of interest.
56
According with Testing Program, the tests were conducted for 2 steps of
flow: 12.5 l/min and 27 l/min and for 3 inertial masses: 5kg, 12kg and 17kg.
The hydraulic operative system with linear motion is an assembly of the
linear hydraulic motor and its control servo valve.
Technical data regarding the linear hydraulic motor MHL: type: bilateral
rod cylinder, diameter of the cylinder: 105.4 mm, diameter of the rod: 70 mm,
working stroke: 160 mm, working pressure: 250 bar.
Technical data regarding the servo valve SV: type : MOOG, series: 760,
for pressure: 70 bar, rated diameter: 6 mm, maximum flow: 40 l/min.
5. Experimental Results
After conducting experiments on the dynamic behavior of linear
operative hydraulic components and systems, along time range, in accordance
with the testing program, there were obtained a series of graphical and tabular
results regarding variation in time of the main dynamic parameters: variation of
inertia force on the rod of MHL, Fi=Fi(t); variation of stroke of the servo
system rod, x=x(t), variation of velocity of the servo system rod, v=v(t);
variation of pressure p1, at the input of MHL, p1=p1(t); variation of pressure
p2, at the output of MHL, p2=p2(t); variation of temperature at the input of
MHL, T = T(t).
In Fig. 10, one can see the graphical variations of dynamic parameters
over a complete cycle down-up-down, on stroke of 160 mm., for the flow step
of 27 l/min (corresponding the theoretical velocity of 90 mm/s) and for the
attached masse on rod of 17 kg. In the Table 1, are presented some selected
numerical values of these dynamic parameters, only for a part of lifting stroke.
Fig. 10 Graphical variations of parameters of interest.
t[s]
F[N]
1.64
1.66
1.68
1.70
1.72
-18.46
-12.53
1.404
-5.34
-6.28
57
Table 1
Selective numerical values for lifting stroke
P1[bar]
z[mm]
v[mm/s]
P2[bar]
35.36
35.32
35.40
35.43
35.39
98.464
99.856
101.36
102.83
104.28
74.40
72.80
73.60
72.80
73.60
31.93
31.82
32.06
32.09
32.04
t[C0]
29.44
29.38
29.39
29.39
29.42
Experimental results are in concordance with numerical calculus and the

theoretical results obtained by mathematical modeling and computer simulation.
6. Conclusions
1. The experimental research of the dynamic behavior of the linear servosystems was made by using the modern method of analysis and synthesis,
including theoretical and experimental research. The experimental research has
validated the constructive solutions for the experimental device and the
experimental testing method.
2. The diagram of force variation reveals low values on a complete piston
stroke; this is due to the small masses attached on the cylinder rod.
3. The variation of the piston stroke, on a complete cycle, is linear, with
no sudden variations, due to using of servo-valve.
4. Speed variation is constant, as there are no large jumps at start, also
due the using of servo-valve.
5. Pressure values, on the two piston working circuits, are very close, also
due to the small masses attached on the cylinder rod.
6. Analysis of experimental data enables identification of sensitive
behavior parameters and, through changing their value; it can optimize the
dynamic behavior of components and/or hydraulic acting systems (Fluid
Power).
Acknowledgements. Experimental research presented has been achieved in the
framework of the institutional research program NUCLEU, funded by the National
Authority for Scientific Research in Romania-ANCS.
REFERENCES
Velescu C., Aparate i echipamente hidrostatice proporionale. Ed. Mirton, Timioara, 2003.
Marin V., Marin Al. Sisteme hidraulice automateConstructie reglare exploatare.
Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti, 1987.
58
Oprean, A., Ispas C., Ciobanu E., Dorin Al., Medar S., Olaru A,
Prodan D., Acionri i automatizri hidraulice, Modelare, simulare,
ncercare. Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti, 1989.
Clinoiu C., Senzori i traductoare. Vol. I, Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti, 2009.
CERCETRI EXPERIMENTALE PRIVIND COMPORTAREA DINAMIC A
SERVO-SISTEMELOR HIDRAULICE LINIARE
(Rezumat)
Articolul prezint unele rezultate experimentale obinute n cadrul unei cercetri
complexe, att teoretice, ct i experimentale, desfurate n institutul INOE 2000-IHP,
pe un proiect de crecetare insituional din programul de cercetare NUCLEU al ANCS.
n acest articol se prezint, n mod special, standul de testare realizat, echiparea
acestuia cu senzori i traductoare i cu sistem de achiziie date, procedura de
experimentare, precum i principalele marimi variate n timpul expeirmentrilor.
Analiza datelor experimentale ofer posibilitatea identificrii parametrilor cu
sensibilitate comportamental, iar prin modificarea lor, se poate optimiza comportarea
dinamic a componentelor i/sau sistemelor hidraulice de acionare (Fluid Power).

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
EFFECTIVE METHODS OF COST BREAKDOWN

FOR DIRECT COSTS, TOOLS AND PRODUCT COSTS
BY
FLORINA-CRISTINA FILIP*
Transilvania University, Braov
Department of Economic Engineering and Production Systems
Received: May 6, 2011
Accepted for publication: July 23, 2011
Abstract. Various customers require a detailed breakdown of the product

costs in the quotation and delivery phase, depending on the project costs involved.
Some customers have different procedures and consequently use their own forms.
In principle, detailed product cost illustrations for customers are subject to
restrictions and may only be forwarded to customers once this has been agreed
with the relevant departments. The content of the product cost breakdown is
defined in the escalation stages and forwarded on. All the basic information for all
stages about tooling adjustment costs (testing costs), tooling costs, design costs
and type-specific measuring equipment costs is the same. The aim of this
procedure is to ensure that the information presented to the customer is of uniform
content. This is particularly important if the customer submits an enquiry for a
product to different sales regions on an uncoordinated basis. The purpose of this
paper is to regulate the handling and content of detailed product cost illustrations
based on the cost value (standard quotation cost value) for customers. Through
the use of standard forms, detailed product costs are only passed on to the
customer on a restricted basis. Product cost data may only be handed over to the
customer when all other possibilities have been rejected and it is unavoidable.
Key words: administration cost, standard, price, quality, profit.
1. Introduction
A strong manager must understand how costs are captured and assigned
to goods and services and in addition to alternative methods of costing, a good
manager will need to understand different theories or concepts about costing.
*
e-mail: florinacristinafilip@yahoo.com
60
Florina Cristina Filip
Costing is such an extensive part of the management accounting function that

many people refer to management accountants as cost accountants. But, cost
accounting is only a subset of managerial accounting applications.
The price of any product is one of its most important attributes: a products
price may differentiate it from competing products. The direct costs associated
with the manufacture of a product are those costs that are directly associated
with its manufacture. The most obvious direct costs are direct material and
direct labour costs. Other direct costs always occur when manufacturing a
product, such as the cost of the energy used to produce the product, the cost of
supervising the staff producing the product, etc. Whether these direct costs are
included in the product costs as directs or indirect depends on the circumstances
in a company.
For instance, if the electricity supply to a factory is monitored as its point
of entry into the factory, it may not be possible to measure the energy used by a
particular production line. The cost of energy used in manufacturing a product
could then be apportioned to it according to some company rules, or procedures.
However, if the cost of energy is not significant, it may be regarded as an
indirect cost. Direct costs are sometimes referred to as variable costs because
they vary with the level of production of a product. In theory, if we do not
produce any products of a given type its direct costs are zero.
A direct cost is a cost that is directly associated with changes in production
volume. This usually restricts the definition of direct costs to direct materials
and direct labour (and a strong case can be made for not using direct labour,
since this costs tends to be present even when production volumes vary). For
example, the materials used to create a product are a direct cost, whereas the
machine used to convert the materials into a finished product is not a direct cost,
because it is still going to be sitting on the factory floor, irrespective of any
changes in production volume. Thus, direct costing assumes that fixed costs are
period costs, and so should be recognized as expenses during the period when
they occur.
Exist many situations in which direct costing should not be used and in
which it will yield incorrect information. Its single largest problem is that it
completely ignores all indirect costs, which make up the bulk of all costs
incurred by todays companies. This is a real problem when dealing with longterm costing and pricing decisions, since direct costing will likely yield results
that do not achieve long-term profitability.
2. Cost Breakdown for Tool Costs/Special Direct Costs
2.1. Level 1 Cost Breakdown at Sub-Assembly Level
At Level 1, detailed tool costs for component parts are not given as
standard. Rather, at sub-assembly level, it is the part-specific tooling cost,
design cost and tooling adjustment cost if necessary material cost that are
forwarded to the customer. This information can be obtained from the local cost
61
computation and calculating system. If the customer is not satisfied with the
standard answer, it is necessary to check whether specific information can
potentially be given in accordance with Level 2.
2.2. Level 2 Cost Breakdown at Component Level
If the inspection process produces a decision to respond in accordance

with Level 2, a cost breakdown is performed at component level by standard.
This decision may have a contractual foundation or may be the result of an
additional request for information from the customer following Level 1.
Information on the tooling cost, the design cost and tooling adjustment cost if
necessary material cost can be obtained from the local cost computation and
calculating system.
2.3. Level 3 Detailed Special Direct Costs
If the customer does not accept the information from Level 2, with
detailed special direct costs must be sent to the customer. The contents of this
form are defined by the work planning department and the responsible key user
in network of value management competence for checking and forwarding the
form to sales. The detailed special direct costs include the parts designation, the
tool type and the outlay in hours as well as the hourly rate for the tooling costs,
design costs and the tooling adjustment costs for internal form. From this form
is generated a PDF-Form which can be forwarded to the customer about sales
department. The costs for measuring equipment can also be indicated.
2.4. Level 4 Transfer of Data into Customers Own Form
If the customer is requesting a breakdown of the product costs and

expects to receive this information in a sheet which has been supplied for this
specific purpose (customer-specific form), it is still necessary to follow the
procedure and corresponding steps described under point 2.3. The results must
be entered into the detailed special direct costs form. If required, the
presentation is made by the responsible key user in network of value
management competence after consultation with the customer. This procedure is
to ensure that the contents of the statements made to the customer are the same.
This is especially important if the inquiry for a product from customers is made
to various sales regions at the same time without any coordination.
2.5. Level 5 - Photographs of Tools
Supplementing tooling documentation by including photographs is only

permitted in exceptional cases and after consultation with the responsible key
user in network of value management competence if customer visits can be
prevent.
62
Fig.1 Inquiry processing with cost breakdowns for tooling.
63
To assist in monitoring productive efficiency and cost control,

managerial accountants may develop standards. These standards represent
benchmarks against which actual productive activity is compared. Importantly,
standards can be developed for labour costs and efficiency, materials cost and
utilization and more general assessments of the overall deployment of facilities
and equipment (the overhead) .
4%
24%
Labour
Overhead
Part Costs
72%
Fig. 2 Typically product costs breakdown (Shipulski, 2009).
To meet demand, a manager may prudently authorize significant overtime.

This overtime may result in higher than expected wage rates and hours. As a
result, a variance analysis could result in certain unfavourable variances.
However, this added cost was incurred because of higher customer demand and
was perhaps a good business decision.
4. Conclusion
1. Costing can occur under various methods and theories, and a manager
must understand when and how these methods are best utilized to facilitate the
decisions that must be made.
2. Direct costs are attributable to the production of the goods sold by a
company. This amount includes the cost of the materials used in creating the
good along with the direct labour costs used to produce the good. It excludes
indirect expenses such as distribution costs and sales force costs. Cost of goods
sold appears on the income statement and can be deducted from revenue to
calculate a company's gross margin.
3. The possible mark-ups and mark-downs of the calculated special direct
costs are passed on by sales to the creator of the cost breakdown due to factors
relating market policy.
4. Detailed product cost illustrations for customers are subject to
restrictions and may only be forwarded to customers once this has been
agreed with the relevant departments.

Acknowledgements. This paper is supported by the Sectoral Operational
Programme Human Resources Development (SOP HRD), financed from the European
Social Fund and by the Romanian Government under the contract number
POSDRU/88/1.5/S/59321.
REFERENCES
Briciu S., Cpuneanu S., Effective Cost Analysis Tools Of The Activity-Based Costing
(Abc) Method. Annales Universitatis Apulensis, Series Oeconomica, XII, 1, 2535 (2010).
64
Drury C., Cost and Management Accounting. Thomson Learning, London, 2006.
Quesada-Pineda H., The ABCs of Cost Allocation in the Wood Products Industry:
Applications in the Furniture Industry. Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State
University, College of Agriculture and Life Sciences, Communications and
Marketing, 2010.
Shipulski M., Product Design The most Powerful (and Missing) Element of Lean.
http://www.shipulski.com/2009/12/01/product-design-the-most-powerful-andmissing-element-of-lean, 2009
*** Introduction to Managerial Accounting. http://www.principlesofaccounting.com/
chapter%2017.htm
*** Industrial Management Unit 6: Product Costing & Pricing. http://labspace.open.
ac.uk/mod/resource/view.php?id=361239
*** Direct Costing. http://www.accountingtools.com/direct-costing
*** Cost of Goods Sold COGS. http://www.investopedia.com/terms/c/cogs.asp
METODE EFICIENTE DE REPARTIZARE A COSTURILOR DIRECTE, A

COSTURILOR CU FORA DE MUNC I A COSTURILOR DE REGIE
(Rezumat)
Pentru a produce bunuri, fiecare companie de fabricaie necesit alocarea de
materii prime, fora de munc i cheltuieli de regie n scopul de a determina costurile
finale de producie. Pentru cea mai mare parte a companiilor industriale, costurile de
fabricaie sunt cuprinse ntr-un interval de 60-70% din preul de vnzare final al unui
produs. Prin urmare, nevoia de sisteme eficiente de repartizare a costurilor este esenial
pentru a controla costurile de producie. Pentru unii manageri, este important s tie care
parte din costuri sunt considerate fixe sau variabile. O companie care produce bunuri
trebuie s aibe n vedere aspectele legate de achiziionarea i prelucrarea materiilor
prime necesare pentru realizarea unui produs finit, intrucat produsele rezultate n urma
procesului de fabricaie i costurile de producie, reprezint nsumarea dintre costurile
cu materiile prime directe, costurile cu fora de munc i costurile de regie.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
ANALYSIS BY FINITE ELEMENT METHOD OF ASSEMBLY

WEDGE GRIPS - MANTLE CORBEL
BY
*1
ANDREI GRAMA , CONSTANTIN CHIRI1,

DUMITRU ZETU1 and MIHAI AXINTE2
Gheorghe Asachi Tehnical University of Iai,
1
2
Department of Materials Science
Abstract. To achieve the required pulling and tensioning tendons in

prestressed concrete structures it use locking systems. Locking systems must be
made of materials with appropriate strength so as not to destroy their active
surface due the pulling forces having large and very large values. This is
achieved by using alloy steel, heat treated on active surfaces and by
dimensioning so as to provide necessary forces and unlocking of wedge grips at
the end of tension cycle.
Key words: wedge grips, clamping device, tensioning device,
pretensioning, finite elements analysis, virtual model.
1. Introduction
Locking systems are devices with jams/friction wedges used to secure the
ends of the thus wire and keep them tensioned after removing of the tensioning
device, up to the strength of concrete and blocking tensioning device on the
active contact surface between tendons and the wedge grips.
Locking systems must be made of materials with appropriate strength so
as they do not make damages due the pulling forces which have large and very
large values and in abutment the strained tendons to be kept locking up after
hardening of the cast concrete and relief. This is done on the one hand by using
alloy steels, heat treated to superficial hardness of 6065 HRC on the other
hand, constructionmust be sized so as to provide necessary friction force of
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: andreiasi79@yahoo.com
66
Andrei Grama et al.
blocking systems (at tensioning) and unlocking of wedge grips at the end of
tensioning.
Constructive solution of locking system of tensioning device is shown in
Fig. 1.
Fig. 1 Wedge grips in the device for tensioning of tendon (Chiri et al. 2009).
Theoretical and experimental researches conducted on locking systems

are designed to establish the type of material and their optimal dimensions and
shape. To this purpose theoretical research will be made by finite element
analysis.
Finite element analysis modeling involves the following steps: establish
constructive solution for blocking systems and their components; establishing of
virtual model of locking elements; establishing of surface elements; setting
parameters considered in the analysis; data processing; interpretation of
numerical analysis results.
For analysis by this method was used CATIA (Computer Aided Three
Dimensional Interactive Application) that is a suite of multiplatform
commercial software CAD/CAM/CAE French company Dassault Systemes
developed. (Ghionea, 2007)
In this paper, is presented finite element analysis for the assembly wedge
grips mantle corbel.
In Fig. 2 is shown how is the decomposition of surface contact forces
between wedge grips mantle corbel.
Fk + Fbl
Fig. 2 Mode decomposition of the contact force F on the surface of a wedge grips
mantle corbel (Axinte&Grama, 2009): 1 mantle corbel, 2 wedge grips F force
developed by hydraulic cylinder piston drive, Fbl force who remain in reinforcement
after it was blocking by tensioning in the abutment, FK tensioning force.
67
2. Establishing Virtual Model, Data Processing and Research Results

Assemble contact elements with pretensions pull operation strand of
tensioning device of 16 tf in the virtual model comprises: set of 3 wedge grips,
mantle corbel, wire
To obtain the contact element assembly for pull operation, will be done
the following steps:
i) choose of assembly components;
ii) establish their constraints.
It is considered as a fixed constraint and constraint wedge grips contact
surfaces + mantle corbel (2x conical surfaces wedge grips x 1 = 2 surface) and
surface contact constraint between the wedge grips and wire (3x surface wedge
grips on wire x 1 surfaces wedge grips = 3 surfaces)
Fig. 3 shows the studying assemblies, where all the stages of constraint
on the operation of pulling contact with pretensions of wire are: Start
Mechanical Design Assembly Design
Contact Constrain, existing
elements tensioning device 16 tf.
The model is subject to optimization, where in addition to the set of
wedge grips teeth, and the effects of contact between the wedge grips and
strand, only for wedge grips made of OLC 45 and mantle corbel made of
40Cr10 (Table 1).
Fig. 3 Virtual model of studied assembly.

Table 1
Materials used for assembly and mechanical properties
of elements introduced in the modeling
Element assembly
Material
Mechanical resistance
Wedge grips
Mantle corbel
Wire
OLC 45 STAS 880/88

40Cr10 STAS 791-88
Wire 7 4 STAS
4.8 x 108 N/m

5.6 x 108 N/m2
2
15.1 x 108 N/m
68
Andrei Grama et al.
In this case, two assemblies were used, the difference between them
being that the contact area between teeth and tendon pulling wedge grips
provides a fillet to the wedge grips teeth was observed difference between the
two assemblies created.
To generate finite element model, launches CATIA Analysis &
Simulation package and select Structural Analysis Module Generation. Then
select option Static Analysis of the New Analysis Case window, involving static
analysis of the structure in terms of constraints and loads independent of time.
The tree structures specified requirements are observed the following undertree specification structures.
i) Links to identify the path to save files with the final results, to identify
the path to save intermediate results files, and that to return to proper
specifications solid model for analysis (Product1. CATProduct).
ii) Finite element model specifications: Elements and Nodes, Properties.1
and the State Case. The activation by double pressing the left mouse button,
specification OCTREE Thetraedron Mesh.1: part1 or green symbol associated
with the finite element type, automatically set type tetrahedron, OCTREE.
Tetrahedron window appears in finite element order is selected (linear), and
modified finite element model of global dimensions and maximum deviation
from the real model for each item, according to Table 2.
Table 2
Finite element dimensions and the maximum deviation from the real model
Element assembly
Size
Absolute sag
Wedge grips
15
2
Mantle corbel
20
5
Wire
15
2
A finer mesh was made on the surface of interest, which is the contact
area between teeth and tendon (see Table 3).
Local Mesh Size was achieved by Local Mesh Size icon Model Manager
Bar and specifies the size of mesh element faces choosing areas of interest one
by one.
Table 3
Finite element dimension and the maximum deviation from the real model
Element assembly
Size
Wedge grips
2
Wire
2
Static Case with specifications Restraints.1, Loads.1, Static Case

Solution.1 and Sensor.1 indicating sets of constraints, loads, if the synthesis
solution and analysis results.
69
a) Introduction of displacement restrictions.Radial direction and axial

displacement of the mantle corbel is locking. First we introduced the clamp tool
-clamp, restricting displacement mantle corbel by radial direction.
Axial displacement direction was constrained wedge grips on conical
surfaces with locking mantle corbel by blocking constraint surface.
The restriction on displacement in the axial direction of strand was
constrained on the surfaces of contact between it and pulling teeth wedge grips
in 3 places by:
b) Loads modeling. It applies evenly distributed force between the three
teeth in contact at the end of the wedge grip and strand. Force pulling is 16 tf
and by every one of the teeth of wedge grips is exerted one force FK / no. wedge
grips / no. teeth = 16/03/55 tf. In field of forces that is exerted on the virtual
model we were introduce the module force 97N on negative direction of Y axis
(perpendicular axis to the surface of strand).
Total, the force was applied by a number of 3 areas represent 1 tooth.
Data processing of studied model occur as follows:
It launches the solver calculation of this program. After application of
forces and achieving virtual model calculations the results are post processing
using the following tools.
1. Viewing the status of deformed: twisted images are all used to view the
finite element mesh in the deformed configuration of the system, as a result of
environmental action;
2. Field of viewing equivalent stress (Von Mises) superimposed on the
undistorted structure;
3. Viewing field of displacements.
Fig. 4 Field of viewing equivalent stress (Von Mises)

that appear in all deformed if we have no fillet on the top tooth.
The tool Image ExtremaExtrema Creation can highlight maximum

stress occurrence place, and if they exceed allowable values we can take locally
or globally to optimize virtual model. In Fig. 4 may view the tensions that arise
as we have no jurisdiction on the top of the tooth.
70
Andrei Grama et al.
From we see the analysis that only ends peaks occur which leads to the
conclusion that occurs in this area of tension concentrators. This requires
modification of the rib end zone geometry virtual model. In Fig. 5, we can see
the equivalent stress (Von Mises) at the tooth wedge grip (all over) where we
have fillet on the top of the tooth.
After changing the virtual model by applying a connected fillet (0.4 mm)
to the strand of tooth displacement and stress field analysis shows that the
element with maximum stress (S = 6.56628 008 N/m2) is also on the extremities
ribs. However this new value is acceptable and it is under the admissible value.
In Fig. 6 we can see the action of equivalent stress (Von Mises) in tendon and
wedge grips.
Fig. 5 Field of view equivalent stress (Von Mises) at the wedge grip
teeth if we do not have range on top of the tooth.
Fig. 6 Field of view equivalent stress (Von Mises) that appear together
in the tendon and wedge grip, the tooth has a fillet of 0.4 mm on top.
Comparing the model shown in Fig. 6 we can see the analysis that we do
not have peaks that occur on teeth or on their ends which leads to the conclusion
that not appear in that area the tension concentrators. In this way we had
optimize the geometric shape of tooth wedge grip. In Fig. 7 we can see
equivalent tensions (Von Mises) at the tooth wedge grip (all over) if we had
fillet on the tooth.
71
Fig. 7 Field of view equivalent stress (Von Mises) at the wedge grip
teeth when the tooth has a radius of 0.4 mm on top.
3. Conclusions
1. In material terms that mean the manufactured wedge grips can be
observed and the best material suited for them is 13CrNi35 STAS 791 -66
because strength yield is much closer to the maximum stress of wedge grip. In
this way we had optimize depending on the quality of the best material suited
for material to achieve wedge grips.
2. Using the model of finite element analysis, was optimized the
geometric shape at the end of tooth contact area between the wedge grips and
tendon. If we apply a connection fillet of 0,4 mm based by tooth wedge grip, the
tensions in contact between tendon and wedge grips are much small (Fig. 6 and
Fig. 7). Also, reducing the dimension of wedge grips length from 90mm to
70mm (see Fig. 8), because the length of 90mm wedge grip there is locking on
the strand. (Clamping force is greater than the force required for pooling) (see
Fig. 8).
Fig. 8 Model wedge grips optimized.
72
Andrei Grama et al.
REFERENCES
*** Durabilitatea elementelor i structurilor de beton precomprimat. INCERC
Bucureti Filiala Cluj-Napoca.
Axinte M., Grama A., Finite Elements Analysis on Forces And Tensions That Act on the
Wedge Grips for Drawing Single Wire. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, LV(LIX), 2, s.
tiina Materialelor, 55-68 (2009).
Chiri C., Zetu D., Grama A., Afrsinei M., Device for Tensioning of Stranda of
Prestressed Reinforced Concrete Structures. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, LV(LIX), 1, s.
Construcii de maini, 65-71 (2009).
Ghionea I., , Proiectare asistat n Catia V5, elemente teoretice i aplicaii. Ed. Bren,
Bucureti, 2007.
Grama A., Zetu D., Chiri C., Mathematical Model of Forces That Act on the Wedge
Grips for Drawing Single Wire. Bul Inst. Polit. Iai, LVI(LX), 2b, s. Construcii
de maini, 125-134 (2010).
Manea M., Etanri fr contact Aplicaii. Bacu, 2008.
ANALIZA PRIN METODA ELEMENTULUI FINIT A ANSAMBLULUI

BACURI DE TRAGERE BUC PORT-BACURI
(Rezumat)
Pentru a realiza tragerea i tensionarea tendoanelor necesare structurilor din
beton precomprimat se utilizeaz sisteme de blocare. Sistemele de blocare trebuie s fie
realizate din materiale cu duritate corespunztoare astfel nct s nu se distrug partea
lor activ datorit forelor de tragere mari i foarte mari. Acest lucru se realizeaz prin
utilizarea unor oeluri aliate, tratate termic pe suprafeele active ale acestora i prin
dimensionarea n aa fel nct s asigure forele necesare n blocaje i desfacerea
bacurilor de tragere la sfritul ciclului de tensionare.
Cercetrile teoretice i experimentale efectuate asupra sistemelor de blocare au ca
scop stabilirea tipului de material precum i a dimensiunilor i formei optime ale
acestora. n acest scop vor fi efectuate cercetri teoretice prin analiza cu element finit.
Analiza prin modelare cu element finit presupune parcurgerea urmtoarelor
etape: stabilirea soluiei constructive pentru sistemele de blocare i elementele acestora,
stabilirea modelului virtual al elementelor de blocare, stabilirea elementelor de
suprafa, stabilirea parametrilor avui n vedere n efectuarea analizei, procesarea
datelor, interpretarea rezultatelor obinute din analiza numeric.
Pentru efectuarea analizei prin aceast metod s-a folosit CATIA (Computer
Aided Three Dimensional Interactive Application) care este o suit software comercial
multiplatform CAD/CAM/CAE dezvoltat de compania francez Dassault Systmes.
Se prezint analiza prin metoda elementului finit pentru ansamblul bacuri de
blocare buc portbacuri.
Pe modelul de bacuri de blocare s-a evideniat modul de descompunere al
forelor pe suprafaa de contact buc bacuri de blocare, acesta fiind prezentat n
lucrare. Asamblul elementelor de contact la opera ia de tragere prin pretensionare a
toronului din dispozitivul de tensionare de 16 tF n cadrul modelului virtual cuprinde:
set de 3 bacuri de tragere, buca port bacuri de blocare, toron.
73
Modelul supus studiului are n vedere optimizarea, pe lng forma dinilor setului
de bacuri de tragere, i efectele contactului dintre zona activ a bacurilor de tragere i
toron, numai pentru bacurile de tragere confecionate din OLC 45 i buc 40Cr10.
n urma analizei prin metoda elementului finit, constatm umtoarele concluzii:
Din punct de vedere al materialului din care se confecioneaz bacurile de
tragere, se poate observa c materialul cel mai potrivit pentru acestea este 13CrNi35
STAS 791 -66 datorit limitei la curgere mult mai apropiat de tensiunea maxima din
dintele bacului de tragere. n acest mod am optimizat n funcie de calitatea materialului
cea mai potrivit marc de material pentru realizarea bacurilor de tragere.
Prin cele dou modele de analiz cu element finit, am optimizat geometric forma
dintelui la captul zonei de contact dintre bacurile de tragere i tendon. S-a observat c
aplicnd o teire la extremitile dinilor (capetelor) de 1x450, tensiunea maxim pe
zona teit scade sub valoarea efortului normal maxim. S-a observat c dac aplicm o
raz de racordare de 0,4 mm pe baza dintelui bacului de blocare, tensiunile la nivelul
contactului dintre tendon i bacul de blocare sunt mult mai mici.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
ABOUT THE TUNABLE PROPERTIES OF THE YIG FILMS

WITH APPLICATIONS IN MICROWAVE DEVICES
MANUFACTURING
BY
*1
DANIELA IONESCU , ION BOGDAN1 and GABRIELA APREOTESEI2

1
Department of Telecommunications
2
Department of Physics
Received: June 27, 2011

Abstract. The tunable properties of the yttrium iron garnet (YIG) films
with applications at microwave devices were investigated in this paper. For
improving the manufactured systems, two directions are to be followed in
research regarding the YIG special properties: the frequency tuning capabilities
and the tunable negative permeability of the YIG structures. Study was
performed by structural simulation methods with HFSS 13.0 by Ansoft. A dc
applied magnetic field (3 6.5 kOe) was set in order to obtain the ferromagnetic
resonance modification of the material. By simulations, tunability was achieved
in the 12 - 20 GHz frequency range. The tunable electromagnetic properties of
the YIG films were also studied in ac electromagnetic fields (12 - 30 GHz), on
the high-frequency side of the resonance. The field-driven response of the
labyrinthine magnetic domain walls is harmonic, determining a similar evolution
of the magnetization. For a manufactured metamaterial including the YIG film
and a metallic grid array, simulated with HFSS, the negative magnetic
permeability was determined in a controlled frequency domain. This domain was
identified as 13 - 20 GHz, depending on the metamaterial structure and
controlled by the dc/ac driving field. The study is dedicated to the performance
optimization of the YIG devices in microwave range.
Key words: advanced modeling techniques, simulation in manufacturing
systems, optimal design.
1
Corresponding author: e-mail: danaity@yahoo.com
76
Daniela Ionescu et al.
1. Introduction
The tunable properties of the yttrium iron garnet (YIG) films with
applications at microwave devices were investigated in this paper. The YIG
material having a high Q factor in microwave frequencies is used at the YIGtuned oscillators, drivers, tunable YIG filter for wideband, multi-function YIG
components. The elastic domain walls of YIG have opened the way for specific
applications like the magnetic bubble domain-type memories, field modulating
structures and metamaterials.
For improving the YIG manufactured systems, two directions are to be
followed in the research regarding the YIG special properties: the frequency
tuning capabilities, the tunable negative permeability of the YIG structures.
2. Frequency Tuning Capabilities
2.1. The YIG Films Structure Details
Our study was performed by structural simulation methods, using the

HFSS 13.0 program (Ansoft Technologies). The polycrystalline films of YIG
were reproduced at microscopic level, considering the garnet structure, the
particularities of the unit cell and the intimate interactions between the
microcomponents.
Fig. 1 The YIG la3d(Oh10) space group (Steven Dutch, Natural and Applied Sciences)
(left). Intensity of magnetization map, corresponding to the magnetic domain structure
in the vicinity of a YIG film surface (Del Mar Photonics nano-imaging gallery) (right).
The iron garnet (YIG, Y3Fe2(FeO4)3) is known like a ferrimagnet with a

sharp ferrimagnetic resonance. Its cubic structure (la3d(Oh10) space group, Fig.
1) represent a three-dimensional framework: groups of independent, distorted
FeO4 tetrahedrons linked, by sharing corners, to distorted FeO6 octahedrons.
The Fe3+ ions in the two coordination sites exhibit different spins and determine
77
the magnetic behavior of the material with a unit cell containing 128 ions and a
lattice constant of 12.376 . The YIG present a high resistivity of 1016 /m and
an electric permittivity eff around 15 (Buschow, 2005).
If an external magnetic field is applied parallel to the easy magnetization
axis, in the vicinity of the surface of a YIG film cut perpendicular to the easy
axis, the magnetic domain structure reorganizes at field variation. The domain
configuration changes due to the elasticity of the domain walls, which is
analogous to a liquid surface tension (Fig. 1). Domain wall displacements and
domain rotations occur, determining a continuously tunable negative
permeability at film level.
2.2. Resonance Shifting for the Metamaterial Samples
The ferromagnetic resonance frequency (FMR) for pure YIG can be

estimated with Kittel's formula (Marques et al., 2008):
f 0 [ SI ]
( H + H a )( H + H a + M S ) .
(1)
For a single crystal of YIG, the saturation magnetization, Ms = 0.18 T, the

anisotropy field, Ha, is of ca. 70 Oe and the gyromagnetic ratio = 2.8
GHzkOe1 (Buschow, 2005). The external bias magnetic field H was taken in
range of 36.5 kOe. The almost linear FMR dependence on the bias field was
confirmed by the simulation results. The polycrystalline structure of the YIG
film has to be considered.
Previous studies indicate that the FMR is dependent on:
i) the static magnetic polarizing field; FMR varies almost linear with H0
(He et al., 2007), (Zhao et al., 2007), (Kang et al., 2008);
ii) the grain size (in the range of 1220 nm); FMR is inversely
dependent on grain size on a log-log scale (Gokarn et al., 1982);
iii) the orientation of the magnetic field with respect to the crystalline
axes (influences strongly the shapes of ferromagnetic resonance spectra) (Jalali
et al., 2002);
iv) temperature; the dependence is non-linear (Capolino, 2009);
v) the impurities (nine substitution elements can influence the YIG
structure: Si, Ti, Cr, Co, Ha, Sn, Ge, Mg, Ta) (Chiang et al., 2002);
vi) a periodic layer structure (PLS) in a YIG film (Buschow, 2005),
(Kanivets&Sarnatsky, 2010).
The tunable electromagnetic properties of the YIG films were studied in
ac electromagnetic fields (12 - 30 GHz), on the high-frequency side of the
ferromagnetic resonance. Similar results were reported (DeFeo et al., 2006),
based on the local ac dynamics of the labyrinthine magnetic domain phase in a
YIG sample. The field-driven response of the domain walls is harmonic,
determining a similar magnetization evolution, in the range of 0.180.25 T for
the bulk YIG, respectively of 0.1560.166 T for the YIG films (Capolino,
78
2009), (Gokarn et al., 1982). A similar pattern was considered in our

simulation scenery.
Our study was focused on the composed metamaterial structure
consisting of a YIG film and a copper wires array, excited with a microwave
field. The polarized YIG ensures the negative magnetic permeability, while the
metallic array ensures the negative electric permittivity for specific frequency
domains, depending on the polarizing field and structure parameters.
The metamaterial samples were simulated inside a rectangular waveguide with
the cross-section of 22.86 10.16 mm, excited on a TE10 mode (Fig. 2). In the
metamaterial samples we have a YIG film of different thicknesses (typical 400
m) and copper wires of 0.3 mm wide and 1 mm spacing between their centers.
A gadolinium gallium garnet (GGG, Gd3Ga5O12) substrate (paramagnetic) of
1 mm thick was chosen because its lattice constant and thermal expansion
coefficients match with those of YIG.
Fig. 2 The rectangular waveguide with the metamaterial sample.
A dc magnetic field (36.5 kOe) was set in order to obtain the

modification of the metamaterial resonance. The resonance frequency
dependence on the bias field is illustrated in Fig. 3. The red curve corresponds
to the simulation results and the blue dot curve was obtained by theoretical
calculation of resonance using the Kittel formula.
By simulations, the tunability of the resonance frequency was achieved
in the 1220 GHz range. The theoretical resonance frequency increases almost
linear with the bias field, while the simulation results indicate a polynomial
evolution with respect to H0. Considering the mechanism which generates the
resonance, a simple linear dependence is no more justified. Punctual
experimental results (He et al., 2007), (Marques et al., 2008), obtained for
metamaterial structures based on YIG films, are placed in the vicinity of the
polynomial curve and confirm the simulation results.
20
19
18
17
fr
16
fr sim [GHz]
9
15
10
14
13
fr_K 12
11
9
fr Kittel [GHz]
10
10
9
8
fr theor [GHz] 7
6
3.5
4.5
5.5
79
6.5
H
H [kOe]
3
10 on the bias field, for the composed

Fig. 3 Dependence of the resonance frequency
metamaterial sample consisting of the YIG film and the metallic grid array.
For bias fields of ca. 34.8 kOe the frequency tuning capabilities of
YIG. are to be considered for applications. For higher bias field, the slope of the
fr versus H curve is lower and the energy consumed for tuning is higher.
3. Tunable Negative Permeability
3.1. Components of the Permeability Tensor
For the considered metamaterial structure, where the YIG film is

completed with a metallic periodic array, the local ac susceptibility variations
determine a global negative magnetic permeability in a controlled frequency
range.
For the YIG film, the complex magnetic permeability can be written as
(Marques et al., 2008)
r
= i
0
0
with
r = 1 +
0 ,
1
r
0
(2)
m ( 0 2i1 f )
( 0 2i1 f )
4 2 f 2
2m f
( 0 2i1 f )
4 2 f 2
(3)
(4)
80
where 1 is the damping coefficient, 0 = H0 is the resonance angular

frequency, = the gyromagnetic ratio; H0 is the sum of the external magnetic
field H and shape anisotropy field Ha along the easy magnetization axis,
m = Ms is the characteristic frequency, Ms = the saturation magnetization,
(Ms = 0.18 T, typical for single-crystal of YIG).
The HFSS program was used to obtain the S-parameters corresponding to
the field propagation through the metamaterial samples placed inside the
rectangular waveguide. The real, respectively imaginary parts of the relative
permeability were calculated, for different values of the magnetic field applied
for magnetization. The following expression can be written for the permeability
tensor components (Marques et al., 2008)
B
=
H i
r
0
0,
1
= = 0 i
0
= '+ i " ; = '+ i " .
(5)
(6)
The electromagnetic parameters were computed and the continuously

tunable negative permeability was illustrated on graphs.
3.2. Parametrical Curves for Negative Permeability
Parametrical curves have been obtained, which indicate the frequency

domain of negative values for the effective permeability of the incorporated
YIG film. This domain was identified
in the range of 1230 GHz,
depending on the metamaterial
"
'
represented
structure and controlled by the dc/ac 0
area
driving field (see near).
The first set of curves is given
in Figs. 4 and 5 and has been obtained
fres
f
for different value of the magnetic
polarizing field H. The permeability
12...30 GHz
curves have been represented in the
1230 GHz domain, on the high-frequency side of the resonance, where the
composed metamaterial is used for applications.
The resonance shift with H and the shape of the curves for the
permeability tensor components also varies. Deeper and wider permeability
curves in the resonance vicinity are associated with lower bias field,
corresponding also to a wider negative permeability domain. For intense the
bias fields (up to 6 kOe), this domain is narrower, but placed at higher
frequencies.
The parametrical curves corresponding to the frequency evolution of the
negative permeability tensor components for different YIG film thicknesses are
81
given in Fig. 6. The polarizing field was set at 5.5 kOe and the resonance
frequency remains practically the same due to the fact that the film thickness
does not influence the interaction mechanism between substance and the driven
field. Instead of this, the film magnetization decreases for thicker films, the
amount of energy necessary to order all deep domain moments being higher
than for thinner films. In the same time, the domain of negative permeability
values decreases significantly when the film thickness is grown from 100850
m.
Fig. 4 Real parts of the magnetic permeability tensor components, ', respectively ',
obtained by simulation for the YIG based metamaterial. The YIG film thickness is of
400 m. The resonance tunability was achieved in the 1220 GHz range.
Fig. 5 Imaginary parts of the magnetic permeability tensor components, ",

respectively ", obtained by simulation for the YIG based metamaterial.
(The YIG film thickness is of 400 m.)
One remarks that the magnetic permeability curves are controlled by the
YIG film thickness. If the film is thicker than a specific value, the real part of
the permeability, ', becomes positive over the whole frequency range (the
dielectric effect of the ferrite overwhelms its magnetic properties). Our
simulation results indicate that this phenomenon takes place in the YIG case for
a film thickness of 860 m, which represents the threshold value for existence
of a propagation passband where both magnetic permeability and electric
permittivity occur.
82
Fig. 6 Real parts of the magnetic permeability tensor components, ', respectively
', obtained by simulation for the YIG based metamaterial, for a polarization field of 5.5
kOe and different YIG film thicknesses. The frequency domain corresponding to the
negative values of interest can be selected from graph for each curve.
4. Conclusions
1. This study is dedicated to the performance optimization of the
metamaterial structures based on YIG films, in microwave range. We have
focused on the tunable properties of the YIG films. The garnet is a ferrimagnet
with a sharp ferrimagnetic resonance, for which a bias field determines domains
configuration changes due to the elasticity of the domain walls. As a result,
resonance frequency shifts and a continuously tunable negative permeability
occurs at film level. The considered metamaterial structure where the YIG
works consists of a YIG film and a copper wires array, excited with a
microwave field (1230 GHz).
2. By simulations, the tunability of the resonance frequency was
achieved in the 1220 GHz range, presenting a polynomial evolution with
respect to the bias field, punctually confirmed by the reported experimental
results.
3. The optimum tuning range for bias field is of ca. 34.8 kOe, for
which the material responds better to the polarization control.
4. The negative values for the effective permeability of the incorporated
YIG film occur in the frequency range of 1320 GHz, depending on the
metamaterial structure and controlled by the dc/ac driving field.
5. The shape of the curves for the permeability tensor components
depends on the bias field; a wider negative permeability domain corresponding
to a lower bias field, but this domain is placed at higher frequencies for more
intense bias fields (up to 6 kOe).
6. The domain of negative permeability values decreases significantly
when the film thickness is grown from 100 - 850 m.
83
7. For a threshold value of the YIG film thickness of 860 m inside the
metamaterial, the propagation passband where both magnetic permeability and
electric permittivity occur vanishes.
Acknowledgements. This paper was supported by the project PERFORM-ERA
"Postdoctoral Performance for Integration in the European Research Area" (ID-57649),
financed by the European Social Fund and the Romanian Government.
REFERENCES
Buschow K.H.J., Concise Encyclopedia of Magnetic & Superconducting Materials.
Elsevier, 2005.
Capolino F., Applications of Metamaterials. Taylor and Francis, 2009.
Chiang W.-C., Chern M.Y., Lin J.G., Huang C. Y., FMR Studies of
Y3Fe5O12/Gd3Ga5O12 (YIG/GGG) Superlattices and YIG Thin Films. Journal of
Magnetism and Magnetic Materials, 239, 1-3, 332-334 (2002).
Gokarn S.G., Palkar V. R., Multani M.S., (1982), Sub-micron YIG Microstructure and
Ferromagnetic Resonance Linewidth. Materials Research Bulletin, 17, 8, 957-962.
He Y., He P., Dae Yoon S., Parimic P. V., Rachford F. J., Harris V. G., Vittoria C.,
Tunable NIM Using Yttrium Iron Garnet. Journal of Magnetism and Magnetic
Materials, 313, 1, 187191 (2007).
Jalali A. A., Kahl S., Denysenkov V., Grishin A. M., Vanishing of Cubic
Magnetocrystalline Anisotropy in Critical Angles Effect: Ferromagnetic
Resonance Spectra. Phys. Rev. B, 66, 104419 (2002).
Kang L., Zhao Q., Zhao H., Zhou J., Magnetically Tunable Negative Permeability
Metamaterial Composed by Split Ring Resonators and Ferrite Rods. Optics
Express, 16, 12, 8825-8834 (2008).
Kanivets A. A., Sarnatsky V.M., Generation of High-Frequency Ultrasonic Oscillations
by Thin Films of Yttrium Iron Garnet. XXII Session of the Russian Acoustical
Society, Session of the Scientific Council of Russian Academy of Science on
Acoustics, Moscow, 2010.
Marqus R., Martin F., Sorolla M., Metamaterials with Negative Parameters, Theory,
Design, and Microwave Applications. Ed. Wiley & Sons, 2008.
Zhao H., Zhou J., Zhao Q., Li B., Kang L., Bai Y., Magnetotunable Left-handed
Material Consisting of Yttrium Iron Garnet Film and Metallic Wires. Appl. Phys.
Lett., 91, 13, 131107 (2007).
ASUPRA PROPRIETILOR CONTROLABILE ALE STRATURILOR

SUBIRI DE YIG CU APLICAII LA FABRICAREA
DISPOZITIVELOR DE MICROUNDE
(Rezumat)
Sunt studiate proprietile controlabile ale straturilor subiri de granat de fier i
itriu (yttrium iron garnet, YIG), cu aplicaii la dispozitivele de microunde. Pentru
implementarea practic a unor structuri compuse ct mai performante pe baz de straturi
de YIG, cercetarea se canalizeaz pe dou direcii n ceea ce privete proprietile
speciale ale acestui material: posibilitile de reglaj a frecvenei de rezonan, respectiv
84
obinerea permeabilitii magnetice negative controlabile la metamateriale cu straturi de

YIG. Studiul a fost realizat prin metoda simulrii structurale cu ajutorul programului
HFSS 13.0 de la Ansoft. Structura de tip metamaterial considerat const dintr-un strat
de YIG (100...850 m) i o reea metalic periodic din fire de cupru (de 0.3 mm,
separate la 1 mm), testat n cmpul de microunde (12...20 GHz) al unui ghid
dreptunghiular. Cmpul magnetic constant de prepolarizare al YIG-ului a fost setat la
3...6.5 kOe.
n urma simulrilor s-a obinut un domeniu de reglaj pentru frecvena de
rezonan n intervalul 12...20 GHz, prezentnd o evoluie polinomial n raport cu
cmpul de prepolarizare, confirmat punctual de rezultatele experimentale raportate n
literatur. Nivelul optim de reglaj pentru cmpul de prepolarizare este de cca. 3...4.8
kOe, pentru care rspunsul materialului este consistent i energia consumat pentru
reglaj este mic.
Componentele reale ale tensorului permeabilitate magnetic iau valori negative
pentru YIG-ul incorporat n metamaterialul considerat n intervalul de frecvene de 13...
20 GHz, depinznd de parametrii geometrici ai structurii metamateriale i de cmpurile
de control cc/ca. Forma curbelor ce descriu evoluia cu frecvena a acestor componente
tensoriale depinde de cmpul de prepolarizare; un domeniul mai larg de permeabilitate
negativ corespunde unui cmp de prepolarizare mai slab, dar acest domeniu se
plaseaz la frecvente mai nalte pentru cmpuri mai intense (de pn la 6 kOe). Grosimea stratului de YIG reprezint un puternic parametru de control al domeniului de
permeabilitate negativ a metamaterialului. Limea acestui domeniu scade pn la
anulare odat cu creterea grosimii stratului de la 100 la 860 m (fenomenul prezint
efect de prag). Aceasta are drept consecin anularea benzii de propagare permise, n
care ambii parametrii electromagnetici ai metamaterialului: permitivitatea electric
(asigurat de reeaua metalic) i permeabilitatea magnetic (asigurat de stratul de
YIG) sunt negativi. Studiul este dedicat optimizrii performanelor structurilor metamateriale pe baz de YIG, n domeniul microundelor.

Publicat de
Tomul LVII (LXI), Fasc. 1, 2012
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
EXPERIMENTAL DETERMINATION OF
AND
ON TURNING STEELS
BY
*
ALIN LUCA , MIRCEA COZMNC and ANA MARIA MATEI

Gheorghe Asachi Technical University of Iasi,
Received: July 25, 2011
Abstract. Establishing the roughness of cutting parts is very important

because it affects the functioning of the work pieces. This influence reflects the
operating characteristics of the piece such as wear resistance, corrosion, the
coefficient of friction, the degree of tightness, etc. Surface roughness is
characterized by different roughness parameters and the most important are the
arithmetic average deviation of the profile Ra and ten-point mean roughness
Rz.This paper aims to highlight the relationship between Ra and Rz by measuring
the roughness of specimens subjected to the turning process.
Key words: cutting, roughness, roughness parameters.
1. Introduction
General Consideration. In machining processes, it is necessary to obtain
the desired surface roughness of the parts in the prescribed parameters in order
to produce parts providing the required functioning. The most used parameters
to describe the roughness of machined surfaces are Ra and Rz. The values of
these two parameters are chosen from SR ISO 4287 due to the conditions of
turning surface that has to be met within the product. Turning is a widely used
manufacturing process in which a knife with a cutting edge removes the
undesired material from a moving cylindrical workpiece. The feed rate of the
cutting tool is subject to movements, parallel to the axis of rotation of the
workpiece. Turning takes place on a lathe which provides the power needed to
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: alin_luca83@yahoo.com
86
Alin Luca et al.
process the workpiece at a certain cutting speed, feed rate and depth of cut.
Because numerous studies have shown that the influence of the depth of cut has
a very small influence on the surface roughness (Fnides, 2009), (Sood et al.,
2000), (Doniavi et al., 2007), (Cakir, 2009) this parameter will not be taken into
consideration . Instead, the main attack angle, k affects significantly the surface
roughness (Constantinescu, 1998), (Dragu et al., 1982). Therefore, it is
necessary to determine the influence of these three parameters, cutting speed,
feed rate and main attack angle on turning surfaces.
2. Planning and Performing the Experiments
In practice, the requirements of the drawings and specific checks aim
often for the arithmetic mean roughness, Ra, or for the ten-point mean
roughness, Rz, Ra can be chosen from Table 1.
Table 1
Rational choice of Ra according to the surface usability
Ra
[m]
Surface characteristics
Examples
High contact tensions and very low

wear
High precision spindle shafts of tool

machine
0.2
Very low wear

Surfaces with high precision and high
tension
Surfaces subject to wear and high
precision
Bearers of bearings
Seals. The rolling elements of
bearings
Front seals. Shafts and bearings
0.4
Surface subjected to mean speeds and

pressures. Surfaces of alignment
Motion screw. Sliding surfaces

Centering surfaces
0.8
Reduced wear at low speeds and

tensions
Areas under the felt seal. Shevered

teeth or rectified. Bolted joints subject
to vibration
Guiding and centering surfaces with

periodic movements
Contact surfaces without moving
Visible exterior surfaces
Rough contact surfaces without
moving. Free surfaces of holes
Keying, armatures, fixed hub-shaft

fits, discs
Removable fixed fits. Channels for Vbelts. Threads. Milled teeth
Surfaces with appearence issues.
Front surfaces of the shafts
Rough surfaces, raw, peeled
Castings, forgings, rolled, molded,

pressed
0.012
0.025
0.05
0.1
1.6
3.2
6.3
12.5
25
50
100
As for Rz, an approximate correspondence between the values of these

two parameters is given by ratio (1):
Rz= 4...5Ra .
87
(1)
To study this statement it has been made ten try-outs to verify the
statement made by Eq. (1) and to see how this ratio varies. Tests were
conducted on specimens of OL50 (STAS 500/2-80) with a length l = 250 mm
and a diameter D = 47.5 mm. Specimens were subjected to turning on a SN 250
lathe in dry conditions. The material was chosen because it is wide usage in
manufacturing. To measure the two parameters, Ra and Rz a Taylor Hobson Surtronic 25 (2d) roughness tester was used. As shown in Table 2, three and
four values for each parameter studied were chosen.
Table 2
Distribution of analyzed parameters
Analyzed parameters
v, [m/min] f, [mm/rot]
k, [degrees]
90
0.08
0
120
0.12
30
180
0.16
60
75
Parameter values were chosen after studying the matter of speciality. To

see how these parameters affects the Eq. (1) were made 10 tests.
3. Results and Discussion
In Tables 35 are shown the experimental results of Ra and Rz and the
ratio Rz/Ra for the studied parameters.
Table 3
Setting up the experiment and the experimental results of the influence
of cutting speed on Ra and Rz and on the ratio Rz/Ra
Rz
Rz/Ra
v, m/min
Ra
90
120
180
4.74
4.59
4.60
20.60
18.80
18.70
4.35
4.10
4.07
To highlight the influence of each parameter on turning surface

roughness were drawn Figs. 13.
Table 4
Setting up the experiment and the experimental results of the influence of feed
rate on Ra and Rz and on the ratio Rz/Ra
f, mm/rev
Ra
Rz
Rz/Ra
0.08
1.70
8.26
4.86
0.12
4.63
18.95
4.10
0.16
4.84
22.45
4.64
88
Alin Luca et al.
Fig. 1 Main effects plot of cutting speed on Rz/Ra ratio.
From Fig. 1 it can be seen that the ratio value decreases with the
increasing of speed.
Fig. 2 Main effects plot of feed rate on Rz/Ra ratio.
From Fig. 2 it can be seen that the ratio value drops significantly when
the feed rate f = 0.12 mm/rev.
Table 5
Setting up the experiment and the experimental results of the influence of main
attack angle on Ra and Rz and on the ratio Rz/Ra
Rz
Rz/Ra
K, degrees
Ra
0
3.33
16.40
4.92
30
4.48
18.40
4.11
60
5.95
25.85
4.35
75
6.40
28.50
4.45
From Fig. 3 it can be seen as the higher reported value is obtained at k=0
while the smaller reported value is obtained at k =30.
89
Fig. 3 Main effects plot of main attack angle on Rz/Ra ratio.
4. Conclusions
1. The statement it is verified experimentally, the values of the Rz/Ra ratio
are between 4.07 and 4.92.
2. Smaller values of Rz/Ra ratio were obtain when k=30, f=0.12 mm/rot
and v = 120 m/min, higher value of the ratio were obtained when the parameters
studied were smaller.
3. The value of the ratio increases inversely with the value of Ra, namely
at lower values of Ra (obtained at finishing) the report moves toward maximum.
Acknowledgements. This paper was realised with the support of
CUANTUMDOC Doctoral Scholarships for research and innovation performance
project, financed by the European Social Found and Romanian Government.
REFERENCES
Cakir C. M., Ensarioglu C., Demirayak I., Mathematical Modeling of Surface
Roughness for Evaluating the Effects of Cutting Parameters and Coating
Material. Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 209, 102-109 (2009).
Constantinescu C., Teoria achierii n mecanica fin-ndrumar pentru lucrri practice.
Ed. Gh. Asachi Iai, 1998.
Doniavi A. et al., Empirical Modeling of Surface Roughness in Turning Process of 1060
Steel Using Factorial Design Methodology. Journal of Applied Sciences, 7 (17),
2509-2513 (2007).
Dragu D. et al., Tolerane i msurtori tehnice. Ed. Didactic i Pedagogic, Bucureti,
1982.
Fnides B, Surface Roughness Model in Turning Hardened Hot Work Steel Using Mixed
Ceramic Tool. Mechanika, 3 (77) (2009).
*** http://www.omtr.pub.ro/didactic/ssim.pdf.
*** http://www.penet.ucoz.com/Cap10.doc.
Sood R., Guo C., Malkin S., Turning of Hardened Steels. Journal of Manufacturing
Processes, 2, 3 (2000).
90
Alin Luca et al.
*** Oeluri de uz general pentru construcii. Mrci. STAS 500/2-80.
STABILIREA RELAIEI DINTRE Ra I Rz LA

STRUNJIREA OELULUI OL50
(Rezumat)
Se urmrete variaia raportului Rz/Ra, la strunjirea oelului OL50. Pentru a
verifica n ce msur afirmaia conform creia Rz= 4...5Ra este adevrat, s-au efectuat o
serie de 10 ncercri pe o epruvet avand diametrul d = 47,52 mm, supus operaiei de
strunjire, pe un strung SN250, variind principalii factori de influen asupra rugozitii,
respectiv viteza de achiere v, avansul s i unghiul de atac principal k. Valorile
parametrilor rugozitii au fost masurai cu ajutorul rugozimetrului Taylor Hobson Surtronic 25. n urma experimentrii s-a observat c afirmaia anterioar se verific
experimental.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
FORCE SENSOR IN A WIM HYDROSTATIC SYSTEM

BY
IRINA MARDARE and IRINA TIA*

Gheorghe AsachiTechnical University of Iai
Abstract. Weigh-in-motion of road vehicles is essential for the management

of freight traffic road infrastructure and maintenance. Various types of weigh in
motion sensors have been developed. Existing WIM systems still have limited
accuracy and/or excessively high cost, and their durability in many circumstances
was not proven. We propose a hydraulic system with a force sensor. It is simple,
robust and relatively cheap. In this paper is presented such a system. On these
bases it was developed an experimental setup and in the same time the
SimHydraulics model so one can use only the simulation in the design process in
order to obtain maximum efficiency.
Key words: hydraulic system, force sensor, weigh-in-motion, pressure
measurement.
1. Preliminaries
A considerable demand has emerged in recent years for more accurate
and reliable weigh-in-motion (WIM) systems and sensors in order to provide
road authorities and managers with up to date and online measurements of axle
and vehicle weights. WIM of Road Vehicles is essential for the management of
freight traffic road infrastructure design and maintenance and the monitoring of
vehicle and axle loads. Various types of WIM sensors have been developed:
banding plates (McCall&Vodrazka 1997), piezoceramic cables and bars
(Caprez et al., 2000), piezoquartz bars, capacitive strips and mats (McNulty &
O'Brien, 2003), optical fiber, strain gauge or load cell scales (Chang et al.,
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: iddtita@yahoo.com
92
Irina Mardare and Irina Tia
2000), fiber Bragg grating (Zhang et al., 2008), bridge weigh-in-motion

technology (Liljencrantz et al., 2007) etc. Advances in sensor and electronic
technology have resulted in operation systems since the end of the 1980s.
Such systems (banding plates, piezoceramic cables and bars, piezoquartz
bars, capacitive strips and mats) have been installed and are in operation in
some countries. Existing WIM systems still have limited accuracy and/or
excessively high cost, and their durability in many circumstances was not
proven. Other WIM systems are for now research object or prototype.
We propose a hydraulic WIM system which is very simple, has only one
sensing point, and does not require electronic built-in-the road sensors. The
hydraulic system is supposed to be simple, robust and relatively cheap
2. The Diagram of the Hydraulic System
In this paper is proposed a structure for the oil-filled force sensor system
which is presented in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1 The structure of the force sensor.
The oil filled chamber is deformable only on its upper wall; lateral walls
are thought to be rigid. The volume of the chamber is V. This chamber acts like
a hydraulic force cell. Under the action of force F the volume changes with V.
This change of volume produces pressure p1. The pipe is connected to the
chamber. At the distance 1 it is placed a fixed orifice (diameter d0). The cross
section A0 of the orifice is chosen as it acts like a low-pass filter. The pressure
p2 before the orifice is smaller than p1 with linear pressure loss p.
Accumulator Ac compensates slow pressure variations due to the temperature
changes and is place at the distance 2 downstream the orifice.
3. The Simscape Functional Diagram
The Simscape functional diagram will simulate the functional elements of
the system presented in Fig.1.
The functional diagram for modelling the system is shown in Fig. 2.
Hydraulic
Reference1
MTR2
B
A
PS S
C
V
P
Ideal Translational
Motion Sensor
PS S
Hydraulic Pressure
PS-Simulink
Sensor
Converter
Scope4
Scope
Scope5
Hydraulic
Reference2
PS S
PS-Simulink
Converter2
Scope2
B
A
B
Hydraulic
Pipeline1
Scope1
Fluid
Inertia
Fluid
Inertia1
Hydraulic
Reference3
A
C
Gas-Charged
Accumulator
Fluid
Inertia2
Translational
Hydro-Mechanical
Converter
MTR1
Hydraulic
Pipeline2
Hydraulic
Pipeline3
PS-Simulink
Converter1
S PS
Simulink-PS
Converter
Hydraulic Piston
Chamber
Sine Wave
Hydraulic Pressure
Sensor1
Fixed Orifice
Ideal Translational
Velocity Source
PS S
Custom Hydraulic
Fluid
B
A
P
C2
f(x)=0
Solver
Configuration
C1
MTR3
Pipe+
Inert
Hydraulic Pressure
Sensor3
Hydraulic
Reference4
PS S
Hydraulic Pressure
PS-Simulink
Sensor2
Converter3
Scope3
Fig. 2 The Simscape functional diagram.
PS-Simulink
Converter4
B
A
P
PS S
PS-Simulink
Converter5
93
94
The diagram in Fig. 2 makes possible to set different values for

constructive or functional parameters. One can use it for design of such systems.
The diagram uses functional elements from Simscape library and especially
from SimHydraulics one. In this diagram one can see the blocks for the force
sensor, for the pipes considering friction losses and inertial losses, and the
pressure or flow sensors.
There are some elements there are not among those in the library and it
was necessary to use a new association of elements in order to obtain them.
The diagram offers also some points with Scopes for one to diagnose the
behaviour of each functional element or association of functional elements.
The input which is the force may be a constant, may be step, sinusoidal or
any other type of signal.
The Simscape diagram presented in this paper is relatively easy to use
and requires experience in hydrostatic systems in order to assign the parameters
for functional elements.
In a previous paper is shown the Simulink block diagram for the same
system (Tia & Mardare, 2007).
4. Experimental Equipment
Experimental equipment is shown in Fig. 3. The experimental setup
includes two pressure sensors, pressure gauge and accumulator. The sinusoidal
variation of the force is obtained using a piston actuated with an electric motor
and a cam which sets the stroke of the piston.
Fig. 3 Experimental equipment.
5. Conclusions and Further Research

1. A hydrostatic force sensor may be used in a WIM system.
2. For the proposed structure of the system (Fig.1), it is possible to realise
the Simscape functional diagram. MATLAB programming language is suitable
for hydrostatic systems and the Simscape method, using functional elements, is
relatively easy to use.
95
3. For the force sensor included in a WIM system the dynamic

characteristics are essential. This is the reason for the authors will continue the
research using the functional diagram presented in this paper for the dynamic
analysis of the system.
4. For further researches the Control System Toolbox procedure is next to
be used in order to compare the three methods: the Simulink method, the
Simscape method and the Control System Toolbox procedure for the case of a
WIM hydrostatic system.
Acknowledgements. The present work has been supported from the Grant
(CNCSIS) PNII, 2703/22-111/2008.
REFERENCES
Caprez M., Doupal E., Jacob B., O'Connor A., O'Brien E., Test of WIM Sensors and
Systems on an Urban Road. International Journal of Heavy Vehicle Systems
(IJHVS), 7, 2-3, 111-135 (2000).
Chang W., Sverdlova N., Sonmez U., Streit, D., Vehicle Based Weigh-in-motion System.
International Journal of Heavy Vehicle Systems (IJHVS), 7, 2-3, 205-218 (2000).
Liljencrantz A., Karoumi R., Olofsson P., Implementing Bridge Weigh-in-motion for
Railway Traffic. Computers & Structures, 85, 1-2, 80-88 (2007).
McCall B., Vodrazka W., States Successful Practices Weigh-in-Motion Handbook.
U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration: Available
from: http://www.ctre.iastate.edu/research/wim%5Fpdf/ accessed: 2007-04-10,
1997.
McNulty P., O'Brien E.J., Testing of Bridge Weigh-In-Motion System in a Sub-Arctic
Climate. Journal of Testing and Evaluation, 31, 6, Paper ID: JTE11686_316
(2003).
Tia I., Mardare I., Weigh-in-Motion Hydraulic System. Annals of DAAAM
International for 2007 & Proceedings of the 18th International DAAAM
Symposium, 18, 2007, pp. 759-760.
Zhang H., Wei Z., A Portable Multi-function WIM Sensor System Based on Fiber Bragg
Grating Technology. 19-th International Conference on Optical Fiber Sensor,
7004, 1-2, 456-457 (2008).
SENZOR DE FOR INCLUS NTR-UN SISTEM WIM HIDROSTATIC
(Rezumat)
Pornind de la cazurile n care sunt necesari senzorii de for, este avut n vedere
utilizarea acestora la sistemele de cntrire in micare (WIM). Aceste sisteme sunt n
atenia cercettorilor, mai ales datorit aplicrii lor la cntrirea autovehiculelor grele pe
autostrazi. n lucrare este prezentat un sistem WIM realizat ca un circuit hidrostatic.
Este detaliat structura propus pentru un asemenea sistem. Pentru sistemul prezentat
este realizat schema funcional Simscape. Aceasta permite analiza dinamic a
sistemului. Pentru sistemele WIM, studiul comportrii dinamice este esenial, motiv
pentru care unul dintre obiectivele cercetrilor viitoare este i acela al aplicrii metodei
96
Control System din pachetul MATLAB i realizarea unui studiu comparativ ntre metoda Simulink (Tia & Mardare, 2007), metoda Simscape din aceast lucrare i metoda
Control System. Validarea prin corecii, eventuale, de model se va face prin
confruntarea cu caracteristicile ridicate pe standul experimental.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
RESEARCHES CONCERNING THE UNIFORMIZATION OF

CUTTING FORCES IN FACE MILLING
BY
ANA-MARIA MATEI, MIRCEACOZMNC and ALIN LUCA

Gheorghe AsachiTechnical University of Iai,
Abstract. This paper presents some theoretical results regarding the

evaluation of cutting forces components in face milling. Face milling force
depends on the every variant of face milling process (number of teeth which
simultaneously cut) and the relative position between cutting teeth and the
material being cut (cut-down milling and cut-up milling). Regarding to this,
determination of the cutting force components in face milling, FZ , FX , FY, is
based on the forces for a single tooth, the cutting tooth position beside the XYZ
coordinates system of the tool and the number of teeth that simultaneously cut. In
order to standardize the relationships, a calculus of some practical situations is
proposed.
Key words: cutting, face milling, forces, constants.
1. Introduction
The valuation models of cutting force in face milling previously proposed
(Cozmnc et al., 2009 a), (Matei et al., 2010), (Matei et al., 2011) consider the
influences of the specific elements acting on a tooth, through the relationships
used to evaluate the cutting force in turning whose validity has been proven
experimentally, and the influences of the specific elements in face milling: the
possible variant of face milling, the number of teeth that of teeth that
simultaneously cut and the cutting tooth position beside the XYZ coordinates
system of the tool (cut-up and cut-down milling).
Corresponding author: e-mail: anca_reea@yahoo.com
98
Ana-Maria Matei et al.
By reproducing the five individual types of face milling in the ZX plane

of the cutter, it results the variation limits of the contact angle values,
respectively the values of the number of teeth which simultaneously cut, zs, and
from this point, directly, the differences between FZ, FX and FY for each face
milling variant. The highest values for the force components FZ, FX and FY are
obtained in complete face milling (5 = 180, zs = z/2), and the lowest are
obtained in asymmetrical milling with 2 < 90 and zs 2 (Cozmnc, 1995).
Fig. 1 The values of and zs for the five types of face milling.
For the other types of face milling the values of forces components FZ,
FX and FY depend on the surface width (t, mm) and the diameter D, namely on
the number of cutter teeth, z.
This paper presents some numerical tests of the models developed until
this point and some new theoretical models for the evaluation of cutting force
components in face milling with a higher degree of generality and easier to use
by designers.
2. Theoretical Researches Concerning the Face Milling
Forces Uniformization
2.1. Numerical Tests concerning the Application of the Evaluation
Models of Face Milling Forces
Considering the theoretical models for the evaluation of face milling

forces developed in the previous papers, we propose some numerical
determinations in order to verify their application in real situations. Thus, we
considered three possible cases, namely the processing of an workpiece made
from OLC60 using three face milling tools with the next features: F1 = face
99
milling cutter with D = 63 mm, z = 5, = 72; F2 = face milling cutter with D =

=100 mm, z = 10, = 36 and F3 = face milling cutter with D = 140 mm, z =
=14, = 25.7.
Assuming that every mill is processing the workpiece in all 5 variants of
face milling, for each of these cases, we calculated the number of teeth that
simultaneously cut depending on every variant of milling, and then we
calculated the values of cutting force components in face milling using the
relationships from the previous papers (Matei et al., 2011).
First of all an evaluation of the forces with an average load from a tooth
level is necessary and then an evaluation of the resulting force of the cutter with
zs teeth that simultaneously cut. In the paper (Matei et al., 2011) we have shown
that to calculate the force acting on a tooth we must consider the particularities
of the face milling process, especially the chip thickness variation, since these
relations are used then to calculate the force for zs teeth that simultaneously cut.
To run the theoretical tests for the new valuation models of face milling
force, first we propose a calculation of the average value of the force acting on a
tooth. Thus we developed an example for calculating the force components
acting on a tooth, considering that the working parameters (t, s, v) and the
geometric parameters (, , , K) are as close as possible to those used in face
milling (Cozmnc, 1995), (Cozmnc et al., 2009 b).. The results are presented
in the Table 1.
Table 1
The average values for the forces components acting on
a tooth processing with F1 and F2
Working
conditions,
constant
t = 4 mm
= 5
= 12
= 5
K = 60
Cd = 1.66
n=1
= 0.5
k1 = 1.0397, k2 =
=0.4110, k3 =
0.0435, k4 =
0.0754
C1=1.0357, C2 =
=0.4167, C3 =
=0.1272
Face milling
variant
Cutter
used
Feed, s
[mm/rot]
FZ [N]
FX [N]
FY[N]
Asymmetrical
face milling, =
=90, t = D/2
Complete (full)
symmetrical face
milling, t = D
Asymmetrical
face milling, <
<90, t < D/2
Asymmetrical
face milling, >
>90, t > D/2
Incomplete
symmetrical
face milling
F1
0.097
33.354
13.419
4.096
F2
0.085
29.227
11.759
3.590
F1
0.114
39.199
15.771
4.814
F2
0.085
29.227
11.759
3.590
F1
0.097
33.354
13.419
4.096
F2
0.081
27.852
11.206
3.421
F1
0.12
41.262
16.601
5.068
F2
0.106
36.448
14.665
4.476
F1
0.12
41.262
16.601
5.068
F2
0.106
36.448
14.665
4.476
100
For processing with the milling cutter F3 we have chosen the same
working conditions described above excepting the cutting depth which is equal
to 6 mm for this case. The results were represented in Table 2.
Table 2
The average values for the forces components acting on a tooth processing with F3
Face milling variant
Feed, s
[mm/rot]
FZ [N]
FX [N]
FY[N]
Asymmetrical face milling, = 90, t = D/2

Complete (full) symmetrical face milling, t = D
Asymmetrical face milling, < 90, t < D/2
Asymmetrical face milling, >90, t > D/2
Incomplete symmetrical face milling
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.113
0.113
43.325
43.325
43.325
58.283
58.283
17.431
17.431
17.431
23.449
23.449
5.321
5.321
5.321
7.158
7.158
With the average values of the force components acting on a tooth,

further we can obtain the values for the force components in face milling for all
five possible variants. The results were centralized in Table 3.
As a result of a comparative analysis of the values obtained, the following
conclusions can be drawn:
i) the values of cutting force varie proportionally to the number of teeth
that simultaneously cut (if asymmetrical milling);
ii) the values of cutting force are bigger in incomplete symmetrical face
milling than in complete face milling; this variation is due to the chip thickness,
so in the complete milling, the chip thickness varies from the minimum value
amin = 0 up to the maximum amax = sd, while in incomplete milling the chip
thickness varies from a certain thickness to the maximum;
iii) the components values will not be in the well known ratio of turning,
respectively, Fz > Fx > Fy, so in most of the cases, FX will have a higher value
for cut down milling for all five possible variants, and FY will have a higher
value in full symmetric milling;
iv) there are some differences between processing with F1 and the other
milling cutters because of the small number of cutting teeth that do not comply
with the exactly number of teeth that simultaneously cut corresponding to each
variant;
v) theoretical models used to calculate the force are relatively complex
and difficult to use.
2.2. New Theoretical Models for the Evaluation of
Cutting Force in Face Milling
In order to unify the relationships for the evaluation of face milling force
developed in the previous papers (Matei et al., 2011) we consider a simplifying
assumption according to which the force components developed on a single
101
tooth, Fz, Fx and Fy are equal for all those zs cutting teeth that simultaneously
cut. Therefore the cutting force components take values according to the cross
sectional area of the chip, so we have Fz = Fzmed, Fx = Fxmed and Fy = Fymed for
an average thickness of the chip a = amed.
Cutter
used
F1
F2
F3
F1
F2
F3
F1
F2
F3
F1
F2
F3
F1
F2
F3
Table 3
Numerical tests concerning the face milling force
Cutting force components depending on the every variant of face milling and
the forces developed on a single tooth level FZ, FX, FY
Asymmetrical face milling with = 90
Cut up face milling
Cut down face milling
FZ
FX
FY
FZ
FX
FY
44.321
(-) 37.209
6.145
37.209
44.321
6.145
43.386
-69.412
8.974
70.353
43.386
8.974
80.537
(-) 142.645
18.624
142.645
80.537
18.624
Asymmetrical face milling with < 90
Cut up face milling
FZ
FX
FY
FZ
FX
FY
44.321
(-) 37.209
6.145
37.209
44.321
6.145
37.269
(-) 69.037
8.210
69.037
37.269
8.210
80.537
(-) 142.645
18.624
142.645
80.537
18.624
Asymmetrical face milling with > 90
Cut up face milling
FZ
FX
FY
FZ
FX
FY
30.170
11.832
12.669
21.370
111.456
12.669
44.696
(-) 49.044
15.667
124.226
64.096
15.667
73.462
(-) 74.927
39.369
308.855
143.221
39.369
Complete (full) symmetrical face milling
FZ
FX
FY
27.196
(-) 15.041
14.443
17.580
(-) 14.544
17.948
22.325
(-) 24.587
37.247
Incomplete symmetrical face milling
FZ
FX
FY
13.568
(-) 29.430
12.669
45.061
(-) 49.044
15.667
73.462
(-) 74.927
39.369
Analyzing the mathematical models developed in the previous papers one

can observe the existence of some constants in the form of sums in their
structure.
102
These constants get different nuances depending on the variant of milling

and the cutting teeth position beside the XYZ coordinates system of the tool and
the number of teeth that simultaneously cut, and well call them Czteoretic and
Cxteoretic. They are used to calculate the values of the tangential component Fz
and the radial component Fx, respectively.
Table 4 presents the values of theoretical constants depending on the
factors listed above.
Replacing the constants in the structure of the mathematical models of
previous papers and considering the assumptions described above, we obtain the
Eqs. (1) to determine the cutting force components in face milling.
FZ = Fzmed C zteoretic + Fxmed Cxteoretic .

(1)
FX = Fxmed C xteoretic + Fzmed Czteoretic .
FY = Fymed zs .
The variant
of face
milling
Table 4
The values of theoretical constants depending on
the specific influencing factors at face milling
Fac
e
The
mill
relative
ing
position of
forc
the tool
C zteoretic
es
and the
com
material
pobeing cut
nent
s
zs
Asymmetrical face
milling with
= 90 and
< 90
FZ
2
zs
z i
sin
Cut up
face
milling
FX
s
2
cos
zsi
z
Cut
FZ
2
1 cos z zsi
zs
C xteoretic
s
2
cos
zsi
z
s
2
sin
zsi
z
zs
2
zs
z i
sin
1
down face
milling
2
zs
z i
zs
sin
FX
2
zsi ) +
z
1
zs ( z /4)
2
+ cos(
zsi )
z
1
z /4
sin(
FZ
Cut up
face
milling
cos(
FX
Asymmetrical face
milling with
> 90
2
zsi ) +
z
1
zs ( z / 4)
2
+ sin(
z si )
z
1
z/4
z/4
cos(
FZ
2
zsi ) +
z
zs ( z / 4)
sin(
Cut
down face
milling
z/4
sin(
FX
2
zsi )
z
zs ( z / 4)
cos(
zs / 2
sin(
FZ
1
zs / 2
1
zs / 2
cos(
1
FX
zs / 2
+ sin(
1
2
zsi )
z
2
zs ) +
z i
s
2
cos
zsi
z
2
zsi ) +
z
z/4
cos(
1
zs ( z / 4)
sin(
1
z/4
sin(
1
zs ( z / 4)
cos(
z/4
sin(
1
cos(
z/4
cos(
1
sin(
cos(
1
+ sin(
2
zs ) +
z i
sin(
2
zs )
z i
zs / 2
1
1
zs / 2
2
zsi )
z
2
zsi )
z
cos(
1
2
zs )
z i
2
zsi ) +
z
zs / 2
zs / 2
2
zsi )
z
2
zs )
z i
zs ( z / 4)
2
zsi )
z
2
zsi )
z
zs ( z / 4)
2
zsi )
z
2
zsi )
z
2
zs )
z i
+ cos(
Symmetrical complete
and incomplete face
milling
2
zsi )
z
103
2
zsi )
z
3. Conclusions
1. The values of the forces components FZ and FX acting on the cutter
depend through Cz theoretic and Cx theoretic on the face milling variant (symmetrical
or asymmetrical), the type of face milling (cut-up or cut-down milling) and the
number of teeth that simultaneously cut.
2. Working conditions, respectively the cutting regime, tooth geometry,
nature of the material being cut and the environment are present in FZ, FX and
FY through the corresponding components acting on a cutting tooth.
104
3. For each mill and variant of face milling a number of teeth that
simultaneously cut is assigned, respectively certain values are obtained for FZ
and FX from the cutter level. The FY component takes values based on the value
of Fy component on a single tooth and the number of teeth that simultaneously
cut.
4. The valuation models of face milling force presented in the end of this
paper were developed in a more accessible structure, and arranging the
constants in a table makes them relatively easy to use.
Acknowledgements. This paper was realised with the support of EURODOC
Doctoral Scholarships for research performance at European level project, financed
by the European Social Found and Romanian Government.
REFERENCES
Cozmnc M., Bazele achierii. Ed. Gheorghe Asachi, Iai, 1995.
Cozmnc M. et al., About the Cutting Forces at Face Milling. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai,
LV(LIX), 2, s. Construcii de Maini, (2009a).
Cozmnc M. et al., A New Model for Estimating the Force Components Fz, Fx and Fy
when Cutting Metals with Single Tooth Tools. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, LV(LIX), 1, s.
Construcii de Maini, (2009b).
Matei A. M., Cozmnc M., Ibnescu R., Theoretical Models of Cutting Force
Components at Face Milling. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, LVI(LX), 2b, s. Construcii de
Maini,. (2010)
Matei A. M., Cozmnc M., Luca A., Mathematical Models for the Evaluation of
Cutting Force Components in Face Milling. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, LVII(LXI), 4, s.
Construcii de Maini, (2011)
CERCETRI PRIVIND UNIFORMIZAREA FORELOR DE ACHIERE

LA FREZAREA FRONTAL
(Rezumat)
Valorile forelor FZ i FX de la nivelul frezei frontale depind prin mrimile
Cz theoretic si Cx theoretic de varianta de frezare (asimetric sau simetric), de tipul frezrii
frontale (n contra sau sensul avansului) i de numrul de dini care achiaz simultan.
Condiiile de lucru, respectiv regimul de achiere, geometria dintelui, natura
materialului achiat i mediul de achiere, sunt prezente n FZ, FX i FY prin intermediul
componentelor corespunztoare de la nivelul unui dinte achietor. Pentru fiecare frez i
pentru orice variant de frezare frontal se asigur un numr de dini care achiaz
simultan, respectiv se obin anumite valori pentru forele FZ i FZ de la nivelul frezei. In
ceea ce privete componenta FY, aceasta capt valori n funcie de valoarea
componentei Fy de la nivelul unui dinte achietor i de numrul de dini care achiaz
simultan. Variantele de frezare nu influeneaza mrimea componentei FY de la nivelul
frezei frontale.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
A PRELIMINARY STUDY OF THE KEY FACTORS FOR

SUSTAINING TOTAL QUALITY PR ACTICES
BY
MEHRAN DOULAT ABADI1* and SHARI MOHD YUSOF2

University of Technology, Malaysia,
Department of Industrial Engineering and Management
2
Department of Manufacturing and Industrial Engineering
1

Abstract. Quality management is broadly recognized around the world as a

very important competitive priority for the long-term success of an organization.
Over the last decades, a numerous quality management concepts have been
applied and been practiced by various organizations to attain world-class statue.
However, the recognition of the successes through using the quality management
approach historically has been made by obtain national quality or business
excellence awards. Achieving excellence is hard enough at the best of times;
sustaining it is even harder. Organizations face many challenges and impediments
in sustaining a quality excellence framework in the long run to drive business
improvement. This paper will attempt to investigate and identify the key factors
affecting the implementation of quality award model through literature review and
thus to list these factors. Hence, understanding of the factors will help the
organizations to ensure that these are dealt with appropriately in their journey
towards excellence.
Key words: Total quality management, sustainability, business excellence,
success factors.
1. Introduction
Quality management is broadly recognized around the world as a very
important competitive priority for the long-term success of an organization over
several decades. However, the recognition of the successes through using the
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: dmehran2@live.utm.my
106
Mehran Doulat Abadi and Shari Mohd Yusof
quality management approach historically has been made by obtain national

quality or excellence awards (Laszlo, 1996). The national quality or excellence
awards programs are the next major quality management event following TQM
(Vora, 2002), (McAdam et al., 1998). Therefore, for many organizations
participating in national quality or excellence award program is a way to
support their TQM practices towards achieving world-class statue (Yusof &
Aspinwall, 2000), (Puay et al, 1998), (Adebanjo, 2001), (Grigg & Mann,
2008a). However, to get significant benefit and the best result, organizations
must maintaining the practices with the awards principles for the long-term on
the competitive path and made it a part of their organizational culture. Studies
by (Coulambidou & Dale, 1995) and (Angell & Corbett, 2009) support this
view. Today, the national quality/excellence frameworks and their criteria have
been commonly accepted by many organizations as a powerful tool for
assessing an organization along the quality and excellence path (Meers&
Samson, 2003). Therefore, given todays business climate, it would be hard to
find an organization to ignore the practice on quality management approaches.
However, achieving excellence is hard enough at the best of times; sustaining it
in todays world of increasing global competition, rapid technological
innovation, changing processes and frequent movement in economic, social and
customer environments, is even harder.
2. Literature Review
After the successful of quality management practices in Japan several
countries established national quality/excellence award programs to pursue
excellence in an effective way and to recognize which organizations employed
the best quality management practices. All awards principles are strongly
grouped based on the core of key principles and major constitutes of TQM
(Ghobadian & Woo, 1994), (Ghobadian & Gallear, 1997), (Thompson&
Simmons, 1997), (Hendricks & Singhal, 1999), (Zairi, 2001), (Tan et al., 2003).
Therefore, getting a national quality/excellence award is a confirmation for
TQM implementation successfully (Hendricks & Singhal ,1996); (Ghobadian &
Gallear, 2001) and (Eriksson, 2004). Improvements as assessed against the
quality/excellence framework will lead to long-term business success. As a
result, there has been a trend in organizations to use quality-based initiatives as
a source of competitive advantage.
The literature suggests that the success of an organization by using the
quality-based initiatives does not depend on individual quality tools and
techniques, but it much depends on a range of general management practices,
including: top management commitment and support, establishment of trust and
communication, employee empowerment and motivation, common metrics
across the organization, a stepwise problem solving approach, and standardised
analysis using quality tools (Choo et al., 2007), (Easton & Jarrell, 1999),
(Ehigie & McAndrew, 2005), (Hodgetts et al.,1999), (Powell, 1995), (Soltani et
107
al., 2005), (Venkateswarlu & Nilakant, 2005). Business excellence or

organizational excellence and all round growth have been the spicy subject of
discussion among management academics at the recent years. The first major
study on the concept of business excellence as a topic of academic research
was undertaken by (Peters & Waterman, 1982) in the famous book, In Search of
ExcellenceLessons from Americas Best-run Companies. This investigation,
designed to understand what some leading US organizations were doing to
succeed in the face of the Japanese-led quality revolution. They provide many
suggestions for success criteria behind business excellence concept for
excellent organizations.
2.1. TQM versus Business Excellence
First, TQM as the fourth level of quality management (Van der Wiele et
al., 1997) has been one of the major intuitive for improved productivity for
almost over three decades ago. Although TQM is much older than that, the
total quality movement really picked up steam in the late 1970s and early
1980s when several large American corporations adopted the techniques that
enabled the Japanese to be so successful. There is clear evidence that many
organizations view TQM as the basis for excellence (Adebanjo, 2005). Business
excellence is the goal of every modern organization and can be defined as the
next step after TQM, for the success of enterprise on the competitive path (Vora,
2002), (McAdam et al., 1998).The use of excellence models is popular for the
same reasons that TQM became unpopular. (Adebanjo, 2005).The term of
Organizational Excellence or Business Excellence is generally associated with
the European Fundamental for Quality Management (EFQM) excellence model.
EFQM to provide a model that ideally represents the business excellence
philosophy that can be applied in practice to all organizations irrespective of
country, size, sector or stage along their journey to excellence (Dommartin,
2000).
Table 1 shows a review of the philosophy, principles, process ,
performance, and problem indicators of both reveals that business excellence
was and still is fundamentally based on the quality management concept and
practices. On the other hand, the business excellence model provides a clear
road sign for organizations to follow towards excellence, we may also note that
both TQM and business excellence stress primarily the importance of
continuous improvement.
2.2. Key success Factors of Total Quality
This section presents a review of the key common success factors or
constructs of organizational excellence developed and utilized by researchers in
previous studies. Because of limited resources, it is always not feasible for
organizations to devote their efforts to concurrently address all the success
108
factors. Key common success factors or contributing variables or critical factors

or enablers, in this study can be viewed as those things that must go right in
order to ensure the successful implementation of quality management concepts
such as Business Excellence (BX). In this paper, we tried to investigate key
common success factors for BX based on extant literature review. The
investigation of the key common success factors for successful the practices of
BX are presented in Table 2.
Table 1
TQM versus Business Excellence
Concepts(5Ps)
Philosophy
Principles
Total Quality Management (TQM)

To combine people and quality
techniques to achieve continuous
improvement in the quality of the
product and hence in all aspects of the
operation (Harriss, 1995).
Customer
focused,
leadership,
involvement
people,
process
approaches, continual improvement,
and supplier relationship.
Process
SPC Statistical Process Control) P-DS-A (Plan, Do, Study, Act)
performance
Continuous improvement of the

organization, Customer satisfaction,
and employee development.
Problem
TQM is conceptual and philosophical.

Its strong Ideological and culture
perspective
cannot
be
easily
developed in companies (Salengun &
Fazel, 2000)
Business Excellence (EFQM Model)

To assist organization to participate
in improvement activities leading
ultimately to excellence results and
driving
force
for
sustainable
excellence (EFQM 2010).
Result orientation, Customer focus,
leadership and constancy of purpose,
management by process and facts,
people
development
and
involvement, continuous learning,
innovation
and
improvement,
partnership development, and public
responsibility.
RADAR
(Results,
Approach,
Deployment,
Assessment,
and
Review).
Customer results, people results, and
society results. Key performance
results.
Business excellence needs to avoid
evolving into a purely scoring, shortterm oriented mechanism, losing the
fundamentals of the quality focus.
Various studies have been carried out for the identification of those
factors of successful BX practices, from three different areas: contributions
from quality gurus, formal evaluation BX models and empirical research. Out of
the 38 different critical factors developed by the researchers, 11 were found to
be the most popular critical factors for TQM, meanwhile 7 were found to be the
most popular critical factors for BX. They are all critical factors for TQM and
BX, ranked from the highest to the lowest level of popularity: top management
commitment/support; product/service design; supplier quality management
(some researchers used different terms such as vendor quality management;
supplier chain management; supplier quality assurance; cooperative supplier
relations; supplier management); process management (includes process
109
knowledge, process control and improvement, process analysis and

improvement, process focus); human resource management (includes employee
relations, employee empowerment, employee involvement, employee
participation, employee management, providing assurance to employees, human
resource development, employment continuity, work force commitment); use of
tool and technique; work environment and culture; continuous improvement;
customers focus (customer driven processes, customer orientation, and customer
satisfaction/involvement); leadership; training and education.
From the review, it can be summarized that critical factors for successful
TQM implementation can be classified into three group of researchers: Group
researchers I: soft factors and hard factors (Ahire et al., 1996), (Thiagaragan
et al., 2001), (Lau & Idris, 2002), (Tari & Sabater, 2004), (Rahman & Bullock,
2005), (Vouzas & Psychogios, 2007), (Fotopoulos & Psomas, 2009); Group
researchers II: TQM factors can be divided into strategic factors, tactical
factors, and operational factors (Salaheldin, 2009); and Group researchers III
comprises the TQM framework into organizing, systems and techniques,
measurement and feedback, and culture and people (Chin et al. 2002).
The most important factors in the successful implementation of BX are
full management support and commitment and giving the correct training to the
right people at the right time (McQuater et al. 1995), (Bunney & Dale, 1997).
Managers must understand the importance of their commitment in order to
spread the use of these tools and techniques and to improve the TQM level &
TQM results (Tari & Sabater, 2004). However, tools alone cannot provide
results by themselves. They must be developed to reflect the companies culture
and management vision (Govers, 2001). Tools and techniques also can be used
to reinforce recommendations made to managers (McQuater et al. 1995). The
key to improvement is to focus on the improvement objectives and
recommendations, and use tools and techniques as an aid for that purpose.
The most important factors in the successful implementation of BX are
full management support and commitment and giving the correct training to the
right people at the right time (McQuater et al., 1995), (Bunney & Dale, 1997).
Managers must understand the importance of their commitment in order to
spread the use of these tools and techniques and to improve the TQM level and
TQM results (Tari & Sabater, 2004). However, tools alone cannot provide
results by themselves. They must be developed to reflect the companies culture
and management vision (Govers, 2001). Tools and techniques also can be used
to reinforce recommendations made to managers (McQuater et al. 1995). The
key to improvement is to focus on the improvement objectives and
recommendations, and use tools and techniques as an aid for that purpose.
As can be seen from the review, the CSFs for BX sustainability are very
similar to the CSFs for TQM implementation due to its close. The proposed
critical factors for effective implementation of BX sustainability are
summarized in Table 3.
110
Table 2
Key success factors of business excellence practices developed and utilized by researchers
Freq
Key Common
Business Excellence Sustainability (BES)
No.
.
Success Factors
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Top
management
commitment/su
pport
People
management
Middle
management
involvement
Training and
education
Reward and
recognition
Teamwork and
cooperation
Quality policy
and
strategic
planning
Communicating
for quality
relation
Supplier
management
Accredited
quality
management
systems
Organizing for
quality
Managing by
process
Benchmarking
Self-assessment
Cost of quality
Quality control
techniques
Measuring
customer wants
and satisfaction
+ +
+ + + +
11
+ + +
+ + +
+ +
+ +
+ + +
+ +
+ + +
+ +
3
3
2
+
+ +
+
+ +
4
4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
4. Discussions and Future Research

A review of the literature shows that, TQM is rather than a mere set of
factors, a network of interdependent components, a management system
consisting of critical factors, techniques and tools (Hellsten & Klefsjo, 2000).
111
Table 3
The proposed key factors for effective BES
Key factors (criteria)
Management
responsibility
Resource
management
People management
Quality in design and
process
Measurement,
analysis & feedback
Supplier
management
Customer focus
Sub-factors (sub-criteria)
Strategic quality planning/quality policy; the role of divisional top
management;
top
management
commitment/support;
internal
stakeholders involvement (middle management involvement)
Technology-and production related resources; financial-related resources;
information and communication-related resources
Employee involvement/empowerment; education; and training;
teamwork and cooperation; work environment culture
Process management/operating procedures; role of quality department;
product design; process analysis and improvement; applied quality tools
and techniques
Quality measurement, feedback and benchmarking; continuous
improvement; performance measurement: external and internal; quality
data and reporting; communication to improve quality; recognition and
rewards; quality systems
Supplier quality management/supplier chain management; contact with
supplier and professional associates
Customer
involvement/satisfaction/orientation;
customer
driven
processes
These techniques and tools are vital to support and develop the quality
improvement process (Bunney & Dale, 1997), (Hellsten & Klefsjo, 2000),
(Curry & Kadasah, 2002), (Tari, 2005). BX in general and its principles and
criteria in particular are, alongside critical factors, another important component
of TQM, which emphasizes their importance for the improvement of quality of
business and results. (Tari & Sabater, 2004) suggested that firms must develop
both the hard and the soft parts of TQM in order to succeed. With the passage
of time and with changing customers needs and expectations the word of
quality has been replaced by excellence. As part of this quality progress,
business or organizational excellence has become a recent goal of quality
management movement (Fang Zhao, 2004). Therefore, business excellence
practice can be named as the fifth level of quality management and next step
after TQM, for the success of an organization (McAdam et al., 1998), (Vora,
2002) in this never-ending journey. However, there has been a lack of empirical
and published research and any comprehensive studies reported in the literature
focusing on and revealing factors affecting implementation of BX principles at
management level of winner organizations.
REFERENCES
Ahire S. L., Golhar D.Y., Waller M. A., Development and Validation of TQM
Implementation Constructs. Decision Sciences, 27(1), 23-56 (1996)
Ahmed S., Hassan M., Survey and Case Investigations on Application of Quality
Management Tools and Techniques in Small-Medium Industries.International
Journal of Quality and Reliability Management, 20 (7), 795 825 (2003).
112
Ahmed S. M., Aoieong R.T., Tang S.L., Zheng D. X.M., A Comparison of Quality
Management Systems in the Construction Industries of Hong Kong and the USA.
International Journal of Quality and Reliability Management, 22(2), 149-161
(2005).
Anderson J.C., Rungtusanatham M., Schroeder R. G., Devaraj S., A Path Analytic
Model of a Theory of Quality Management Underlying the Deming Management
Method. Decision Sciences, 26(5), 637-658 (1995).
Antony J., Hughes M., Kaye M., Reducing Manufacturing Process Variability Using
Experimental Design Techniques: A Case Study. Integrated Manufacturing
Systems, 10(3), 162-169 (1999).
Antony J., Leung K., Knowles G., Critical Success Factors of TQM Implementation in
Hong Kong Industries. International Journal of Quality and Reliability
Management, 19(5), 551-566 (2002).
Badri M., A., Davis D., Donna D., A Study of Measuring the Critical Factors of Quality
Management. International Journal of Quality and Reliability Management,
12(2), 36-53 (1995).
Bayazit O., Case Study: TQM Practices in Turkish Manufacturing Organizations. The
TQM Magazine, 15(5), 345-350 (2003).
Bird D., Dale B., The Misuse and Abuse of SPC: A Case Study. International Journal of
Vehicle Design, 15(1), 99-107 (1994).
Bunney H.S., Dale B.G., The Implementation of Quality Management Tools and
Techniques: A Study. The TQM Magazine, 9(3), 183-189 (1997).
Chin K.S., Pun K.F., Hua H.M. Consolidation of Chinas Quality Transformation
Efforts: A Review. International Journal of Quality and Reliability Management,
18(8), 836-853 (2001).
Chin K.S., Pun K.F., Xu Y., Chan J.S.F. , An AHP Based Study of Critical Factors for
TQM Implementation in Shanghai Manufacturing Industries. Technovation, 22,
707-715 (2002).
Christos B., Evangelos L., The Impact of Soft and Hard TQM Elements on Quality
Management Results. International Journal of Quality and Reliability
Management, 26(2), 150-163 (2009).
Coleman S., Douglas A., Where next for ISO 9000 Companies?, The TQM Magazine,
15(2), 88-92 (2003).
Costa N. R. P., Pires A. R., Celma O. Ri., Guidelines to Help Practitioners of Design of
Experiments. The TQM Magazine, 18(4), 386-399 (2006).
Cristiano J. J., Liker J.K., White C. C., Key Factors in the Successful Application of
QFD. IEEE Transactions on Engineering Management, 48(1), 81-95 (2001).
Curry A., Kadasah N., Focusing an Key Elements of TQM-evaluation for Sustainability.
The TQM Magazine, 14(4), 207-216 (2002).
Dale B.G., Managing Quality. 4th Ed., Blackwell Publishers, Malden, MA, 2003.
Deleryd M., Rickard G., Bengt K., Case Studies: Experiences of Implementing
Statistical Methods in Small Enterprises. The TQM Magazine, 11(5), 341-350
(1999).
Evans J.R., Lindsay W.M., The Management and Control of Quality. 5th Ed., South
Western - Thomson Learning, Cincinnati, Ohio, 2002.
113
Gordon M.E., Philpot J. W., Bounds G. M., Long W. S., Factors Associated with the
Success of the Implementation of SPC. The Journal of High Technology
Management Research, 5(1), 101-121 (1994).
Govers C.P.M., QFD Not Just a Tool but a Way of Quality Management. International
Journal of Production Economics, 69(2), 151-159 (2001).
Juran J.M., Made in USA: A Renaissance in Quality. Harvard BusiReview, 71(4), 42-50
(1993).
Krishnamoorthi K.S., A First Course in Quality Engineering Integrating Statistical and
Management Methods of Quality. Prentice Hall, Pearson, Upper Saddle River,
New Jersey, 2006.
Lagrosen Y., Lagrosen S., The Effects of Quality Management - A Survey of Swedish
Quality Professionals. International Journal of Operations and Production
Management, 25(10), 940-952 (2005).
Lakhe R.R., Mohanty R.P., Total Quality Management Concepts, Evolution and
Acceptability in Developing Economies. International Journal of Quality and
Reliability Management, 11(9), 9-33 (1994).
Lau H.C., Idris M.A., The Soft Foundation of the Critical Success Factors on TQM
Implementation in Malaysia. The TQM Magazine, 13(1), 51-60 (2001).
Mason B., Antony J., Techniques: Statistical Process Control: An Essential Ingredient
for Improving Service and Manufacturing Quality. Managing Service Quality,
10(4), 233-238 (2000).
McQuater R.E, Dale B.G., Wilcox M., Boaden R.J., The Effectiveness of Quality
Management Techniques and Tools in the Continuous Improvement Process: An
Examination. Advanced Factory Automation, 3 - 5 October 1994, Conference
Publication, 398 (1994).
McQuater R.E, Scull C.H., Dale B.G., Hillman P.G., Using Quality Tools and
Techniques Successfully. The TQM Magazine, 7(6), 37-42 (1995).
Motwani J., Critical Factors and Performance Measures of TQM. The TQM Magazine,
13(4), 292-300 (2001).
Phadke M.S., Quality Engineering Using Robust Design. Prentice- Hall, New Jersey,
1989.
Pun K.F., Development of an Integrated Total Quality Management and Performance
Measurement System for Self-assessment: A Method. Total Quality Management,
13(6), 759-777 (2002).
Pyzdek T., Berger R. W., Quality Engineering Handbook. Marcel Dekker, Inc. ASQC
Quality Press, New York, 1992.
Rungtusanatham M., Anderson J.C., Dooley K. J., Conceptualizing Organizational
Implementation and Practice of SPC. Journal of Quality Management, 2(1), 113137 (1997).
Salaheldin S.S., Critical Success Factors for TQM Implementation and their Impact on
Performance of SMEs. International Journal of Productivity and Performance
Management, 58(3), 215-237 (2009).
Spring M., McQuater R., Swift K., Dale B., Booker J., The Use of Quality Tools and
Techniques in Product Introduction: an Assessment Methodology. The TQM
Magazine, 10(1), 45-50 (1998).
Tamimi N., A Second-order Factor Analysis of Critical TQM Factors. International
Journal of Quality Science, 3(1), 71-79 (1998).
114
Tari J.J., Sabater V., Quality Tools and Techniques: Are They Necessary for Quality
Improvement? International Journal of Production Economics, Elsevier, 2003.
Tari J. J., Research and Concepts: Components of Successful TQM. The TQM
Magazine, 17(2), 182-194 (2005)
Thia C. W., Chai K.H., Bauly J., Xin Y., An Exploratory Study of the Use of Quality
Tools and Techniques in Product Development. The TQM Magazine, 17(5), 406424 (2005).
Thiaragagan T., Zairi M., A Review of TQM in Practice: Understanding the
Fundamentals through Examples of Best Practice Applications (III). The TQM
Magazine, 9(6), 414-417 (1997).
Thiaragagan T., Zairi M., Dale B. G., A Proposed Model of TQM Implementation Based
on an Empirical Study of Malaysian Industry. International Journal of Quality
and Reliability Management, 18(3), 289-306 (2001).
Van der Wiele A., Dale B.G., Williams A.R.T., ISO 9000 Series Registration to Total
Quality Management: the Transformation Journey. International Journal of
Quality Science, 2(4), 236-252 (1997).
Vouzas F., Psyhogios A.G., Assessing Managers Awareness of TQM. The TQM
Magazine, 19(1), 62-75 (2007).
Watson P., Implementing the European Foundation for Quality Management Excellence
Model. FIG XXII International Congress, Washington, D.C. USA, April 19-26
2002.
Wilkinson A., Redman T., Snape E., Marchington M., Managing with Total Quality
Management: Theory and Practice. MacMillan, London, 1998.
Xie M., Goh T. N., Statistical Techniques for Quality. The TQM Magazine, 11(4), 238241 (1999).
Yusof S.M, Aspinwall E., Critical Success Factors in Small and Medium Enterprises: A
Survey Results. Total Quality Management, 11( 4/5 & 6), 448-462 (2000).
Yusof S. M., Aspinwall E. M., Critical Success Factors for TQM Implementation in
Small and Medium Enterprises. The TQM Magazine, 10, 803-809 (1999).
Zairi M., TQM: What Is Wrong with the Terminology? The TQM Magazine, 6(4), 6 -8
(1994).
Zhang
Z., Waszink A., Wijngaard J., An Instrument for Measuring TQM
Implementation for Chinese Manufacturing Companies. International Journal of
Quality and Reliability Management, 17(7), 730-755 (2000).
Zhang,Z., Implementation of TQM: An Empirical Study of Chinese Manufacturing
Firms. Universiteit Gronigen, Netherlands, 2001.
STUDIU PRELIMINAR ASUPRA FACTORILOR CHEIE CARE SUSIN
PRINCIPIILE MANAGEMENTULUI CALITII TOTALE
(Rezumat)
Managementul total este unamim recunoscut n ntreaga lume ca o proritate
esenial n competiia pentru asigurarea succesului pe termen lung al unei organizaii.
n ultimele decenii, numeroase concepte ale managementului calitii au fost aplicate de
diferite organizaii n vederea obinerii statutului de world class. Cu toate acestea,
recunoaterea succesului prin aplicarea managementului calitii a fost ntotdeauna
realizat prin obinerea de premii pentru calitate naional sau excelen n afaceri.
115
Atingerea excelenei este extrem de grea n majoritatea cazurilor, dar i mai grea este
pstrarea acesteia n timp. Organizaiile trebuie s fac fa la numeroase ncercri i
impedimente pentru meninerea excelenei n calitate n lungul drum al conducerii cu
succes a afacerii. Articolul de fa intenioneaz s investigheze i s identifice factorii
cheie care afecteaz modelului calitii prin prisma literaturii de specialitate. Ca urmare,
nelegerea acestor factori de influen se va constitui ntr-un instrument pentru diferitele organizaii n drumul ctre obinerea i meninerea excelenei n calitate.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
SYNTHESIS ON THE ASSESSMENT OF

CHIPS CONTRACTION COEFFICIENT CD
BY
MARIUS MILEA and MIRCEA COZMNC

Abstract. The assessment of plastic deformation of chips can be done based

on theoretical and experimental considerations. This paper presents the two ways
of assessing the chips contraction coefficient, namely the theoretical and
experimental methods. The results obtained from both methods will be used to
develop a mathematical model for chips contraction coefficient.
Key words: chips contraction coefficient, theoretical methods, experimental methods.
1. Introduction
The chips contraction coefficient represents the capacity of plastic
deformation of different metals during the cutting process. The assessment of
plastic deformation is based on both theoretical and experimental
considerations, which are used to develop a mathematical model for Cd. In this
mathematical model, Cd is dependent on the parameters of the cutting process.
2. The Assessment of Cd
2.1. Analytical and Experimental Methods
2.1.1. Analytical methods consist in the mathematical calculus of the

elements that characterize the plastic deformation of the cut metal in various
conditions. In order for this method to be applied it is necessary to know the
Corresponding author: e-mail: milea_marius@yahoo.com
118
Marius Milea and Mircea Cozmnc
yield curves, the structural characteristics of the materials and the distribution of
the efforts in the deformation zone. The Ernst and Merchant approach
introduces the concept of the single shear plane and the angle it makes with the
surface generated referred to as the shear angle. It has become a classic
approach in metal cutting and has been applied in analyzing the cutting of
different materials even when shearing cannot occur at all. Zorev suggests a
model for the cutting of ductile materials in agreement with the theory of
plasticity (Astakhov, 2003). Summarizing the analytical models, it can be said
that each cutting approach or model reflects a particular aspect of metal cutting
practice. No model can cover all various cutting conditions that can be found
during the real process.
2.1.2. Experimental methods directly measure the elements of plastic
deformation. V. Astakhov suggests two experimental methods for the
determination of the chip contraction coefficient. The simplest method is to
measure the chip thickness and calculate Cd as
t
Cd = 2 ,
(1)
t1
where t2 is the chip thickness and t1 is the uncut chip thickness. This method
cannot be always used because of the chip saw-toothed free surface or its
smallness. The second method is the weighing of the chips. After determining
the length L, the width dw and the weight Gch , the chip thickness is calculated
as
t2 =
Gch
,
d w1Lw g
(2)
where w is the density of the work material and g=9.81m/s2 is the gravity
constant. These methods, either theoretical or experimental, can lead to errors in
assessing the chips contraction coefficient. To eliminate these errors, a
theoretical-experimental model of assessing Cd is suggested, based on both
theoretical considerations, but mostly on experimental results.
2.2. The Development of a New Model for the Assessment of Cd
As we know, theoretical equations for the chips contraction coefficient do

not include all the parameters with significant influence, reason why we suggest
a new model which takes into consideration the sense and the level of influence
of each parameter, that is HB , v, s, K, and ..
A series of authors suggested the model below for the assessment of Cd,
which includes the six parameters mentioned above,
Cd = C
n5 n6
HB n1 v n2 s n3 K n4
(3)
119
The influence levels n1n6 will be determined experimentally. The

complementary angles =90 and =90 are used in order to avoid the
negative and null values of , angles. The authors of this model also suggested
the use of experimental diagrams in double-logarithmic coordinates to assess
the influence levels n1,,n6.
After determining the influence levels, a second step is necessary, namely
the determination of the C constant with Eq. (4), where v0, s0, K0, 0, 0 and HB0
are the values for the independent variables that provide the same value for Cdo
(experimental data tabels or diagrams in double-logarithmic coordinates can be
used)
C=
Cd 0 HB0 n1 v0 n2 0 n3 K 0 n4
0 n5 0 n6
(4)
After determining both the influence levels and the C constant, other
experimental data are necessary to take into consideration the interdependencies
and the values obtained so far may need correction. Thus, after assessing the
interdependencies, Eq. (3) may become
Cd = Cm
n5 m n6 m
HB n1m v n2 m s n3m K n4 m
(5)
The experimental data, the corrected values of C constant and of the

influence levels will be used to verify Eq. (5). The values obtained with Eq. (5)
will be compared with experimental data. Depending on the similarity between
the two sets of values, a new model for assessing Cd can be obtained by
correcting Eq. (5) and introducing an intermediary parameter with
Cm = C d exp
HB n1m v n2 m s n3m K n4 m
n5 m n6 m
(6)
In Eq. (6), the parameters HB, v, s, K, , have the values for which
Cdexp. has been obtained experimentally.
Finally, Eq. (7) is obtained, in which nm, nv, ns, nK, n, n represent the
influence levels of the cut material, the cutting speed, the feed and the
constructive angles of the tool, , , K.
n
Cd = Cm
n
HB nm v nv s ns K nK
(7)
The calculus model (7) suggested for the assessment of Cd must be

adjusted according to the specific parameters of each cutting process and cut
material (ductile or less ductile-fragile).
120
Marius Milea and Mircea Cozmnc
3. Conclusions
1. The new suggested model is useful for the development of a new
model for the assessment of the cutting forces depending on the chips
contraction coefficient and is complementary to other existing models.
2. This model includes six parameters of paramount significance, namely,
the cut material hardness, the cutting speed, the cutting feed and the
constructive angles of the tool.
3. In the future, the values obtained with this new model of assessing Cd
could be used for classifying the metallic materials from the point of view of
their cutting workability.
REFERENCES
Astakhov V., Shvets, S.V, The assessment of Plastic Deformation in Metal Cutting.
Journal of Materials Processing Technology, 146(2), 193-202 (2004)..
Croitoru I., Segal R., Cozmnc M.,Model for Predicting Cutting Forces. Bul. Inst.
Polit. Iai, , XLIV(XLVIII), Supliment I, s. V, 189-193 (1998).
Cozmnc I., Cozmnc M., Ibnescu R., About a New Method for Cutting Forces
Evaluation. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, , LIV(LX), 2a, s. V, 125-129 (2010).
Cozmnc I., Ibnescu R., Rdulescu M., Ungureanu C., Voicu C., , Experimental
Results Regarding the Chips Contraction at Steel Turning. Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai,
LVI (LX), 1, s. V, 13-18 (2010).
SINTEZ ASUPRA EVALURII COEFICIENTULUI
DE DEFORMARE PLASTIC CD
(Rezumat)
Se prezint pe scurt cele mai importante modele teoretice i experimentale de
evaluare a coeficientului de deformare plastic Cd. Modelul propus de cercettorii n
domeniu include ase factori cu influen semnificativ, respectiv, viteza principal de
achiere, avansul de achiere, duritatea materialului achiat i unghiurile constructive
ale sculei. S-a ncercat dezvoltarea acestui model, evalundu-se interdependenele dintre
aceti parametri i obinndu-se o nou relaie care va trebui verificat experimental.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
INFLUENCE OF CHORD VARIATION ON THE

PERFORMANCE OF A KINETIC MINITURBINE
BY
EUGEN-VLAD NSTASE and DORU CLRAU

Received: July 10 2011
Abstract. In this paper we present an analisys of miniturbine performance

when the value of chord is variable. This study is conducted for a given situation
in which is known the average flow speed and number and the geometry of blades
for an kinetic miniturbine.
Key words: water current turbines, kinetic miniturbine.
1. Introduction
There are basically two methods of extracting energy from water. The
conventional method is to place a barrage across an estuary with a large tidal
range to create a static head or pressure difference, and operate a low head
hydro-electric power plant with intermittent, reversing flow. The less wellknown method of extracting energy from tidal and other flows is to convert the
kinetic energy of moving water directly to mechanical shaft power without
otherwise interrupting the natural flow. The aim of this paper is to study
influence of chord variation on the performance of a kinetic miniturbine.
2. Mathematical Model
The performance of the miniturbine (Zanette et al., 2007), (Jureczko et
al., 2005), (Lanzafame & Messina, 2007) is theoretically predicted by
considering the coefficient of power defined with equation:
Corresponding author: e-mail: nastase_eugenvlad@yahoo.com
122
Eugen-Vlad Nstase and Doru Clra u
dPT
Kp =
rdrV3
(1)
where, rdrV3 is the power available from a stream of water, and dPT is the
power extracted by miniturbine.
Fig. 1 Blade cross-section at radius r.
Can be estimated (from Fig. 1) the tangential component
dTu = dRP sin dRR cos ,
(2)
dR P = 2 CPW 2 cdr
(3)
dR R = 2 CRW 2 cdr .
(4)
For evaluate the torque on the miniturbine shaft we are using the relationship:
sin( )
dM = nrdTu = n rcdrW 2CP
.
2
cos
(5)
Finally the coefficient of power is
Kp =
dPT
rdrV3
dM
rdrV3
cn V2 + 2 r 2
2V3
)C
sin( )
.
cos
(6)
In the above equations: is the density of water, V is the free stream

velocity of the current, n is the number of blades, c is the chord, CP is lift
coefficient, CR is drag coefficient. The consequence of this relationship is that
power and hence energy capture are highly sensitive to chord, number of blades,
velocity, lift coefficient.
123
3. Results
Calculations were made for two types of blades: type swept (Fig. 4a),
with chord constant along the blade and type sword (Fig. 4b), with chord
variable along the blade.
Fig. 2 Variation of lift and drag coefficient.
Fig. 3 Variation of finess and power coefficient.
Fig.4 Efficiency for variation of chord.
Legend of representation:
Value of chord is constant along the blade:
c=0,034(m),
c=0,044 (m),
c=0,054 (m).
Value of chord is variable along the blade:
c=0,034 (m),
c=
0,044(m),
c=0,054 (m).
and
and
124
Eugen-Vlad Nstase and Doru Clra u
4. Conclusions
1. The analysis performed is found that better performance is obtained for
the case of variable chord along the profile (Fig. 4b).
2. For the two cases considered the best value for chord is c=0.034m (Fig.
4).
3. This type of kinetic miniturbine have the advantage of not requiring

storage dam, is simple construction and maintenance costs are relatively small.
REFERENCES
Jureczko M., Pawlak M., Mezyk A., Optimisation of Wind Turbine Blades. Journal of
Materials Processing Technology, 463-471 (2005).
Lanzafame R., Messina M., Fluid Dynamics Wind Turbine Design: Critical Analysis.
Optimization and Application of BEM Theory. Renewable Energy, 32, 2291-2305
(2007).
Zanette J., Imbault D., Tourabi A., Fluid-structure Interaction and Design of Water
Current Turbines. Grenoble, France, 2007.
INFLUENA VARIAIEI CORZII ASUPRA
PERFORMANELOR UNEI MINITURBINE CINETICE
(Rezumat)
n aceast lucrare se prezint analiza performanelor unei miniturbine pentru
dou situaii. Primul caz este cel al unei miniturbine cu pale care au coarda constant n
lungul anvergurii. Al doilea caz este cel al miniturbinei cu pale avnd coarda variabil
n lungul anvergurii. Acest studiu este realizat pentru o locaie cunoscut, cnd se
cunoate viteza medie de curgere a apei, geometria i numrul de pale.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
THEORETICAL RESEARCH REGARDING THE BLADES

NUMBER INFLUENCE OF THE MINITURBINE EFFICIENCY
BY
EUGEN-VLAD NSTASE and DORU CLRAU

Abstract. The aim of the paper is to is to achieve a theoretical study on the

influence of the number of blades on the performance of miniturbine. The study
is conducted to a location with average speed of water flow known.
Key words: renewable energy, kinetic turbine, energy conversion.
1. Introduction
Renewable energy technologies offer the promise of non-polluting
alternatives to fossil and nuclear-fueled power plants to meet growing demand
for electrical energy (Batten et al., 2006), (Lago et al., 2010), (***, 2011).
Water current turbines are defined as systems that convert hydro kinetic energy
from flowing waters into electricity, mechanical power, or other forms of
energy. This is a free flowing turbine in which the water runoffs are given by
the difference in altitude of the river in the stretch considered. The same
principle is applied in energy conversion systems used in ocean currents and
tide motors (Liu et al., 2011). The great benefit in which this type of
arrangement is that there is no need to build dams or dikes to supply water to
the turbine and consequently, results in a low environmental impact.
2. General Considerations
For efficiency analysis of kinetic miniturbine we can use the following
energetic parameter (Batten et al., 2006), (Myers & Bahaj, 2006):
Corresponding author: e-mail: nastase_eugenvlad@yahoo.com
126
Eugen-Vlad Nstase and Doru Clrau
ERR =
8r (1 k ) tan sin
,
(k + 1)
(k + 1) 1 +
(h + 1)
(1)
where: r radius of a cross section, k,h-coeficients of induced velocity,

angle between flow velocity direction and chord, tip speed ratio,
solidity. On the other hand, for ERR we have
ERR =
C p nc
r
(2)
Using Eq (2) we can represent the dependence between number of blades and
lift coefficient, what we can see in Fig. 1.
Fig.1 Dependence between lift coefficient and blades number.
For theoretical research, after analyzing the dependence between the

number of blades and lift coefficient (Fig. 1), we consider three situation:
miniturbine with three, four and five blades (Fig. 2).
Fig.2 Models of kinetic miniturbine.
For these three cases we calculated and represented variation along the
blade for the following parameters: lift coefficient (Fig. 3), tangential force (Fig.
4), torque to the turbine shaft (Fig. 5), and power coefficient (Fig. 6).
3. Results of Research
Legend of representation:
miniturbine with four blades;
miniturbine with three blades;

miniturbine with five blades;
Fig. 3 Lift coefficient variation.
Fig. 4 Tangential force.
Fig. 5 Torque variation.
Fig. 6 Power coefficient along the blade.
127
128
Eugen-Vlad Nstase and Doru Clrau
4. Conclusions
1. Analyzing the results it is found that for this situation is more efficient
turbine with three blades.
2. Hidrokinetic energy offers the promise of non-polluting alternatives to
fossil and nuclear-fueled power plants.
REFERENCES
Batten W. M. J., Bahaj A. S., Molland A. F., Chaplin J. R., Hydrodynamics of Marine
Current Turbines. Renewable Energy, 31, 249-256 (2006).
Lago L. I., Ponta F. L., Chen L., Advances and Trends in Hydrokinetic Turbine Systems.
Energy for Sustainable Development, 14, 287-296 (2010).
Liu H. W., Ma S., Li W., Gu H. G., Lin Y. G., Sun X. J., A Review on the Development
of Tidal Current Energy in China. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews,
15, 1141-1146 (2011).
Myers L., Bahaj A. S., Power Output performance Characteristics of a Horizontal Axis
Marine Current Turbine. Renewable Energy, 31, 197-208 (2006); http://www.
esru.strath.ac.uk/EandE/Web_sites/05-06/marine_renewables/home/
projsummary. htm (available at 18.03.2011).
CERCETRI TEORETICE PRIVIND INFLUENA NUMRULUI DE PALE

ASUPRA EFICIENEI UNEI MINITURBINE
(Rezumat)
Lucrarea are drept scop realizarea unor studii teoretice privind influna
numrului de pale asupra eficienei unei miniturbine. Miniturbina studiat este
proiectat pentru ncercri de laborator. Ca urmare sunt cunoscute dimensiunile
rotorului, viteza medie de curgere a apei n canal i geometria profilului palei. n aceste
condiii se constant c performanele cele mai bune se obin n cazul miniturbinei cu
trei pale.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
ABOUT MODELLING THE MOVEMENT CONTROL OF

THE ELECTROMECHANIC LINEAR ACTUATOR
BY
VASILE NSUI
North University, Baia Mare,
Department of Engineering System and Technological Management
Accepted for publication: June 23, 2011
Abstract. This article refers to the conception and the practical

achievement of some systems of linear movement of electro-mechanical
actuator type used to position precisely of some pre-working equipment.
These systems have to own dynamic characteristic high precision and high
viability. The important functions of the actuator is the movement control
achieved by an appropriate electronic. The electro-mechanic acting can be
developed by using appropriate control destinations such as the loading
equipment the actuators have to fulfill strict and stable criteria in any
situation. The actuators having multiple applications both industrial and of
these products.
Key words: fuzzy logistic, linear actuator, controller, advanced
control.
1. Introduction
The actuator have a complex structure, the mechanical part being
composed of certain elements which ensure a high cinematic and dynamic
precision, and the commanding part being represented by a computer-led
system, based on appropriate software. Like conventional linear actuator it
also comprised a motor rotation and a motion screw mechanism, with
e-mail: nasui@ubm.ro
130
Vasile Nsui
balls or rollers. One type is the electromechanical actuator, which converts

the torque of an electric rotary motor into linear mechanical thrust. The
motor rotates the drive screw by a synchronous function is to provide
thrust and positioning in machines used for production or testing
(Borangiu, 2003).
The electromechanical linear actuators are designed to provide
precision, efficiency, accuracy, and repeatability in effecting and
controlling movement. A typical linear electro-mechanic actuators is
sketched in Fig. 1 (Nsui, 2006).
Controller
Fig. 1 The overall scheme of linear actuator system.
A position at some point along the screw is commanded by the user

and the motor turns the screw until the nut reaches that position. These
provide the optimal solution for the timing belt drive, worm gear drive, or
a coupling direct inline drive, connected from the motor shaft to the screw.
An actuator's construction of quantitative and qualitative mechanical
transmissions due to a wide range of usage, high efficiency, cinematic,
dynamic capacities and high precision.
The acting directions are shown in order to improve the parameters
such as increasing speeds and portent capacity which generate the
necessity of the analysis and the solution to some problems concerning the
dynamics of the systems (Nasui, 2006).
The remainder of the paper is organized as follows. In section two
the capabilities of the electromechanical linear actuators are presented. A
short description of model geometry is given in section three. Some results
of the virtual simulation are presented in section four.
Finally, in the last section the main conclusions from this study are
drawn and the perspectives for future research are outlined. Fully
reviewing your application can prevent mistakes, ensuring optimal system
performance.
2. The Control Algorithm
The main task is the exact position towards the control surface and
its quick matching of the two factors simultaneously which is difficult to
131
achiever in practice. The compromise between speed and precision has to

be established from the beginning by applying a control algorithm.
The working regime is non-linear and non stationary owing to the
cutting forces. The acting of the actuators can not be represented as a
linear element and the classical analysis methods can not be used. Besides
this there are safely and viability aspect to take into account.
The control algorithm has to prevent the situations where the engine
is the critical functioning area in extreme dynamic conditions. The acting
dynamic is very important. Fast swifts where the maximum working limits
are exceeded should to avoid. Quick changes in the load from the dynamic
point of view show similar modifications of parameters at the PD
regulator for this programmed. Because of the many non-linearity in the
system, the programmed should have variable parameters which are hard
to achieve.
The algorithm that ensures the dynamic proprieties for the regulator
which do not reach the saturation point can protect the mechanism
structure and the durability of the acting engine. In this situation it is
necessary for the experts produce heuristic regulators which use the
dependences between the engine and the acting system. These heuristic
regulations have very good static and dynamic properties according to the
saturation rate stage compensators and algorithms are necessary for stages
over the saturation rate (Borangiu, 2003), (Nsui, 2006).
Additionally this process should be as fast as possible. Obtaining a
good quality of these two factors simultaneously is difficult in particular
case and practically impossible in the general case. Compromising
between precision and speed is necessary. The sufficient precision has to
be established in the beginning and should be applied control algorithm
maintaining it. The electromechanical actuator without any load is a
nonlinear element (Nasui, 2006).
Actuator cannot be represented as a linear element and we cannot
use classical methods of analyses for it. There are also aspects of
reliability and safety. A various and heavy load of the actuator, frequent
changes of the control signal (especially direction) can cause quick
amortization of electrical motor and the power driver. Control algorithm
should prevent situations where the motor is load to much for a long time.
The control is based on a microprocessor, converter and power
output block. The reversed link of control is achieved by potentiometer
supplied by the control circuit present in the electro-mechanic unit by the
132
Vasile Nsui
actuator type. A typical the closed loop position control system is sketched
in Fig. 2.
Kp
Kv
Actuator
Kv
Fig. 2 The closed loop position control systems.
3. Programmable Motion Control Systems

An actuator's function is to provide thrust and positioning in
machines used for production or testing. The motion control systems
purpose is to control any one, or combination, of the following
parameters: position, velocity, acceleration, torque (Nasui, 2006).
Many motion control systems are integrated into a larger system.
Various computer-based devices, such as programmable controllers,
stand-alone industrial computers, or mainframe computers serve to link
and coordinate the motion control function with other functions. Thus, a
more integrated motion control system would appear as shown below: the
assembly of the process of developing new products, covering the
conception aspects, manufacture and the link between them. The essential
component of many automatic control systems is actuator. The application
of a specific command causes a corresponding signal at the input through
action input transducer. The result is an unbounded increase in controlled
variable and loss of control by the command source.
The general form of the block diagram of a feedback control system
is shown in the Fig. 3. In order to develop and optimization pattern
according to very strict engineering requirement it is necessary the
introduction of a number of performance criterion and the formulation of
some appropriate objective functions (Nsui, 2006).
This results a characteristic of functioning specific to each measure
of translation unit according to the dimension and the step of the moving
screw with which it is equipped. These restraints refer the achievement to
the possibility of achieving technical performances referring to the
parameters of functional geometrical precision.
133
power control
direction
position
Computer
directio
speed
power
Controller
load
mechanical
Electro
mechanism
Fig. 3 Established actuator block scheme.
These are essential in the case of using positioning systems from

robots, machine-tools computer controlled, specific to transitory
conditions with frequent speeding and braking, starting and stopping at a.
fixed point.
They have to be reliable and work stably in every situation. The
actuator controller should be reliable itself and independent from other
equipment failures. The electromechanical unit is controlled throughout a
power output block. The controller only sets power control and direction
lines to a required state and the power output realizes powering of motor.
4. Conclusions
1. The result of the research we can value immediately any system
of linear movement because it has as a basis the newest techniques of
modeling in the field. These have as an objective the developing of new
system of electro-mechanic linear actuator type as well as perfecting the
existent ones in a very short time and in highly energetic and economical
conditions.
2. This research is part of the modern preoccupations regarding the
improvement of new systems of linear acting and of numerical modeling
using algorithms and programs of numerical computation and virtual
instrumentation. The sequence of special performances obtained through
this regulatory system to the actuators makes possible their application to
the machine tools with numerical control and especially at those of the last
generation with parallel kinematics as well as the robot industry.
3. Control algorithm permit to deflect surface with maximum
power in wide range. Unfortunately speed is limited by electromechanical
construction and over saturation we can only compensate phase lag.
134
Vasile Nsui
Amplitude of signal is suppressed. Work of controller has been checked

in many possible situations
4. The control algorithm allows the positioning regulation at
maximum powers and very large limits. The movement speed is limited
by the mechanic construction and cannot compensate wholly the
saturation stage/point.
5. The conception and its manufacture assisted on the computer has
as application field the assembly of the process of developing new
products, covering the conception aspects, manufacture and the link
between them.
6. The laboratory test done a data acquiring stand shoved that the
control system of the movement achieved by the controller can control the
positioning precision with established static precisions. Tests have been
done in the maximum admitted loading conditions and minimum and
maximum extreme working extreme speeds.
Acknowledgements. The author makes the best of the researches done
within the grant regarding the development of the actuators within the flexible
systems of reworking in the laboratory of The Basis of Experimental Research of
the North University of Baia Mare, Engineering Faculty. The author to thanks the
support and contribution of Eugen PAY from UNBM in the definition of
requirements and selection of design options of this electro-mechanic actuator
linear.
REFERENCES
Banks J. et al., Discrete Event System Simulation. Prentice Hall Inc., SUA, 2001.
Borangiu Th., Advanced Robot Motion Control. Ed. Academiei Romane, 2003.
Ispas C., Predencea N., Ghionea A. et al., Maini-unelte. Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti,
1998.
Maties V., Mandru D., Tatar O. Actuatori in mecatronic. Ed. Mediamira, ClujNapoca, 2000.
Mohora C., Cotet E., Patrascu G., Simularea sistemelor de producie. Ed.
Academiei Romane, 2001.
Montgomery D.C., Design of Analysis of Experiments, 4th Ed., John Wiley &
Sons, New-York, 1996.
Nsui V., (2006), Actuatori liniari electromecanici. Ed. Risoprint, Cluj Napoca,
1996.
Nsui V., Stand de proba pentru mecanisme liniare. Brevet de Inventie RO
122562 B1.
Popa A., Controlul digital al sistemelor mecatronice. Ed. Orizonturi Universitare,
Timioara, 2002.
135
Olaru A., Dynamic of the industrial robots. Ed. Bren, Bucureti, 2001.
Zetu D. & Carata E., Sisteme flexibile de fabricaie. Ed. Junimea, Iai, 1998.
*** Data Acquisition Devices type ADUC 112, Analog Device.
MODELAREA CONTROLULUI MICRII LA

ACTUATORII LINIARI ELECTROMECANICI
(Rezumat)
Lucrarea are ca scop realizarea unei noi abordri a concepiei i realizrii practice
a unor sisteme de micare liniar de tip actuator liniar electromecanic, utilizate pentru
poziionarea precis a unor echipamente de prelucrare. Aceste sisteme trebuie s aib
caracteristici dinamice ridicate, precizie si fiabilitate nalt. Se folosete un nou sistem de
transformare a micrii de rotaie n miscare de translaie i invers, care faciliteaz
achiziionarea datelor de control a micrii. Problema pus se refer la o reconsiderare a
modalitilor de control a micrii configurnd noi aplicaii experimentale. Funcia important la actuatoarele liniare electromecanice, n special cele industriale este controlul
micrii realizat de ctre un echipament electronic, care trebuie s ndeplineasca criterii
stricte i stabile n orice situaie.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
FINITE ELEMENT MODELING OF A KNEE AND HIP

REHABILITATION EQUIPMENT
BY
IOANA PETRE1, TUDOR DEACONESCU1,

ANDREA DEACONESCU1 and DAN PETRE2
Transilvania University of Braov,
2
Department of Materials Engineering and Welding

Abstract. In this paper it is presented the finite element modeling of

rehabilitation equipment for the knee and hip affections using CATIA V5R19
Software. It is presented the equipment to be analyzed, the material, type of
analysis, the constraints and the loads applied. After analyze is made, the soft
shows the results, which are interpreted. The results of the analysis, Von Missed
stresses and displacements show the resistance of the equipment under loadings
conditions.
Key words: rehabilitation equipment, Finite Element Modeling, CATIA.
1. Introduction
The paper presents finite element modeling of an ankle and knee
rehabilitation equipment. The rehabilitation equipment proposed for the analysis
allows performing isokinetic exercises in order to offer continue passive motion
for recovery of the patients with affections of the hip and knee joints (Petre &
Deaconescu, 2009).
Finite element modeling (FEM) involves several steps, shown in Fig. 1,
which are followed for acquiring the results presented below. Preprocessing
includes several steps: geometric domain modeling, material modeling,
generation finite element structure, constraints modeling, loads modeling,
Corresponding author: e-mail: babes_ioana@yahoo.com
138
Ioana Petre et al.
checking finite element model. Post processing includes: viewing and studying
results and optimization the model.
PREPROCESSING
SOLVING FINITE
ELEMENT
MODEL
POST
PROCESSING
Fig.1 Finite element modeling steps.
Those steps are followed in the analysis presented in this article. The
model is designed in CATIA V5R19 and the structural analysis of rehabilitation
equipment is realized using CATIA Generative Structural Analysis workbench.
The results of the analysis, Von Missed stresses and displacements show the
resistance of the equipment under loadings conditions.
2. Finite Element Analysis of Rehabilitation Equipment
Equipment drawing is realized by the help of the following modules:
Sketcher module for describing the plane profiles which are the base for
tridimensional elements generation, Pad module for describing the
tridimensional elements, and Assembly Design module for describing the
assemblies and subassemblies.
Designed equipment is considered to have a material (aluminum) with the
following physical properties, which are important during the analysis: Young
modulus (7 1010N/m2), Poisson ratio (0.346), density (2710 kg/m3), the
coefficient of thermal expansion (2.36 10-5K), Yield strength (9.5 107 N/m2).
Finite element analysis of knee and hip rehabilitation equipment was
performed using software CATIA V5R19, with Generation Structural Analysis
module. The type of analysis is static analysis (Static Case) which is performed
considering some constraints and independent of time loads.
Generating finite element structure involves the model meshing and
introduction the finite element properties. Meshing model is achieved through a
network, composed of nodes and elements. Table 1 shows the main features of
the finite element model.
Table 1
Principal characteristics of the finite element model
Entity
Finite elements
Description
Nodes
53283
Elements
26388
Tetrahedron
The constraints are applied between adjacent elements and between

elements and the fixed part. Applied restrictions are: Clamp restriction, applied
to the base; Slider restriction, applied to the slider.
On the surface of the bars is applied a distributed force of 300 N value
applied as follows: 40% of the force value on the bar corresponding to the calf
139
and 60% of the force value on the bar corresponding to the thigh, oriented
perpendicular to the surface, in the Y axis direction. Other forces applied:
pulling force of the muscle 350N, gravity force 10N.
The symbols of the mesh, of constraints and restrictions, and of the
applied forces are shown on the analyzed model, as seen in Fig. 2.
Fig. 2 Equipment to be analyzed.
After verifying the finite element model, the next stage is the analysis
phase. Solving the model is carried out automatically by the software, with the
Compute command. Post-processing stage involves visualization of the results
and then optimization of the model.
The following figures present the results of static analysis.
Fig. 3 Deformation.
After analyzing the proposed equipment for operation in real time, it can
be observed that there is no deformation (Fig. 3), so the equipment does not
deform under applied forces. Fig. 4 allows viewing equivalent von Mises stress
fields (Von Mises Stresses Visualizing).
The highest tensions can be observed in the central part of the bars, in the
rod clevises of frame gripping, in the clamping pins of the slipping rolls and in
the slider spring.
140
Ioana Petre et al.
Equivalent tensions von Misses theory is determined by the maximum

breaking strain energy, so the equivalent tension is determined by the relation:
1
(1)
e =
( x y ) 2 + ( y z )2 + ( z x ) 2 + 6( xy 2 + yz 2 + xz 2 ) ,
2
where is normal stresses and tangential stresses (Late, 2002).
In the image is presented the color palette that accompanies the result.
The lowest tension values are at the bottom of the palette, and the maximum
values at the top of it, but the dialog box contains explicit values, as follows:
Min: 6.64759e-005 N/m2 and Max: 5.69198e+006 N/m2.
Fig. 4 Von Mises stress.
Since the yield strength of the material is 9.5 107 N / m2, it can be
concluded that the model will resist at the applied distributed force.
Displacements of the analyzed model are presented in Fig. 5.
The maximum displacement of the nodes was found to be 37mm. This
maximum is located on the slider and on the cross-bar from the knee, and is
shown in red.
It is necessary for the slider to realize a larger displacement, so the
equipment will be actuated with a pneumatic muscle, connected by the slider
with a pulleys mechanism. The pulleys will double the stroke realized by the
pneumatic muscle, at the needed value.
Fig. 5 Equipment translational displacement.
141
3. Conclusions
1. Finite element analysis is a powerful tool that allows engineers to
quickly analyze and refine a design. It can be applied to problems involving
vibrations, heat transfer, fluid flow, and many other areas (Petre et.al, 2011).
2. The analysis above shows the behavior of the proposed equipment
under the applied forces. The results highlighted that the Von Misses stress and
displacement contours of the equipment are safe for the imposed loadings.
3. This research will be continued with a more in depth analysis and
testing of the real equipment in laboratory.
POSDRU/88/1.5/S/59321.
REFERENCES
Petre I. Deaconescu T., Isokinetic Equipment Designed For Therapeutic Exercises.
Proceedings of International Conference on Economic Engineering and
Manufacturing Systems, ICEEMS 2009, Braov, 2009.
Late M. T., Metoda Elementelor Finite. Aplicaii. Ed. Univ. Transilvania din Braov,
2008.
Petre I., Deaconescu T., Deaconescu A., Petre D., Finite Element Analysis of Pneumatic
Muscle. in 15th International Conference on Modern Technologies, Quality and
Innovation - MODTECH 2011: New Face of TMCR, Vadul lui Vod, Chiinu,
2011, pp. 861-864.
*** Generative Part Structural Analysis. Available at: http://www.catia.com.pl/tutorial/
generative_part_structural_analysis.pdf; accessed 12.07. 2011.
*** http://catiadoc.free.fr/pdf/EN-Dassault-Systems_Generative_ Assembly_ Structural
_ Analysis.pdf; Accessed 12.07.2011.
MODELAREA CU ELEMENT FINIT A UNUI
ECHIPAMENT DE REABILITARE
(Rezumat)
Lucrarea prezint modelarea cu element finit a unui echipament de reabilitare a
afeciunilor genunchiului i gleznei. Echipamentul propus spre analiz permite efectuarea unor exerciii de micare pasiv continu, fiind acionat cu un muchi pneumatic.
Modelarea cu elemente finite (MEF) presupune parcurgerea etapelor: preprocesare, rezolvarea modelului cu elemente finite i postprocesarea. Preprocesarea cuprinde
mai multe etape: modelarea domeniului geometric, modelarea materialului, generarea
structurii cu elemente finite, modelarea constrngerilor, modelarea ncrcrilor,
verificarea modelului cu elemente finite. Postprocesarea cuprinde: vizualizarea i
studiul rezultatelor i optimizarea modelului.
142
Ioana Petre et al.
n modelarea echipamentului de reabilitare sunt urmrite aceste etape, prezentate

mai sus. Astfel, n etapa de preprocesare are loc realizarea echipamentului, stabilirea
materialului, a constrngerilor, a ncrcrilor i verificarea modelului, apoi se realizeaz
analiza modelului cu element finit, iar n ultima etap are loc vizualizarea i interpretarea rezultatelor i optimizarea modelului.
Softul folosit este CATIA V5R19, cu modulele: Sketcher, Pad i Assembly
Design - pentru realizarea modelului, precum i Generation Structural Analysis pentru
analizarea acestuia.
n urma analizei echipamentului propus se observ c nu exist deformare, deci,
cadrul echipamentului nu se deformeaz sub aciunea forelor aplicate. Tensiunile cele
mai ridicate se observ n partea central a barelor, n furcile de prindere a barelor de
cadru, tifturile de prindere a rolelor de alunecare i n arcul ce ine culisorul. Avnd in
vedere ca valoarea maxim a tensiunilor von Misses este de 5.69198106 N/m2, iar
rezistenta admisibila a materialului este de 9,5107 N/m2, se poate trage concluzia c
modelul piesei va rezista forei distribuite aplicate. Deplasarea maxim, pentru condiiile impuse este de 37mm, i este efectuat de culisor i de bara transversal corespunztoare cuplei genunchiului.
Analiza prezentat prezint comportamentul echipamentului de reabilitare sub
aciunea unor fore impuse, iar rezultatele dovedesc rezistena acestuia i sigurana
oferit n condiiile impuse.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
SOME CONSIDERATIONS REGARDING

PNEUMATIC MUSCLE VOLUME
BY
IOANA PETRE1, TUDOR DEACONESCU1,

ANDREA DEACONESCU1 and DAN PETRE2
2
Department of Materials Engineering and Welding

Abstract. A pneumatic artificial muscle is composed of an inner tube of

variable length, made of a flexible material, typically neoprene. The tube is
covered with a multilayer texture, made of nylon with strengthening and
protecting role from the environment influences. Under the action of compressed
air it increases its diameter and decreases its lengths. A pneumatic muscle is used
successfully in different areas, especially in robotics. The paper presents some
calculus models for volume of the pneumatic muscle, considered in relaxed and
contracted state.
Key words: pneumatic muscle, volume, relaxed state, contracted state.
1. Introduction
An artificial pneumatic muscle has in composition an inner membrane
made of a flexible material covered by a helical net of inextensible fibers made
of nylon with strengthening and protecting role from the environment
influences. Under the action of compressed air it increases its diameter and
decreases its lengths, working as a spring (Deaconescu, 2009).
A pneumatic muscle is used successfully in different areas, because of
their advantages, like the passive damping, good power-weight ratio and usage
in rough environments (Hildebrandt et al., 2002). The relaxed state is
Corresponding author: e-mail: babes_ioana@yahoo.com
144
Ioana Petre et al.
determined by the size of the original tube and by the protective membrane
characteristics. Range contraction-expansion depends on the lower limit of the
angle and therefore on the density and thickness of braid fibers.
An interesting aspect in the study of behavior of a pneumatic muscle in
functioning is its volume evolution under the action of compressed air. The
following article presents a way of calculating the pneumatic muscle volume.
In relaxed state, the muscle is considered as a cylinder, and the volume equation
results from this. In contracted state, the muscle has a cylinder part, but at the
ends, there are two spherical sections (Albienz et al., 2005).
2. Pneumatic Muscle Volume Calculus
The pneumatic muscle volume can be calculated in relaxed state or in
contracted state. It starts from the assumptions that:
In relaxed state, the muscle can be considered as a cylinder of radius r0=
=d0/2.
In contracted state, the muscle has cylinder form in the central area, with
radius r = d/2 and length l, and at the ends has two junction areas as a spherical
cap (Fig.1) (Dragan, 2007).
Fig. 1 Pneumatic muscle in relaxed and contracted state.
In the relaxed state, muscle volume has the formula:

d2
(1)
V0 = r02l0 = 0 l0
4
Muscle volume in the contracted state can be calculated as follows
(Dragan, 2007)
(2)
Vm = V0 + 2Vc ,
V0 =
d2
( l 2h ) ,
4
(3)
h
(4)
3r02 + 3r 2 + h 2 ,
6
where Vm pneumatic muscle volume, Vc spherical area volume, V0
cylindrical volume.
As known, a pneumatic artificial muscle is composed of an inner tube of
variable length covered with a multilayer texture. The figure below illustrates
how a wire wound on a flexible tube.
Vc =
145
Fig. 2 Correlation between muscle radius r, muscle length l, angle between

fibers 0 and constant length of the s.
Fig. 2 shows the correlation between the radius of the muscle, its length
and fiber angle. Due to the fact that the length of the fibers is constant, it can be
written the following relations: (Albienz et al., 2005)
l
cos
=
,
(5)
l0 cos 0
r
sin
=
.
(6)
r0 sin 0
From Eq. (6) results
r = r0
1 cos 2
= r0
sin 0
1 cos 2
(7)
1 cos 2 0
Using Eq. (5)

cos =
l cos 0
l0
It is defined relative muscle contraction as

l l .
z
=
= 0
l0
(8)
l0
Hence contracted muscle length

l = l 0 (1 ) .
(9)
With those notations, Eq. (7) becomes

1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
r = r0
(10)
1 cos 2 0
From Fig. 1 can be written:

h=
d 2 d0
4
4
2
r 2 r0 .
(11)
From the above relations results

h=
r0 2
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
2
1 cos 0
r0 2 = r0
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
1 cos 2 0
1.
(12)
Eq. (4) becomes

V0 = r0 2
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
l0 (1 ) 2r0
. (13)
1 cos 2 0
1 cos 2 0
146
Ioana Petre et al.
Eq. (5) becomes
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
r03 1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
+
(14)
1
1
2
3
1 cos 2 0
1 cos 2 0

where l0 is muscle length at rest, d0 and 0 is the diameter, respectively, the rake
angle of braid fiber in relaxed state.
The following relations based on Eq. (2) express the total volume of the
contracted muscle, depending on the relative contraction.
(15)
Vm ( ) = V0 ( ) + 2Vc ( )
Entering into Eq. (2) the above equations results
Vc =
Vm ( ) =
d 0 2 1 (1 )2 cos 2 0
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
l0 (1 ) d 0
1 +
2
2
4
1 cos 0
1
cos
(16)
1 1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
2d 0 1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
1 +
2
3
1 cos 0
1 cos 2 0
2

Fig. 3 presents the graphic variation of the contracted muscle volume and
its relative contraction.
Fig. 3 Vm = f().
The volume of the muscle in relaxed state can be calculated using the
length of each fiber of the membrane and the number of windings which make
the fiber around the tube.
The relation for calculating a cylinder volume is
Vm = r 2 h .
(17)
With the dependencies shown in Fig. 2, the muscle radius depends on its
length
r2 =
s2 l 2
4 2 n 2
(18)
From Eq. (18) results
s = 4 2 r 2 n 2 + l 2 .
Using Eq. (8) and Eq. (9), Eq. (19) becomes
(19)
s = 4 2 n 2 r02
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
1 cos 2 0
+ l02 (1 ) 2 .
147
(20)
Let g = thickness of fiber winding, and n = lo/g = number of windings

made by the fiber around the tube. Eq. (20) becomes
s = l0
4 2
g
r02
1 (1 ) 2 cos 2 0
2
1 cos 0
+ (1 ) 2 .
(21)
For a thickness g ranging from 0.5 mm and 1 mm can be plotted

graphically the value of s (Fig. 4). For values of s ranging between 1.18105 and
2.25105 mm, total volume of the muscle varies according to graph from Fig.5.
Fig. 4 s = f(g)
Fig. 5 Vm = f(s)
Considering that the length of each fiber is constant (s = const) and n =

number of windings made by the fiber around the tube, Eq. (17) becomes:
s2 l 2
Vm = 2 2 l .
(22)
4 n
3. Conclusions
1. The paper presented different calculus methods for pneumatic muscle
volume. It has been considered two states of the muscle, according to the
compressed air alimented the relaxed state and the contracted state of the
muscle.
2 It has been plotted the main results - the variation of the contracted
muscle volume and its relative contraction, the value of length fiber for given
ranges of thickness and the value of the total volume depending on fibers
length.
POSDRU/88/1.5/S/59321.
148
Ioana Petre et al.
REFERENCES
Albienz J., Dillmann R., Kerscher T., Zollner J. M., Dynamic Modelling of Fluidic
Muscles using Quick-Release. Forschungszentrum Informatik, Germany, 2005.
Dragan L., Theoretical and Experimental Aspects Regarding the Geometrical
Parameters of the Pneumatic Muscles. Proc. of the International Conference of
the Carpathian Euro-region Specialists in Industrial Systems, 8th Ed., 12-14
May, North University of Baia Mare, 2010.
Deaconescu T., Deaconescu A., Pneumatic Muscle Actuated Isokinetic Equipment for
the Rehabilitation of Patients with Disabilities of the Bearing Joints. Proc. of the
International MultiConference of Engineers and Computer Scientists, Hong
Kong, IAENG Hong Kong, 2009.
Hildebrandt A., Sawodny O., Neumann R., Hartmann A., A Flatness Based Design for
Tracking Control of Pneumatic Muscle Actuators. Seventh International
Conference on Control, Automation, Robotics And Vision (ICARCVO2),
Singapore, 2002.
CONSIDERAII PRIVIND CALCULUL VOLUMULUI
MUCHIULUI PNEUMATIC
(Rezumat)
Un muchi artificial pneumatic este alctuit dintr-un tub interior de lungimi
variabile, realizat dintr-un material elastic, de obicei neopren. Tubul este nvelit cu o
estur format din mai multe straturi, realizat din nylon, pentru a-i da rezisten i
pentru a-l proteja de influenele din mediul de lucru. Sub aciunea aerului comprimat,
muchiul pneumatic i mrete diametrul i i micoreaz lungimea.
Un aspect de interes n studiul comportamentului n funcionare a unui muchi
pneumatic este acela al modului n care evolueaz volumul acestuia sub aciunea aerului
comprimat. n lucrarea de fa se prezint o modalitate de calcul a volumului muchiului pneumatic. Rezultatele obinute se refer la variaia volumului muchiului n stare
contractat n raport cu contracia relativ a acestuia, variaia lungimii unei fibre n
raport cu grosimea acesteia i variaia volumului total al muchiului pentru diferite lungimi ale fibrelor.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
MODERN TECHNIQUES FOR EXPERIMENTATION OF

ADJUSTABLE HYDROSTATIC PUMPS
BY
TEODOR COSTINEL POPESCU and IOAN LEPDATU

Hydraulics and Pneumatics Research Institute,
INOE 2000 IHP, Bucureti
Abstract. This paper aims at dissemination of experimental research work

conducted at IHP Bucharest, in order to determine the actual performance of
hydrostatic adjustable pumps. To this end laboratory tests were conducted on a
radial piston pump MOOG type, which can automatically vary the flow rate by
adjusting the eccentricity of the stator ring. The paper presents the experimental
modern means used for this purpose, the type of experimental tests, results and
their interpretation.
Key words: hydrostatic adjustable pump, experimental tests.
1. Introduction
On the adjustable hydrostatic pump tests were conducted under static and
dynamic mode (Popescu et al, 2010), (Lepdatu, 2010). Technique used for the
dynamic tests was based on flow measurement by the indirect method, which
consists of measuring the differential pressure across a diaphragm mounted on
the pump discharge pipe. In this way, the two pressure transducers mounted in
the downstream and upstream of the diaphragm measure almost instantaneously
pressures and thus, very fast, is known the flow rate value.
2. Presentation of the Test Stand
Functional schematic diagram of the stand, Fig. 1, contains: radial piston
pump tested PPR, driven by the AC electric motor ME, with power of 37 kW
Corresponding author: e-mail: popescu.ihp@fluidas.ro
150
Teodor Costinel Popescu and Ioan Lepdatu
and 1465 rev/min; electropump EP, providing overcharging of aspiration of the

pump tested; the filter F, for protection to contamination of the aspirated oil;
diaphragm DM and pressure transducers TP1, TP2, which measure the flow
discharged by the pump; transducer TPr for measuring the discharge pressure of
the pump tested, proportional pressure valve SPP with a role in protection and
simulation of the load; throttle DR, for load adjustment at the pump tested; the
electric control hydraulic distributor D which in position "0" allows adjustment
of valve SPP, in position "b" allows the pump discharge, and in position "a"
allows load adjustment by means of throttle DR and calibration of the flow
measuring diaphragm by means of the turbine flowmeter TD.
Fig. 1 Functional diagram of the test stand for the pump PPR.
The stand also contains a data acquisition system SAD, type NATIONAL
INSTRUMENTS, Bus-Powered M Series Multifunction DAQ for USB - 16-Bit,
up to 400 kS/s, up to 32 Analog Inputs, Isolation, interface between pressure
transducers, type DRUK SYSCOM 18, cod PTX 1400-400, Pn=400 bar, G1/4
(TP1, TP2, TPr), flow transducer type HYDAC, cod EVS 3100-1PTX 1400400, 60l/min (TD), and temperature transducer type DRUK SYSCOM 18, cod
PT 100-50...+400OC, G1/2 (TT), on the one hand, command for adjustment of
capacity of the pump tested Vc and acquisition of information about capacity
achieved Vr, on the other hand, the command for pressure control of the tested
pump discharge Pc and acquisition of information about the acieved discharge
pressure Pr; a computer system PC, type NATIONAL INSTRUMENTS, cod
151
NI PXI-1031 with an installed data acquisition and processing software type NI

LabVIEW; a stabilized voltage source STS; a random function generator GFA.
For accuracy of measurements, noise of the acquired signals was filtered by
means of a low-passing filter, with a cutting frequency of 100 Hz
3. Calibration of Flow Measurement Diaphragm
Under dynamic mode flow was measured with the measuring diaphragm
located right on the discharge of the pump DM (acc. Fig. 1). For calibration of
the diaphragm, the flow was measured accurately with a turbine flow meter
"Turboquant". The calibration feature of the diaphragm was raised, namely the
functional dependence of the flow, as measured by the turbine transducer, on
the pressure drop at the diaphragm, measured with the pressure transducers TP1
and TP2. Coordinates of the points on the interpolated calibration feature of the
diaphragm are shown in Tables 13.
Table 1
Diaphragm calibration results: 0.000...1.723 bar; 0.000...19.393 l/min
P,
0.260
0.380
0.520
0.740
1.090
1.330
1.723
0.000
BAR
Q
0.000
6.856
8.594
10.633 12.757 15.547 17.228 19.393
l/min
Table 2
P,
2.116
3.069
3.597
4.125
4.774
5.423
6.082
2.592
BAR
Q
21.554 23.860 25.936 28.169 30.262 32.252 34.624 36.783
l/min
Table 3
P,
6.740
8.435
8.510
9.012
7.558
BAR
Q
38.916 41.495 43.955 44.113 49.987
l/min
4. Experimental Measurements under Static Mode

To determine the behavior of the pump under static mode there were
applied control signals Uc within the range 010 V, ascending and descending,
sinusoidal and ramp-shaped, with frequencies of 1 Hz, 0.7 Hz, 0.35 Hz and 0.1
Hz. All measurements were made at pressure p = 20 bar and oil temperature
Toil= 40 50C.
152
4.1. Response to Ascending / Descending Ramp Signal
Measurements were made for control signals with maximum amplitude

(10Vd.c.) and frequencies of 1 Hz, 0.7 Hz, 0.35 Hz and 0.1 Hz. For frequencies
of 1 Hz results are shown in the diagrams of Fig. 2.
Fig. 2 Variation over time of flow Q, l/min and eccentricity e, mm,

to ramp signal with frequency of 1 Hz.
4.2. Response to Low Frequency Sinusoidal Signal
Measurements were made for control signals with maximum amplitude

(10Vd.c.) and frequencies of 1 Hz, 0.7 Hz, 0.35 Hz and 0.1 Hz. For frequencies
of 0.1 Hz results are shown in the diagrams of Fig. 3.
Fig. 3 Variation over time of flow Q, l/min and eccentricity e, mm,

to sinusoidal signal with frequency of 0.1 Hz.
4.3. Pump Static Characteristic
Dependency of the prescribed command on the flow achieved by the

pump was determined for ascending/descending ramp-shaped control signal and
frequencies between 0.1 Hz and 0.005 Hz. It appears that the hysteresis
decreases with decreasing frequency, a phenomenon explained by the fact that
the quantities progress being slower, on their decreasing variance there is more
153
time for the transitional regimes, relaxation of materials (especially in springs),

etc. to diminish their effects. For the frequency of 0.005 Hz the static control
characteristic of the pump is shown in Fig. 4.
Fig. 4 Pump static characteristic, flow Q, l/min depending on the prescribed

command, voltage Uc, V, to ramp signal with frequency of 0.005 Hz.
5. Experimental Measurements under Dynamic Mode

5.1. Response to Step Signal of the Flow Discharged by Pump
Determination of the response to step signal was performed to multiple

amplitudes, respectively 100% (10 V), 75% (7.5 V) and 50% (5V) to see how
response times depend on this parameter. At each of amplitudes the system was
excited also with a train of step signals of different frequency, respectively 0.1
Hz, 0.5 Hz and 1 Hz, to see if the response is maintained to frequency change.
Response of the positioning system of the stator ring of the radial piston
adjustable pump to step signals that have values less than 25% and 50% of the
maximum value does not differ essentially, in aspect and performance (over
adjustment, delay time, stabilization time) from the response to the maximum
value signals, of 10Vd.c.
Fig. 5 presents the variation over time of the pump flow to step control
signal, with amplitude of 100% (10V) and frequency of 0.1 Hz. From this test
results: delay time = 116 ms, stabilization time = 193 ms, over adjustment =
zero.
5.2. Response to Sinusoidal Signal of the Flow Discharged by Pump
To determine the response of the pump adjusted flow there were applied
control signals with different values of frequency (0.5 Hz, 6 Hz and 10 Hz) and
amplitude (100%, 75%). Fig.6 presents the response to sinusoidal signal with
amplitude of 100% (10Vd.c.) and frequency of 6 Hz.
154
Fig. 5 Response over time of pump flow Q, l/min to step control signal,
with amplitude of 100% (10V) and frequency of 0.1Hz.
Fig. 6 Response over time of pump flow Q, l/min to sinusoidal control signal,
with amplitude of 100% (10V) and frequency of 6 Hz.
Response of the positioning system to sinusoidal signals of various

frequencies shows that amplitude of the response decreases, and the phase
difference between "control" and "response" increases when the frequency of
control signal decreases. Based on these responses resulted Bode diagram.
5.3. Response in Frequency
To determine the limit frequency at which the pump performs flow

adjustability there was applied a sinusoidal control signal with maximum
amplitude (10Vd.c.) and with ascending frequency, starting from 0.1 Hz to 20
Hz for 10 sec. The evolution over time of the flow adjusted by the pump
represents the response in frequency of the positioning system developed,
shown in Fig. 7.
It was noted that when increasing the frequency first minimum flow rates
decrease and then the maximum ones; the phenomenon is due to the two springs
of the small pistons (large and small spring), components of the positioning
system of the pump stator ring, which adjusts the amount of eccentricity e, mm.
155
Fig. 7 Response in frequency of pump flow Q, l/min to sinusoidal control signal,

with amplitude of 100% (10V) and frequency of 0.1...20 Hz.
5.4. Bode Diagram
Dynamic performance of the radial piston pump, with mechatronic

servomechanism for positioning of the stator ring, is highlighted by: attenuation
of the response amplitude characteristic, depending on frequency of the control
signal; characteristic of phase shift (delay) of response from command,
depending on frequency of the control signal. This two characteristics form the
Bode diagram, shown in Fig. 8. Amplitude and phase shift measurements were
made for eight points of frequency: 0.1 Hz, 0.2 Hz, 0.5 Hz, 1 Hz, 2 Hz, 5 Hz, 10
Hz, 20 Hz. From the Bode diagram it results that the amplitude attenuation of 3
dB, i.e. a 30% reduction of the response amplitude, occurs at a frequency of 2.4
Hz of the control signal. At this frequency the phase displacement is 350.
Fig. 8 Bode diagram:

attenuation, dB-Frequency, Hz a; phase displacement, deg- Frequency, Hz b.
6. Conclusions
1. The article presents a minimal structure of a modern stand, on which
can be carried out tests under static and dynamic mode for volumetric rotary
machines, namely hydrostatic pumps and motors, fixed or adjustable.
2. Performance of this stand has been highlighted by testing a radial
piston pump, MOOG production, with capacity adjustable by means of a
mechatronic system for positioning the stator ring between 032 cm3/ rev.
156
3. The following performance of the pump resulted: a good

proportionality between the control signal Uc, V and the flow displaced at
constant rotational speed, l/min (from static characteristics); delay time = 116
ms, stabilization time = 193 ms, over adjustment = zero (from response to step
signal); attenuation = 30%, phase shift = 350 (from Bode diagram).
REFERENCES
Lepdatu I., Theoretical and Applied Research on Mechatronic Systems Adjusting the
Flow of Hydraulic Rotary Generators by Eccentricity. Doctoral Thesis,
Politehnica University of Bucureti, 2010.
Popescu T. C., Gu Ion D. D., Clinoiu C., , Modern Instruments for Analysis of
Hydrostatic Transmissions. P.U.B. Scientific Bulletin, Series D, 72, 4 (2010).
TEHNICI MODERNE DE EXPERIMENTARE A
POMPELOR HIDROSTATICE REGLABILE
(Rezumat)
Articolul i propune diseminarea unor lucrri de cercetare experimental,
realizate la IHP Bucureti, pentru stabilirea performanelor reale ale pompelor hidrostatice reglabile. n acest scop s-au efectuat teste de laborator asupra unei pompe cu
pistoane radiale de tip MOOG, care i poate varia automat debitul prin reglarea excentricitaii inelului stator. Lucrarea prezint mijloacele moderne de experimentare utilizate
n acest scop, tipul ncercrilor experimentale, rezultatele obinute i interpretarea lor.
Pe un stand modern, s-a testat o pomp cu pistoane radiale, de tip MOOG, cu
capacitate reglabil ntre 0...32 cm3/rot. S-a etalonat o diafragm pentru msurarea
debitelor, au fost ridicate caracteristicile n regim static i dinamic ale pompei. Pentru
acurateea msurtorilor zgomotele au fost filtrate cu un filtru trece-jos cu frecvena
de tiere de 100 Hz. Au rezultat: o bun proporionalitate ntre semnalul de comand
Uc, V i debitul refulat la turaie constant, l/min (din caracteristicile statice); timpul de
ntrziere = 116 ms, timpul de stabilizare = 193 ms, suprareglarea = zero (din
rspunsul la semnal treapt); atenuare = 30% , defazaj = 350 (din diagrama Bode).

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
SOME CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT COLD PLASTIC

DEFORMATION OF BEARING RINGS
BY
*
OCTAVIAN PRUTEANU , CONSTANTIN CRUU

and LUCIAN TBCARU
Department of Machine Manufacturing Technology
Received: June 12, 2011
Abstract. The equipment used to conduct experimental research enables the

user to change the deformation force, the deformation feed, as well as the speed of
the half-finish feeding roller. Paper describes the results obtained on the
roughness, out-of-roundness and microhardness of the exterior and interior ring
races of bearing 6210, further to changes in the three work parameters. The values
detected were recorded in tables and presented by graphical representations, and
they substantiate our conclusions related to the best work parameter ranges, where
the quality parameter deviations are minimal. The paper also shows the
mathematical processing of the microhardness results recorded for the ring race
surfaces.
Key words: plastic deformation, force, feed, speed, roughness, out-ofroundness, circularity, microhardness
1. Introduction
Plastic deformation of steels has enjoyed an increasingly widespread
use in most of the industrial facilities around the world. As concerns the bearing
manufacture industry, the method was first used by the 1 GPZ factory in
Moscow and it was applied to cold plastic deformation of ring races of radial
ball bearings. As for the Romanian bearing manufacture industry, this process
was first employed by the company SC Rulmeni SA of Brlad, in 2005, further
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: pluteanu@yahoo.com
158
Octavian Pruteanu et al.
to a research contract initiated by the Machine Manufacturing Technology

Department of the Faculty of Machine Manufacturing and Industrial
Management of Iai, due to the advantages it enjoys, namely:
i) the existence of high precision and high productivity Japanese
manufacturing equipment;
ii) the advantages brought about by the improvement of specific part
operation properties: resistance to wear and tear, improved endurance and
increased profitability.
The research conducted by SC Rulmeni SA Brlad consisted of the
setting of the best values of the work parameters (deformation force,
deformation feed, and speed of the half-finish feeding roller), required to
achieve acceptable values for the roughness, circular shape and microhardness
of the bearing ring races manufacturing to cold plastic deformation.
2. Experimental Conditions
The following conditions were created before conducting the
experimental research.
a) material: 100Cr6 used especially in the manufacture of bearings,
whose mechanical properties are shown in table 1,
b) half-finish: hot rolled rings, whose sizes meet the requirements of the
type 6210 bearing,
c) equipment: special CRF 120 OR equipment for the exterior rings and
CRF 70 IR equipment for the interior rings,
d) tools: special mandrels and rollers for the type of bearing that is
manufactured,
e) measuring and control devices: for roughness: Taylor Hobson
Formtalysurf, series 2, for out-of-roundness: Perthometyer Marsurf CD 120, for
microhardness: Akashi MVK-D
100Cr6
Rolled
Annealed
Table 1
Mechanical properties of 100Cr6 steel
Yield
Force 0.2 Ultimate
Stretch
Break
point Rp
daN
strength
resistan.
elonga.
daN
Rm
A%
0.2
daN/mm2 daN/mm2
7510
8900
82.45
97.75
35
7550
8950
95.60
113.30
5120
5697
65.20
72.50
7
Hardness
HB
329345
219
3. Results of the Experimental Research

Table 2 shows the results obtained by the processing of the bearing
6210 rings that is the roughness, out-of-roundness and microhardness of the
races manufacturing to cold plastic deformation. The values of the work
parameters shown in the table were used.
Work parameters
P = 17600 daN
A = 34 mm/min
n = 68 rot/min
Roughness
m
0.30
0.10
0.11
P = 7530 daN
A = 30 mm/min
n = 118 rot/min
0.34
0.27
0.21
Table 2
Experimental results
6210-10 outer ring
Quality parameters
Circularity
Microhardness, HV
mm
h1
h2
h3
h4
0.16
302
309
297
283
0.20
302
301
302
301
0.15
311
303
308
289
6210-20 inner ring
0.05
283
295
301
303
0.20
265
270
289
287
0.07
281
283
276
275
159
h5
281
286
265
294
281
282
Remarks: a) P deformation force; A deformation feed; n rpm of the half-finish

feeding roller; b) The values of each variable parameter were recorded when the values
of the other two parameters were constant.
4. Graphical Representation of Experimental Results

4.1. Influence of the Deformation Force
The maximum forces allowed by the equipment CRF-120 OR and

CRF-70 IR were used on the exterior and interior rings of bearing 6210. The
other work parameters were kept constant and their values are shown in Table 2.
Figs. 1 and 2 show the roughness of the ring races, whereas Figs. 3 and
4 show the out-of-roundness of the same rings, and Figs. 5 and 6 are the
representation of the race microhardness variation.
Fig. 1 Roughness of exterior ring race when the deformation force P=17600 daN.
160
4.2. Influence of the Deformation Feed
The experimental results were recorded when the deformation feeds of

the two pieces of equipment used were minimal, and they are shown in Figs. 7
and 8 for race roughness, Figs. 9 and 10 for out-of-roundness and Figs. 11 and
12 for race microhardness.
Fig. 2 Roughness of interior ring race when the deformation force P=7530 daN.
Fig. 3 Out-of roundness of exterior ring race when P=17600 daN.
161
Fig. 4 Out-of-roundness of interior ring race when P=7530 daN.
Fig. 5 Microhardness of exterior ring race when the deformation force P=17600 daN.
162
Fig. 6 Microhardness of interior ring race when the deformation force P=7530 daN.
Fig. 7 Roughness of exterior ring race when the deformation feed A=30 mm/min.
163
Fig. 8 Roughness of interior ring race when the deformation feed A=30 mm/min.
Fig. 9 Out-of roundness of exterior ring race when the

deformation feed A=30 mm/min.
164
Fig. 10 Out-of-roundness of interior ring race when

the deformation feed A=30 mm/min.
Fig. 11 Microhardness of exterior ring race when the deformation feed A=30 mm/min.
165
Fig. 12 Microhardness of interior ring race when the deformation feed A=30 mm/min.
4.3. Influence of the Rotation per Minute of the Part Feeding Roller
The experimental results were recorded for the default rpm of the
feeding rollers of the two pieces of equipment used, and they are shown in Figs.
13 and 14 for surface roughness, Figs. 15 and 16 for out-of-roundness and Fig.
17 and 18 for ring race microhardness.
Fig. 13 Roughness of outer ring race when the roller rpm n=68 rot/min.
166
Fig. 14 Roughness of inner ring race when the roller rpm n=118 rot/min.
Fig. 15 Out-of roundness of outer ring race when the roller rpm n=68 rot/min.
5. Conclusions on Quality Parameter Variation

The influence of the technological parameters on the quality parameters
consists of the following processes:
i) the deformation force has a positive influence on the quality
parameters, in the sense that the values of the Ra race roughness meet the
requirements of the plastic deformation stage, i.e. 0.30 m and 0.31 m for the
interior ring, respectively, the out-of-roundness has normal values, i.e. within
the 0.16 mm and 0.053 mm range, whereas the microhardness of the upper coldworked layer of the races is 302 and 283 units, respectively. May therefore
conclude that the values of the deformation force used in this experiment are
adequate.
ii) the values of the deformation feed are thought to meet all the quality
parameter requirements, in the sense that the values of the Ra race roughness is
0.10 m and 0.27 m, respectively, the out-of-roundness of both rings is 0.20
mm, whereas the microhardness is 302 and 265 units, respectively.
Fig. 16 Out-of-roundness of inner ring race when the roller rpm n=118 rot/min.
Fig. 17 Microhardness of outer ring race when the roller rpm n=68 rot/min.
Fig. 18 Microhardness of inner ring race when the roller rpm n=118 rot/min.
167
168
iii) the quality parameter values recorded are within the range of the
current technical requirements for the rpm of the feeding roller, i.e. the values of
the Ra roughness is 0.11 m and 0.21 m, respectively, the out-of-roundness is
0.15 mm and 0.07 mm, respectively, and the race surface microhardness is 311
and 281 units, respectively.
REFERENCES
Leonte P., Pruteanu O., Cruu C., erban C., The Effect of Deformation Degree upon
the Form, the Roughness and the Microhardness of Surface Processing by Cold
Plastic Deformation. Proceedings of the 13th International Conference, Modern
Technologies, Quality and Innovation, 21-23 May 2009, p. 371.
Lupescu O., Netezirea suprafeelor prin deformare plastic (Plastic Deformation
Surfacing). Technical Info Publishing House, Chiinu, Republic of Moldova,
1999.
Pruteanu O., Cruu C., Tbcaru L., Grmescu T., Influence of Deformation Feed on
the Roughness and Shape Precision of Cold Worked Surfaces. International
Journal of Modern Manufacturing Technologies, I, 1, 61, Politehnium Publishing
House (2009).
CONSIDERAII ASUPRA DEFORMRII PLASTICE

LA RECE A INELELOR DE RULMENI
(Rezumat)
Echipamentul utilizat pentru cercetrile experimentale permite modificarea
valorii forei de deformare, a avansului i a vitezei rolei. Lucrarea descrie rezultatele
obinute asupra valorilor rugozitii, abaterii de la circularitate i microduritii la
exteriorul i interiorul inelelor de rulment 6210, n funcie de variaia celor trei
parametri de lucru. Valorile obinute au fost prezentate sub form de tabele i
reprezentate grafic i susin concluziile noastre privind valorile optime ale domeniilor
de variaie ale parametrilor de lucru, n condiiile n care abaterile sunt minime. De
asemenea, este prezentat modul de prelucrare matematic a valorilor microduritii
nregistrate pentru suprafeele inelelor de rulment.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
THE COSTS ESTIMATION

FOR THE MECHANICAL PRODUCTION
BY
BRUNO RDULESCU and MARA-CRISTINA RDULESCU

Received: September 15, 2011

Abstract. This paper presents the decomposition and the definition of a

technical cost that include supplier cost, subcontracting cost and production cost.
Key words: production programme, cost, project budget.
1. Introduction
The companies live in a permanent competition environment and they
are continuously searching the maximum profit from the markets. Because of
that technological and economical concurrence, managing the project budgets or
a product budget, is not only an advantage, but is an obligation if that company
want to survive.
2. The Costs Estimation
Today, we consider that there are three different views of the estimated
cost by type of decision. Indeed, the concern of management who is responsible
for defining the company strategy is mostly the "boundary" or profit realizable
on a given project. It is indeed vital for all businesses to generate profit to be
able to continue to exist. As for the commercial department, which aims to
position the best product over its competition, it seeks to know the best selling
price for its product on that market; this means the product market price.
Corresponding author: e-mail: bruno_radulescu@yahoo.com
170
Bruno Rdulescu and Mara Rdulescu
The selling price and the profit area, then form a set defining the
economic constraints of the project requiring a maximum cost of production.
The project cost has become a design parameter as well as technical
specifications.
We found that the designing phase of a product is 70% from the period
spent from idea to emerge that product, but the influence in the final cost is less
than 10% from the entire cost of the product Fig. 1 (Miller, 1988).
Fig. 1 Influence of design on manufacturing cost for the Ford vehicles (Miller, 1988).
We notice also, that any advances in the product development means that
the expenses to modify that product from that point are higher Fig. 2. It is
important to manage the product cost earlier as possible in its the life cycle.
Fig. 2 Cost variation progress and their influence on the final cost.
The price offer is more accurate if that price offer is based on the
production criteria or on the complete production programme, allowing to know
with precision all the involved costs and also the tool productivity. The price
offer is becoming a criterion permitting to choose between different production
solutions.
171
For some companies, such as subcontractors in mechanical engineering,

the development of an quotation is very important. We consider that in this area,
only 10% of quotes are converted into firm orders. The quality of the provided
documents, the quotation accuracy and response time are all criteria that
determine the quality of a quotation.
3. Decomposition and Definition of Technical Cost
We can consider the costs based on the ability to affect directly or not a
product or an activity. They include:
a) direct costs: it is, in most cases, disappearing with the production
costs (labor, material, tools, use of tools machines ...);
b) indirect costs: they represent the required expenses to produce, but
cannot be assigned to a specific product (insurance, management ...).
The distribution of indirect costs is a delicate operation. It depends
mainly on the strategic choices made by company management. Therefore, we
will not talk about those costs acquired called structure cost.
In this paper, we take into consideration only the technical costs: supply
cost, subcontracting cost and production cost.
This cost includes expenses dependent only on the chosen solution and
the means of production involved.
3.1. Supply Cost
The supply cost essentially represents the cost of raw materials. We

consider two types of raw materials: the standard material: laminated, ; the
special material: casting, forging,
Many studies show that the supply cost is a very important part of
technical cost (average 50%) (Boothroyd, 1988). It is therefore important to
determine its cost of obtaining in a realistic and fast manner (Ou-Yang & Lin,
2011).
In the case of a standard material, usually is associated to each type of
raw material a cost per unit of weight and length, allowing to know easily the
direct cost of a standard material.
In the case of a special material, it is difficult to accept to be limited in
the case of a quotation, to estimate an average cost of production using the
average cost per kilo. The company that would sell complex parts will be
underestimated.
3.2. Subcontracting Cost
There are three types of subcontracting cost:

a) Subcontracting the means: some tasks require very specific operation
or equipment that the company does not own, in which case it is necessary to
use the subcontracting.
172
b) Subcontracting the capacity: this is a call to a subcontractor because

the company is overloaded, the company can estimate the outsourcing, or
estimate the subcontracting cost of work as if the operation was conducted in
the company, or may have the effect of reducing the company income.
c) Subcontracting to lower cost per hour: it often happens that the
hourly cost of the company, for certain activities, is higher than that proposed
by some subcontractors, it is still necessary to make a more detailed analysis of
changes in hourly costs in this case, if one considers that the hourly cost Ch
takes into account fixed and variable costs
Ch =
CV + CF
,
Np
(1)
where: CV variable charges, CF fixe charges, Np number of products.

3.3. Production Cost
It is still important to note that the cost raw materials depends on the
dimensional accuracy and required specifications. Therefore, choosing a method
of obtaining can be done by comparing the cost of processing each of the
manufacturing possibilities.
The manufacturing cost is broken down into:
a) manufacturing preparing cost;
b) machining cost;
c) cutting tools cost.
3.3.1. Manufacturing Preparing Cost. The manufacturing preparing
cost for all operations is concerning the definition of manufacturing strategy,
development and installation and / or implementation of the devices needed to
machining. They are:
a) production programme (Weill, 1993);
b) CNC program (Prudhomme, 1996);
c) the griping devices (Gladel et al., 1992);
d) editing tools;
e) mounting the piece.
All of these costs are very difficult to estimate. Indeed, these operations
represent a human work (physical or mental). Yet the determination of human
time (the costs) is subject to the rigors of the work. Many parameters can
disrupt a normal execution of the operation:
a) staff qualifications;
b) the exact knowledge and respect for the procedure;
c) the influence of the environment;
d) learning;
173
e) the monotony
(Anselmett, 1995) proposed a relation to define the programming time
depending on the difficulty of machining the piece
TCN = 10 min + 8min/phase + 1.5min/tool + 2 min/operation
(2)
where: TCN programming time for CNC.

3.3.2. Machining Cost. The machining cost is the cost generated when
the machine is operating. The total time in this case corresponds to the total
time of movement of the approaching tool and speed work, time to release the
tool, automatic tool change when possible. Determining the cost of machining
requires knowledge of hourly Cm machine that can be evaluated as follows. The
simplified model of the machine cost per hour includes:
a) Amortization of the machine and financial expenses
A=
P
Pi
+
,
HN 2 H
(3)
where: A amortization, P toll machine price, H hours of use per year, N

duration in years of amortization, i interest rate.
b) Operating costs
R=
Fr SI
+
+ 0.6eW + 1.6CS ,
H H
(4)
where: Fr repairs and annual maintenance, S area occupied by the machine, I

local costs per m2 per year, W machine power in kW (used only 60%), e
cost of kilowatts per hour, CS salary costs (1.6 CS includes payroll taxes).
We have the hourly cost of the machine
Cm = A + R .
(5)
3.3.3. Cutting Tools Cost. The cutting tools cost is the replacement cost
of these tools. This replacement is directly related to wear. We show that the
cutting tools costs and machine use is dependent. Indeed, when the cutting
speed Vc increases, the machining time decreases in the same proportions.
However, the tool wear also increases and the cutting tools cost per unit
increases. To define the optimum, it is necessary to model the law of tool wear.
There are different models in the literature of the law of wear (Pallot, 1988).
The model wearing the simplest and most commonly used is the simplified
Taylor model that can be written as follows
VcT n = Cte = ,
(6)
174
where: Vc cutting speed, T life of the tool, n Taylor coefficient. The

economic tool life follows the relation
1 C
T0 = 1 o ,
n Cm
(7)
VC 0 = T0 n ,
(8)
where: T0 economic tool life, VC0 economic cutting speed, Co tools cost,
Cm hourly cost of the machine.
From the economic tool life is estimated easily the number of
replacements. We determine the replacement cost of a tool taking into
consideration the type of tool (re-sharpened or removable inserts) as follows.
Replacement cost of a re-sharpened tool
C0 = COU + C af + Cc ,
(9)
where: COU cost of the tool for lifetime T (between two sharpening),
COU =
PO
,
na
(10)
where: PO purchase price of the tool, na number of sharpening means, Caf

sharpening cost, Cm hourly cost of the machine.
Caf = ta Ca ,
(11)
where: ta sharpening time, Ca hourly cost of sharpening.
CC = tc Cm ,
(12)
where: tc tool change time, Cc cost of tool change.

Cost of replacing a tool with removable inserts:
C0 = COU + C f + Cc ,
(13)
where: COU cost of the removable inserts, Cf amortization of fastening

elements , Cc cost of removable inserts.
COU =
ZP
,
a
(14)
where: Z number of teeth, P purchase price of a insert, a number of edges

to use.
C f = ZfT f ,
175
(15)
where: f cost of fasteners for a insert, Tf life of fasteners (change in number

of edges), a number of edges to use.
Ccc = Zt p Cm ,
(16)
where: tp time for a inset changing.

It is important to note that the estimated cost of cutting tools is very
well managed with respect to annual purchases and the cost of sharpening.
However, determining the costs of storage, recycling, regulation and
management of cutting tools is generally unknown. It is in fact indirect costs
such as:
a) the purchase;
b) receipt and control of supplies;
c) the physical storage in the store;
d) preparation of research tools and components;
e) updating the file management of cutting tools.
The estimate of these costs depends heavily on the organization of the
company. To define, it is necessary to survey the various stakeholders:
warehousemen, buyers, ...
4. Conclusions
1. In this paper, we have demonstrated the importance and complexity of
the estimated cost within the company. Then we identified the different
components of cost.
2. It was noted also that for all quotations, it is necessary to establish a
database or knowledge of technical and economic reliability. Indeed, it is very
important to note that most quotations are made by extrapolation of the past.
REFERENCES
*** Manuel de donnes technologiques en fraisage. CETIM, 1984.
Anselmetti B., Gnration automatique de devis pour lusinage sur MOCN. Revue
dAutomatique et de Productique Applique, 8, 1, 81-100 (1995).
Boothroyd G., Estimate Cost at an Early Stage. Annals of CIRP (1988) .
Gladel G., Gourdet D., Tous J.-L., Matriaux pour outils de coupe. Trait Gnie
Mcanique, 1992.
Miller F.W., Design for Assembly: Fords Better Idea to Improve Products.
Manufacturing System, 1988.
176
Ou-Yang C., Lin T.S., Developing an Integrated Framework for Feature-based Early
Manufacturing Cost Estimation. The International Journal of Advanced
Manufacturing Technology, 13, 9, 618-629 (2011).
Pallot B. Prdtermination des temps dusinage relatifs aux sries limites
Application au tournage numrique. Thse ENSAM Paris, 20 dc., 1988.
Prudhomme G., Commande numrique des machines-outils. Trait Gnie Mcanique,
1996.
Weill R.D., Conception des gammes dusinage. Trait Gnie Mcanique, 7-25, 1993.
ESTIMAREA COSTULUI DE PRODUCIE N CAZUL PRODUSELOR

(Rezumat)
Aceast lucrare descrie descompunerea unui cost n componentele sale: costul cu
aprovizionarea, costurile cu colaboratorii i costul de producie.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
THE ROLE OF PROFESSIONAL COMPETENCE

IN BUSINESS ENTREPRENEURSHIP
BY
LUCIANA-CRISTIANA STAN*, and VLADIMIR MRSCU-KLEIN

Department of Engineering and Management

Abstract: In a market economy based on competition and risk, business
sector development is a priority. For the Romanian economy, business sector
development, especially skills are an important part of economic restructuring
policy, which positively influence the pace of sustainable economic growth. By
their characteristics: innovation, close ties with the community, high dynamic,
optimal exploitation of local resources, creating jobs, developing small and
medium impact, especially at lower levels, namely the local and regional levels.
Entrepreneurship skills are reflected in fact the result of ideas and projects that
illustrate the determination and attitude of the entrepreneur to identify and use
opportunities that arise at a time. The motivation to create a new business is a
prerequisite for the emergence of entrepreneurial initiative and receptiveness to a
product or service is what brings success.
Key words: responsible entrepreneurship, professional competence,
questionnaires, sample.
1. Introduction
The research was NQFHE, that the National Framework of
Qualifications in Higher Education skills fall into three categories:
a) general professional skills are covered by a range of skills which
will enable further studies exercise professional roles in a wider field of activity,
enabling use of the overall integrated, coherent, dynamic and open knowledge,
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: lucicri72@yahoo.com
178
Luciana-Cristiana Stan and Vladimir Mrscu-Klein
skills (eg cognitive, actionable, relational and ethical) and other acquisitions (eg
values and attitudes) in a given field.
b) specific skills those skills are covered by running a specific program
for graduate studies to cope with the demands of a specific profession, allow use
of the overall integrated, coherent, dynamic and open knowledge, skills (eg
cognitive, actionable , relational and ethical) and other acquisitions (eg values
and attitudes) in the exercise of certain professions that
2. Professional Competence in Entrepreneurial Business
2.1. Implementation Methodology
2.1.1. The Starting Point. Qualitative marketing research used a variety

of investigative methods and techniques, mostly psychological. The most
suitable types of qualitative research methods and research techniques are
chosen nondirectiv depth interviews, plus paper and pencil interview focused on
group discussions Focus group This type of survey is a technique based on
interviewing relevant persons, highly qualified, available experience in areas
related to business performance and maintain a high position on the economic
plan. It is a survey based on direct personal interviews, informal, which
involves both complex questions and a free discussion, which provides an
opportunity for the interviewees to express their views.
2.1.2. An Intermediate Result. The questionnaire was applied to a sample
of 14 subjects randomly selected socio-demographic characteristics of which
are outlined below:
i) aged between 22 and 61 years with an average of 44 years;
ii) 28.6% of surveyed have postgraduate (masters, doctorate), 64.3% are
graduates and 7.1% have completed a technical school;
iii) respondents are specializations in the fields of economics,
engineering, socio-human, financial, management, technology, the Romanian
language - respondents are the following professions: economist, engineer,
administrator, school psychologist, librarian, manager, - 64.3% active and
35.7% in the private sector in the state
Presentation skills training in the sample In the sample, were presented
skills, people in the sample will indicate which of these 9 would like to develop
their skills. Thus:
i) Communication skills in their mother tongue: 92.9% of subjects
correctly asserts that speak the language of all respondents said that home and
write correctly in their native language.
ii) Communication skills in a foreign language: 85.7% of respondents
stated that speak foreign languages, while only 14.3% say they do not speak a
foreign language.
iii) The level of competence in using information and communication
technologies, digital technologies (computers, internet, mobile phone etc..): All
179
participants declare that they have 100% skills and abilities to use multi-media
technology.
iv) Math Skills : 78.6% of respondents say they are good at math, 14.3%
declared that they have mathematical skills and 7.1% can not determine the
degree of mastery of computer skills.
v) Half of the respondents in the sample can easily solve mathematical
problems or other sciences, 14.3% declared that they have these skills and
35.7% can not appreciate the ease with which exact solves.
vi) Ability to "learn to learn": 92.9% of respondents have the ability to
learn new things and to integrate new knowledge into the old ones already
existing, while 7.1% can not determine the degree of learning some new things.
78.6% of respondents believe they have time and willingness to engage in a
career development activity. 14.3% can not appreciate this and 7.1% did not
have time /availability for this business.
vii) Skills in interpersonal relationships: 92.9% of respondents declared
that they have difficulty in communicating with colleagues working in while
7.1% say they face obstacles in communicating effectively with their peers.
viii) Also for a percentage of 92.9% of those polled say they have
teamwork skills while 7.1% can not determine the degree of development of
their teamwork skills.
ix) Spirit of initiative and entrepreneurial skills: half of the respondents
have the skills to start a business, 42.9% can not appreciate the skills of
entrepreneurship, while 7.1% say they know how to start a business.
x) In terms of "openness to innovation", 92.9% of respondents were happy
to experience new things but 7.1% can not appreciate this. 64.3% of persons in
the sample report that they feel the opposite fear of risk taking, 14.3% of
subjects declared that they feel comfortable taking the risk, and finally, 21.4%
of them do not and can appreciate the anxiety experienced in relation to risk
taking. 92.9% of respondents are reluctant to again, while 7.1% say they are
resistant to innovation.
xi) Entrepreneurial skills main-respondents are in engineering and
management fields, so that 60% of respondents engaged in economic
engineering, 20% are employed in the economic, industrial 10% and 10% in
other related fields (Baciu, 2011).
Remark. Developing professional skills. Of the nine skills needed to
develop personal and professional journey, say they would like to improve the
following: the skills of "learning to learn, civic and social networking skills,
communication skills in a foreign language; entrepreneurial skills, skills and use
of digital multi-media technology.
2.2. Necessary Skills and Personal Development Profesionale
The questionnaire aims to identify the degree of development of the

Route 9 skills necessary personal and professional development in key areas in
180
which respondents operate: language communication skills, communication

skills in a foreign language, mathematical skills in science and technology,
digital literacy, the use of multi-media technology, the skills of "learning to
learn", civic and social networking skills, entrepreneurial skills, skills of artistic
and cultural expression
3. Application of Professional Competence
This study is designed on the basis of questionnaires completed by
project participants. Questionnaires were distributed to all participants in the
marketing research aim is to identify the entrepreneurial skills acquired which
brought the project participants. Based on the analysis of all questionnaires
highlight the initial findings on participants' learning experiences, learned
entrepreneurial skills, vision and business results immediately perceived in
terms of entrepreneurship. form of tables and graphs:
D e f i n i t i o n 1. The graphic representation in the level of studies
(Table 1, Fig. 1) (Baciu, 2011).
Table 1.
Educational studies
Studies
Percent
High School
7.1
Education Technical
64.3
Other Higher
28.6
D e f i n i t i o n 2. Graphical representation depending on the

specialization (Table 2, Fig. 2) (Baciu, 2011).
Table 2
Specialization
Specialization
Nr.
crt.
1
Economics
2
Financial
3
Engineering
4 Romanian language
5
Management
6
Sciences humanities
7
Tehnology management
8
Tehnology equipment
Percent
28.6
7.1
14.3
7.1
7.1
14.3
7.1
7.1
181
Studies
28,6%
Education
technical
7,1
igh
High
school
64,3
%
Fig. 1 Representation based on studies.

Specialization
Tehn. Equipm.
7,1
Tehn.
7,1
7,1
Scince humanit.
Econom
14,3
28,6
Man
7,1
Financ
Rom.langu
7,1
7,1
Engin.
14,3
Fig. 2 Representation on the specialization.
Remarks. 1. A percentage of 64.5% of respondents are university

graduates. Only 7.1% are technical school graduates
A percentage of 8.6% of respondents have completed other studies.
T h e o r e m 1. Studies.
P r o o f. A percentage of 28.6% of respondents are specialized in the
economic profile which represents a majority
T h e o r e m 2. Field activity.
182
P r o o f. A percentage of 14.3% of respondents are specilize the profile

of engineering to equal the number of respondents specilize the profile of social
and human sciences.
L e m m a 1. Areas that will initiate business.
P r o o f. Specializations: finance, Romanian, management, technology
and equipment technology have equal percentages of 7.1%
Remark. The problems faced by potential women entrepreneurseconomic dependency and poverty are major problems especially in rural areas.
C o r o l l a r y 1. The motivation to create a new business is a
prerequisite for the emergence of entrepreneurial initiative for rewarding and
successful
4. Conclusions on the Leading Successful Business Entrepreneurs
1. The results of this report indicates that women are strongly involved in
entrepreneurial activities prior to the start of business (at a rate of 9.88%) while
men have a somewhat higher percentage in developing business in recent years
(16.44%). It was also found that the average age of those involved in
entrepreneurial activities is between 33 and 35 years.
2. However, it notes that people aged between 36 and 50 years are
involved in a much greater extent in previous entrepreneurial start-up business
activities (9.52%). In the case of the recently become entrepreneurs, the highest
proportion is found in people aged between 26 and 40 (18.27%).The results
indicate the importance of the entrepreneur's family presence in one or more
persons to enhance entrepreneurial entrepreneurial activities.
3. A share of 38.45% of the people involved in previous work reported
the presence of an entrepreneurial start-up business in the family, the example
most often given to the father (22.92%). For people newly entrepreneurs,
20.63% of respondents have a family business, father is the family member
most often given as an example (15.17%).
4. More interestingly, the results indicate that respondents consider social
aspects as major factors that motivated the decision to engage in entrepreneurial
activities.
POSDRU/88/1.5/S/59321.
REFERENCES
*** ANIMMC, A Youth Entrepreneurial Training Course. START Program, Bucureti,
2006.
Baciu F., Role of Women Living in Entrepreneurship. available at: http://www.
g2entrepreneurship.eu/Ro.../antreprenoriat accessed: 2011/03/10, 2011.
183
Blsescu M., Guidelines for Achieving the Business Plan, Marketing Plan, Marketing
Program. Transilvania University, Braov, 2004.
Brtucu G., Public Service Marketing, Publishing Infomarket, Braov, 2004.
Drucker P F, System Innovation and Entrepreneurship - Practice and Principles. Ed.
Enciclopedic, Bucureti, 1993.
Pascu I.,. Professional Skills and Entrepreneurship. available at: http://www.businessedu.ro; accessed: 2011/03/02, 2011.
Popescu C.; Brtucu G., Marketing Research. Guideline Practical. Transylvania
University, Braov, 1999.
Rugman A., Collinson S., International Business. 4th Ed., Prentice Hall, 2006.
ROLUL COMPETENELOR PROFESIONALE

N ACTIVITATEA ANTREPRENORIAL
(Rezumat)
Pentru economia romneasc, dezvoltarea sectorului antreprenorial, dar, mai
ales, competenele profesionale, constituie o component important a politicii de
restructurare economic, ce influeneaz pozitiv ritmul creterii economice durabile.
Prin inovaie, legturi strnse cu comunitatea, dinamic ridicat, valorificarea optim a
resurselor locale, crearea de locuri de munc, intreprinderile mici si mijlocii
influeneaz dezvoltarea, la nivele locale si regionale. Iniiativele antreprenoriale
reflectate n competene profesionale reprezinta rezultatul unor idei si a unor proiecte ce
ilustreaz determinarea i atitudinea ntreprinztorului fa de identificarea i
valorificarea unor oportuniti care apar la un moment dat.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
SOME ASPECTS REGARDING HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

WITH SECONDARY CONTROL
BY
IRINA TIA* and IRINA MARDARE

Abstract. The high costs for energy and the increased necessary of it lead to
hydraulic systems working at a certain power with an optimum efficiency and
consequently minimum energy consumption. The calculus of such systems is
focused on the energy price and not on investment only. The hydraulic systems
with secondary control are not only saving energy but also recovering it. In the
paper two cases of such systems are presented. One can see the Simscape diagram
for one of them and the simulation results for both.
Key words: hydraulic system, secondary control, numeric simulation.
1. General Considerations
The high costs for energy and the increased necessary of energy lead to
hydraulic systems working at a certain power, with an optimum efficiency and
consequently minimum energy consumption. The calculus of such systems is
focused on the energy price and not on investment only.
The most common strategy for controlling hydraulic systems is still
primary control. In addition to the primary controlled systems, constant pressure
systems could be applied. This concept characterizes secondary controlled
systems, where the hydraulic output units are connected to a constant pressure
rail. Displacement control of the secondary units, support direct control of the
output torque or force load (Rydberg 2005).
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: iddtita@yahoo.com
186
Irina Tia and Irina Mardare
Using secondary control adaptive hydraulic systems in impressed

pressure circuits one can obtain a substantial growth of efficiency. This control
type uses hydrostatic displacement machine with variable displacement volume
and implies that from a system with impressed pressure one can receive power
using displacement control and not resistance control. The hydrostatic
displacement machines may work both as pump and as motor. Hydraulic energy
obtained when it works as a pump is transferred to other consumers or
accumulated.
Energy recovery is fulfilled when hydraulic machine works as a pump
and the energy is stored in an accumulator (Back, 2005), (Rydberg 2005).
Using the concept of secondary control it is possible to constitute a feeding
network like the one in electric networks. Using an accumulator as an energy
storing device makes possible to design a system with improved endurance
compared with a similar one without accumulator (Kirka, 2009).
Tasks for the future can be seen in the recognition of possible new
applications that could not be identified so far. (Murrenhoff, 2006).
Simulation of the system is important in order to adjust parameters for
dynamic characteristics improvement. The aim of this paper is to present a
block diagram for Matlab simulation.
2. Simscape Diagram and Simulation Results
In Fig. 2 is presented the Simscape diagram for a hydraulic system with
secondary control and fixed displacement pump. The input signal represents
the angular velocity of the hydraulic motor. It was considered the signal
presented in Fig.1.
The Simscape diagram has as subsystems the servocylider subsystem and
the load subsystem. It has also some sensors and oscilloscopes for important
parameters.
Fig. 1 Input signal.
Fig. 3 shows the diagram for the servocylinder subsystem and Fig. 4 the
diagram for the load at the axle of the variable displacement motor. For both
cases the load is a constant.
MTR1
PS S
P
Ideal Translational
Motion Sensor
PS2S1
Position_SP

B
T
4-Way Directional
Valve
Signal 1
HR2
Signal Builder2

Proportional and
Servo-Valve Actuator
A
C
PS S
PS2S2 Position_Valve
-CMRR1
Constant1
C
S PS
Gas-Charged
Accumulator1

A
Ideal Rotational
Motion Sensor
PS2S
Angular
velocity
B
Flow Meter1
HR1
B
A
P
Solver
Configuration
Flow
Meter2
Hydraulic Fluid
BA
Ideal Hydraulic
Pressure Sensor
PS S
PS-Simulink Pump_pressure
Converter1
f(x)=0

Ideal Angular
Velocity Source
-C-
PRV

S PS
S2PS
MRR
HR
187
Constant
Flow Meter
Fig. 2 The Simscape diagram for system with fixed - displacement pump.
R

C
V

MTR2
R

Weight
M D
Winch
MTR3
188
TS
Servo-cylinder
MTR
MTR1

S PS
S2PS1
Fig. 3 Subsystem servocylinder.
Fig. 4 Subsystem "load".
In Fig. 5 one can see the position of the spool of the servovalve, the
pressure at the pump outlet, the angular velocity at the motor axle and the flow
rate at the motor inlet for the case of the system with fixed displacement
pump.
c
d
Fig. 5 For the system with fixed displacement pump:
a position of the servovalve; b pressure at the pump outlet; c angular velocity of
the hydrostatic machine; d flow rate at the motor.
For the hydraulic system with secondary control and variable

displacement pump, was also done the Simscape diagram. The input signal is
presented in Fig. 1. In Fig. 6 one can see the position of the spool of the
servovalve, the pressure at the pump outlet, the angular velocity at the motor
189
axle and the flow rate at the motor inlet for the case of the system with variable
displacement pump. From the diagram in Fig. 5c, one can see the dynamic
parameters of the system: time constant, error and damping ratio
c
d
Fig. 6 For the system with variable displacement pressure compensated pump:
a position of the servovalve; b pressure at the pump outlet; c angular
velocity of the hydrostatic machine; d flow rate at the motor.
3. Conclusions
1. The hydraulic systems with secondary control are not only saving
energy but also recovering it.
2. The study of dynamic behaviour of such systems is possible using the
Matlab/Simscape method. In this paper the Simscape diagram for a hydraulic
system with secondary control and fixed displacement pump is presented.
3. Comparing the two cases, one can see that the angular velocity at the
hydrostatic machine follows the input law. Important differences are to be
noticed regarding the pressure at the pump outlet and the flow rate at the
hydromotor.
Acknowledgements. The present work has been supported from the Grant PNII,
2703/22-111/2008.
REFERENCES
Back W., What Are the Prospects Facing new Ideas in Fluid Power? The Sixth
International Conference on Fluid Power Transmission and Control (ICFP' 2005),
Hangzou, China, 5-8, 2005, pp. 21-30.
190
Kirka A., Investigation of Parameters of Accumulator Transmission of Self Moving

Machine. Engineering for Rural Development, 28-29.05.2009, Jelgava, 2009, pp.
100-104.
Murrenhoff H., Hydraulic Drives in Stationary Applications. 5th International Fluid
Power Conference, Aachen, Germany, 2, 2006, pp. 11-36.
Rydberg K.-E., Hydraulic Accumulators as Key Components in Energy Efficient Mobile
Systems. The Sixth International Conference on Fluid Power Transmission and
Control (ICFP' 2005), Hangzou, China, 2005, pp. 178-182.
Mathworks Inc., on line at www.mathworks.com
*** SimHydraulics: http://www.mathworks.com/products/simhydraulics/demos.html
ASPECTE PRIVIND SISTEME HIDRAULICE CU REGLARE SECUNDAR

(Rezumat)
Sistemele hidraulice cu reglare secundar au avantajul c realizeaz nu doar
economie de energie ci i recuperarea acesteia n fazele de frnare. n acest mod se
explic atenia de care se bucur att pentru cercettori ct i pentru utilizatori. Pentru
analiza comportrii dinamice, utilizarea mediului Matlab, respectiv metodei Simscape,
este potrivit n cazul sistemelor hidraulice n general i implicit a celor cu reglare
secundar. n lucrare este prezentat schema funcional Simscape pentru un sistem
hidraulic cu reglare secundar i pompa cu volum geometric constant. Sunt prezentate
rezultatele simulrii pentru acest caz ca i pentru cazul unui sistem hidraulic cu reglare
secundar i pomp cu volum geometric variabil i regulator de presiune. Se remarc n
ambele cazuri obinerea unei variaii a vitezei unghiulare la axului motorului hidraulic
apropiata de cea impus. Diferene ntre cele dou cazuri apar n ceea ce privete variaia debitului trimis ctre motorul hidraulic i variaia presiunii la ieirea din pomp.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
MAN MACHINE INTERFACE ERGONOMIC DESIGN

RELATED TO HUMAN FACTORS
BY
ALEXANDRA TOMA* and CORNEL CIUPAN

Department of Machine Tools and Industrial Robots
Received: September 10, 2011
Abstract. When a human-machine-interface gets less priority in a design analysis,
unnecessary hazards may be imposed. Ergonomic and human factors should be
incorporated as a part of this process, so they can show the importance of human machine
interaction. The objective of this paper is to highlight these factors that are able to provide
a platform where this emerging technology part interaction can increase productivity,
quality, satisfaction, safety and health in a workplace. The article contribution is a
theoretical one taking into consideration helpful ideas in a human machine interface
ergonomic design.
Key words: design, ergonomics, human factors, human-machine-interface.
1. Introduction
The rational efficient utility of means of production depends on the use of
the most active and most dynamic element which is the human, who participates
with his whole being and consists of physical, psychical and moral complexity.
Therefore, beyond the human activity results, man-machine interaction strongly
manifests. The mutual conditioning between the man-machine interaction is
created by human, technological, physical and psycho-social elements which
interconnect themselves in a common network, leading them to the same
purpose. The use of machines keeps growing because the work system gets
increasingly based on the socio-technical element and the human-machine
becomes more prevalent in all domains of activity, says (Ispas et al., 1984).
Sometimes humans and machines are equal partners and they should be treated
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: ines_design3@yahoo.com
192
Alexandra Toma and Cornel Ciupan
that way and described as equal terms. The right contradiction idea is that
humans must not be described as they are machines, neither should machines be
described as if they were human, explains (Hollnagel, 2008). The human is a
part of a process system and also can be a part of a larger production system. In
addition of ergonomic activities, human factors benefits get incorporated. The
operator using a machine is, at least one single level of a man-machine system
that can be described. The paper is divided so as to present important ideas
about human machine interaction system, concerning its ergonomic design.
2. Man Machine System
This quote given by (Salvendy, 2008) says: Although it can refer to any
type of interface device, the term human machine interaction usually refers to a
display, a computer and software that serve as an operator interface for a
controller or a control system. Ergonomics is trying to assemble information on
human capacity and capability in order to use information in equipment
designing and create a larger system. Both, human capacity and capability,
describe man-machine interaction trying to reduce unnecessary stress
concerning demands of the task being performed. A discrete category added to
this fragment will explain that a design analysis will always depend on the bond
between user and machine. Interfaces can be more or less similar to one
another. The way they are designed or redesigned must enable the user to do
reliable operations depending on elements that he sees, touches, hears, in order
to perform control functions and receive feedback on the actions. Fig. 1 shows
how this category finds its place as a benefit added to a human machine
interaction. The operator can be put in charge as follows:
Fig.1 Conditions that put an operator in charge.
The display is one of the most important elements that belongs to a

human machine interface and is the first that realizes the actual communication
between machine and user, and from here the operator knows if it is a good or a
wrong one. While he makes an error, an onscreen message can be displayed,
Fig. 2. This message can have no consequence over any of the tasks performed.
Fig. 3 shows the way how an onscreen message display should look like.
Any impact between a machine and an operator will always be for the
first time visual and that is how communication between them becomes
important. Explanations will be shown in Fig. 4. Whenever an interface change
193
is performed and there is a change in the command function, mapping the new
interface, the designer should share as few features as possible with the former
one. Operator shows a higher level of performance when the same commands
are linked to the same functions, explains Smith S. E. in (Smith, 2011).
Fig.2 Error message display.
Fig. 3 A good display look should highlight.
Fig. 4 User interface visual communication.
194
When consistency cannot be achieved, for example the cost, a designer

should consider is the next recommendation. The operator may disregard
warning notices and signals because factors like stress and lack of vigilance can
occur. For example, a safety device can be required from operator before he
uses a given function. A good functionalism goal discovers how user behavior
adapts to contains imposed by the domain for example, a machine program
getting available. A good human machine interface design leads to individual
cognition of every specific task centered on man machine interaction.
Applications decision making to complex settings and leads to observing
operators at work and incident studies and assumptions about human decision
making can be formed. In the following chapter the environment shows its
involvement when a human machine interface takes into account the human fit.
3. Environment
The environment from a system point of view is that which provides
inputs to the system and which reacts to outputs from the system. The
environment around the operator or user-crew ensemble however, is not only
the atmosphere and weather, temperature around it or luminosity, but also the
machine working program management system.
Equipment design and environmental comfort and safety become
facilities for human use and ergonomics is the supplement added to these
operation facilities.
a
b
Fig.5 Schematic presentation: a computer numeric control equipment;
b working panel.
Human factors are shown in Fig. 6, as being a main incorporated system

design part and the other Fig. 7, highlights what a human computer interaction
provides.
195
Fig.6 Human factors.
Fig 7 Human computer interaction.
When it is about man machine interface function and design the main
purpose is to make its user friendly, increasing market share and operator
satisfaction (Flaspler et al., 2004).
4. Conclusions
1. The three dimensional sketch shown in the previous chapter represents
a schematic example for a Computer Numeric Control machine where the
working panel is the main important part that draws author attention concerning
its design in order to improve the communication between machine and human.
2. The paper shows how important is the human factor when it is about to
design an interface. In the same time, from the lines above, synthetically results
that the author has the strong desire to improve the ergonomics and the
functionality of machine tools.
3. This study is directed to an equipment with numerical command or a
group of equipments with numerical command, namely on vertical milling
tools. We suggest adapting a panel that is traditionally used for another type of
machine tool, on vertical milling tool.
4. It is pointed out the author concern to correlate the innovating
intentions with the active STAS. It is emphasized the impact on improving the
equipment ergonomics and functionality in the relation man machine and the
professional environment. It is also underlined the author interest in making a
guide very necessary for the machine tool designers concerning the ergonomics
and functionality.
Acknowledgements. This paper was written at the Technical University of ClujNapoca and supported by the project Doctoral studies in engineering sciences for
developing the knowledge based society SIDOC contract no.
POSDRU/88/1.5/S/60078, project co-funded from European Social Fund through
Sectorial Operational Program Human Resources 2007-2013.
196
REFERENCES
Flaspler E., Hauke A., Reinert D, The Human-machine Interface as an Emerging Risk.
EU-OSHA European Agency for Safety and Health at Work (Sarodnik & Brau
2006), (Schmersal 2005), (Montenegro 1999), (Koller, Beu & Burnmester,
2004).
Hollnagel E., Prolegomenon to Cognitive Task Design. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates,
Inc, 2008.
Ispas C., Ionescu I. A., Lazarovici V. A., Andriescu N. T., Machine-Tools Ergonomy.
Ed. Tehnic, 1984.
Salvendy G., Human factors and Ergonomics. Ed., by Erick Hollnagel, 2008.
Smith S. E., Wise GEEK, Ed. by O. Wallace, January, (Tutherow & Liptk, 2002),
(Baumann and Lanz, 1998), (Charwat, 1992), Internet address, 2011.
FACTORII UMANI ASOCIAI DESIGNULUI ERGONOMIC AL
UNEI INTERFEE OM-MAIN
(Rezumat)
Designul unei interfee om-main va fi tot timpul important i continuu
mbuntit. Factorii umani trebuie luai n considerare obligatoriu, pentru c omul este
elementul principal, care le raspunde pozitiv sau negativ.
Atenia autorilor a fost ndreptat asupra comunicrii vizuale dintre om i
main, deoarece,acesta este primul si cel mai important lucru, care realizeaz contactul
dintre om i tehnologie. Pe viitor, dorina autorilor este aceea de a mbunti aspectul
unui panou de comand i interfaa unui soft care aparine unei maini cu comand
numeric; n spea, mrirea dimensiunilor display-ului i poziionarea ergonomic a
butoanelor, innd cont de standardele de proiectare. Scopul acestui articol este de a
ajuta proiectanii s respecte dorina operatorului uman.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
STUDY ABOUT THE ROLE OF ACCUMULATORS IN

HYDRAULIC SECONDARY CONTROL SYSTEMS
BY
LILIANA TOPLICEANU*, ADRIAN GHENADI and MARIUS PASCU

Vasile Alecsandri University, Bacu,
Engineering Faculty
Abstract. The paper is focused on the functional role of accumulators in

hydraulic secondary control systems. Mathematical models are presented and
the same the simulation results for a gas-charged accumulator using
SimHydraulics tool from programming language Matlab.
Key words: accumulator, secondary control system.
1. Introduction
The concept of secondary control of the hydraulic systems working under
impressed pressure entered the current use around 1980. The secondary control
is mostly used where the conventional systems are no longer able to meet the
technical requirements in terms of feedback dynamic, positioning and accurate
control of the speed. The use of these systems is still rather reduced.
2. The Role of the Accumulator in the Secondary Control Systems
2.1. The Working Principle of the Secondary Control
The concept of secondary control working under impressed pressure

supposes the existence of a secondary unit of adjustable capacity which, when
working at a preset pressure, tries to reach the adequate capacity in order to
maintain a constant rotation speed. An adjustment of the capacity under
constant pressure takes place, so that the rotation speed of the motor should
*
Corresponding author: e-mail: lili@ub.ro
198
Liliana Topliceanu et al.
remain constant (or approximately constant). This implies at the same time an
adequate adjustment of the hydraulic momentum, so that the mechanical
momentum required by the functional program of the system could be adjusted
The main advantage of these systems is the significant increase in
efficiency. The adjustable and reversible hydrostatic units will take from the
system only the power necessary for overcoming a certain momentum, or they
will supply it with power when they start working as a pump (Kordak, 2003).
The second important advantage is a completely new method of
centralized power supply, similar to the electric systems, supplying several
consumers with different loads from the same network (Fig. 1).
Fig.1 Hydraulic system with secondary control (Kordak, 2003).
Through some hydraulic connectors, we can link to the main power

supply network as many motors as are necessary for that specific system. There
are no hydraulic resistors on the power supply lines. The pressure within the
system is determined by the loading conditions of the accumulator.
When the actuators work as a motor, the power is taken from the power
supply network, and when they work as a generator, the power is reintroduced
into the system and it can be used by other motors, it can be stored or can be
used for producing other types of energy such as electric energy. We must
notice that, when the pressure stays quasi-constant, the compression-dilatation
effect of the liquid is eliminated, the system dynamic is much better as
compared to the classical systems and the power efficiency is much higher.
Designing such systems implies: setting the pressure value necessary in
the centralized power source, calculating the range of resistance momentum
which can be overcome by adjusting the displacement of the motors,
determining the influence of transitory conditions on the functional stability of
other consumers connected to the network, necessary number of accumulators.
2.2. Hydraulic Accumulators
The general function of these hydraulic elements is, as their name

suggests, to accumulate the hydraulic energy during the first stage, and then to
introduce it into the system in order to meet the energy demand or to control the
199
occurrence/development of certain specific functional phenomena. The

accumulator charge sets the value of the pressure in the classical systems as
well as in the more modern ones, which have secondary control.
Hydraulic accumulators are used for: maintaining a relatively constant
pressure within the system when the pistons of the hydraulic motors change
their position; attenuating the flow pulsation of the pump; attenuating the peak
pressure in the system; compensating for the volume fluctuation of the liquid
when the pressure or the temperature in the system change; compensating the
oil loss, within certain limits; recovering the breaking energy.
From the large range of designed versions, the most frequently used are
the gas-charged ones. They are made up of two distinct volumes, one of them
containing gas under pressure, the second one being filled with the working
liquid in the hydraulic system. Due to the compressibility of the gas in the
accumulator, the container filled with gas has the role of elastic element.
3. Modeling of Gas-Charged Accumulator
The accumulators must have a minimum total volume and a maximum
useful capacity. The useful capacity refers to the volume of the oil output for a
pressure loss p = pmax pmin. These values, the maximum drive pressure and
the minimum pressure, are given as preset data in choosing or designing of an
accumulator. In the case of the secondary control hydrostatic systems, the
transitory loading or unloading modes of the accumulator occur at high speed,
in quick cycles.
3.1. Dimension of the Accumulator
As it was mentioned before, the most frequently used accumulators are

the gas-charged ones. Taking into consideration this type of accumulator, the
version with elastic chamber, its functioning is based on the following wellknown law
piVi n = p f V fn ,
(1)
where pi and pf are the initial and the final pressure of the gas; Vi and Vf, the
initial and the final gas volume; n = cp/cv is the polytrophic index; cp/cv - the
specific heat of the gas under constant pressure, and the constant volume
respectively. The value of the index n depends on the type of process, more
exactly on its speed. In general, it is an adiabatic transformation if the process
takes place in less than a minute (Oprean et al., 1982) and it is specific to the
accumulators with membrane and elastic chamber. The accumulator volume
necessary within a hydrostatic system is calculated using the following formula
(Oprean et al., 1982).
200

1/ n
p3

p
V1 = 1 1/ n Vx ,
p
1 3
p2
(2)
where: Vx is the volume to be discharged from the accumulator; p1 is the preload pressure in the accumulator; p2 is the maximum working pressure of the
installation (for which there is a corresponding volume V2 of compressed gas);
p3 is the minimum pressure in the installation. Setting the pre-load pressure is
important from the point of view of accumulator efficiency in maintaining the
desired value within the system.
In the case of a polytrophic transformation, the optimal value of the preload pressure can be set using the formula indicated in the specialized literature
p1= p2(11 / n) p31 / n .
(3)
If the discharge is an adiabatic one, the equation becomes: p1 = p20,291p30,709. In

the case of a polytrophic process with n=1,25 then the Eq. (3) has the following
content: p1=p20,200p30,800.
The discharge time of the accumulator is an extremely important index,
since it determines the type of process taking place and thus sets the value of the
index n. The total volume of the accumulator Vt is calculated by adding the
volume filled with gas V1 and the one filled by oil Vu. The volume filled with
gas is usually a multiple value of the oil volume in full charge mode. The rate of
these volumes in the common industrial applications is usually V1/Vu= 3/1.
3.2. Mathematic Model of Accumulator
Simplifying one can say that accumulator absorbs or releases a discharge

Qac when there is a variation of the pressure p within the system. The
mathematic model of accumulator without connecting pipe is given by equation
(Clrau, 1999), (Oprean et al., 1982)
Qac =
V0 dp
.
E dt
(4)
The model of the accumulator with bellows is given by equation of

continuity and adiabatic gas transformation equations
Qac =
pV
dV V0 dp V dp
+
+
,
dt
E dt E dt
= p1V1 .
(5)
201
Working on the two equations we obtain
V p1/ V
V p1/
Qac = 1 11/ + 1 1( +11)/
E p
E np
dp
.
dt
(6)
4. Simulation of Gas-Charged Accumulator

The study of accumulator behavior in different operating conditions can
be made using specialized software. One of the most frequently used, because
of its flexibility, is SimHydraulics from Matlab.
Fig. 2 Accumulator testing circuit.
In Fig. 2 one can see the scheme for functional tests of an accumulator,
using predefine units of Matlab program.
Simulation results are presented in Fig. 3. The accumulator is preloaded
at 0.5MPa. The pressure source is switched at every 3s from 1MPa to 0,5 MPa
but the accumulator performs its function and maintains the pressure and
discharges a corresponding flow. The input signals are presented in Fig. 4.
202
Fig. 4 Input signals.

Fig. 3 Simulation diagrams.
5. Conclusions
1. Accumulator presence is required in the construction of drive systems
with secondary control in order to stabilize the value of the pressure. The
reaction time of accumulator affects the stability of motion of driven equipment.
2. The type and characteristics of accumulator must be chosen in
accordance with needed parameters of the system.
Acknowledgements. The present work has been supported from the Grant
(CNCSIS) PNII 2703/22-111/2008.
REFERENCES
Clrau D., Reglarea secundar a sistemelor de acionare hidrostatic n regim de
presiune cavsiconstant. Ed. Media-Tech, Iai, 1999.
Marin V., Moscovici R., Teneslav V., Sisteme hidraulice de acionare i reglare
automat. Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti, 1981.
Oprean A., Ionescu Fl., Dorin Al., Acionri hidraulice Elemente i sisteme. Ed.
Tehnic, Bucureti, 1982.
Kordak R., Hidrostatic Drives with Control of the Secondary Unit. Rexroth Bosh
Group, Vol. 6, 2003.
STUDIU DESPRE ROLUL ACUMULATOARELOR IN FUNCIONAREA

SISTEMELOR HIDRAULICE CU REGLAJ SECUNDAR
(Rezumat)
Lucrarea realizez o sintez privind importana acumulatoarelor n funcionarea
sistemelor hidraulice cu reglaj secundar lucrnd la presiune cvasi-constant. Un
exemplu de simulare funcional a acumulatorului, important mai ales n regimurile
tranzitorii, este de asemenea prezentat.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT CONTROL CHARTS USED IN

STATISTICAL PROCESS CONTROL
II. CONTROL CHARTS FOR INFREQUENT
AND CUMULATIVE DATA
BY
CTLIN UNGUREANU1, IRINA COZMNC1 and RADU IBNESCU2

Gheorghe AsachiTechnical University of Iai,
1
2
Department of Theoretical Mechanics
Abstract. Processes quality control is very important for organizational

success and maintaining it on market. SPC is a reliable and economical method of
monitoring the evolution of a productive process. In industrial practice are
encountered cases when classical control charts, Shewhart type, are not
recommended. The purpose of this paper is to analyze control charts using in
these cases. Special attention is given to the EWMA and CUSUM charts.
Key words: quality control, control chart, EWMA chart, CUSUM chart.
1. Charts for Infrequent Data

In many practical situations encountered in industry and services,
available data are not on a large scale. There may be instances where a new set
of data is rarely available, only once per cycle. Such cases include batches of
chemicals, large and complex shapes castings, economic indicators monitored
in time. SPC techniques can be successfully applied even in these cases, when
literature does not recommend Shewhart control charts using (Oakland, 2003),
(de Vargas et al., 2004), (Han et al., 2010).
Corresponding author: e-mail: cungurea@yahoo.com
204
Ctlin Ungureanu et al.
1.1. Individual or Run Charts
The simplest control chart for variable is that for individual

measurements. In this case individual data values will be plotted, instead of
samples averages. The central line represents the specification central value,
past performance average or target value. Action lines are placed at three
standard deviations from the center line. Warning lines can be traced to two
standard deviations from the center.
Individual or run charts have the advantage of simplicity and show
changes in process alignment and accuracy. The limits of these charts are
related to reduce sensitivity to detect small changes. The literature recommends
the use of these charts, sometimes with different amplitudes diagrams, with
clearly superior benefits in process control to a simple data table.
1.2. The Zone Control Chart and Pre-Control
This is an adaptation of the individual chart. Compared to the action and

warning lines, two lines are placed at one standard error from the average. Each
point marked on the sheet corresponds to a certain score, depending on the band
in which it falls. A change occurred in the process if the cumulative score
exceeds a certain value between two crossings of the line for average. Another
pre-control chart variant divided into four allowable tolerance zones, two areas
of green plants and two yellow zones, peripheral. Areas outside the
specifications are considered red areas. The initial five consecutive
measurements ensures that the process is under control and demonstrate a
minimum capability CPK = 1.33. Then periodically two units are review, and
depending on the areas where it fall the process variability evolution is
concluded.
Pre-control charts are simple and useful in many applications, but still
suffering because of low sensitivity (Oakland, 2003).
1.3. Control Charts with Moving Mean and Moving Range
In practical industrial applications often meet situations where the output

of a process are available at a relatively large time, from technological or
specific economic reasons, related to the high cost of tests necessary to evaluate
the quality characteristics. In these cases, the forming of samples sufficient to
allow the use of conventional control charts is not possible and the process
control can be delays with adverse consequences.
In these situations charts for moving mean and range are recommended.
The emergence of a new data leads to the forming of a new sample by removing
the oldest set of information. This technique has several advantages: every data
represent two points on two different charts, which means different things,
isolated data has not react and less likely override, the effect on the process will
be a calming.
Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVII (LXII), f. 1, 2012
205
Compared to individual files, moving average charts have a smoothing

effect on the results, so that trends and changes can be seen more easily.
Smoothing effect is greater, the greater the number of sample, but at the same
time, highlighting trends is delayed. Another use of this technique is forecasting
activities.
1.4. Exponentially Weighted Moving Average Charts (EWMA)
Some researchers have developed a type of charts which does not give
equal importance to the newest data. These are EWMA charts, where the
average is calculated with
(1)
X i = xi + (1 )X i 1 .
In Eq. (1) X i is the mean after the xi result, X i 1 is the previous
average, and is the smoothing constant, with values in the interval (0, 1).
Many studies have been conducted to determine the influence of size on the
sensitivity of EWMA charts. Most researchers (de Vargas et al., 2004), (Han et
al., 2010), (Shu et al., 2007), (Borror et al., 1998), (Friker et al., 2008),
recommend values in the range of 0.050.25.
For example it is considered a manufacturing process of an adhesive,
whose tracked quality characteristic is viscosity V[cSt]. Due to the peculiarities
of the process, one can obtain a single value of viscosity on the day. Data for
viscosity and the averages MA calculated with Eq. (1) ( =0.2) are presented in
Table 1.
days
1
2
3
4
V[cSt]
59.1
60.5
54.3
63.7
MA
59.82
59.96
58.63
59.8
Table 1
Experimentals
V[cSt]
days
MA
5
61.8
60.2
6
57.5 59.66
7
56.2 58.97
8
61.6 59.49
days
9
10
11
12
V[cSt]
60.5
62.4
58.2
56.9
MA
59.69
60.23
59.83
59.24
In Fig.1 are presented individual and EWMA control charts. Control lines
are determined with Eqs. (2) (de Vargas et al., 2004),
AL = 0 3
,
2
WL = 0 2
,
2
CL = 0 .
From previous experiments 0 = 60 and = 3.301 are known.
(2)
206
Fig.1 Control charts, 1-individual, 2-EWMA.
2. Charts for Cumulative Data

2.1. Cumulative Sum (CUSUM) Charts
The technique of CUSUM charts was developed in the UK in 1950s and

is one of the most powerful tools available to detect small changes in trends and
data management (Shu et al., 2008). Compared to previous models, these charts
take into account the entire volume of available data.
Mean
Sample
number
X [mm]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
22.25
22.55
22.40
22.65
22.70
22.55
22.60
22.30
22.10
22.20
Table 2
Experimental data
Cusum
Sample
score Sk
number
-0.25
-0.20
-0.30
-0.15
0.05
0.10
0.20
0
-0.40
-0.70
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Mean
X [mm]
Cusum
score Sk
22.35
22.55
22.40
22.60
22.50
22.65
22.40
22.15
22.35
22.40
-0.85
-0.90
-1.10
-1.10
-0.90
-1
-1.35
-1.60
-1.75
-1.85
For each sample, the quality characteristic mean is determined and is

compared with the target. Cusum score of sample k is then calculated by
207
S k = (xi t ) .
i =1
(3)
In Eq. (3) xi is the i sample result and t is the target value.

An example with some machined parts is shown in Table 2. The target
value was 22.50 mm.
The mean control chart is shown in Fig. 2.
Fig. 2 Mean control chart.
Control limits were calculated using known relationships (Oakland,

2003). Note that samples 5, 9 and 18 required an intervention to bring the
process under control.
Cusum chart is shown in Fig. 3. Sk score values are then represented
graphically, the slope signifying the development process diagram. An upward
slope means that the process is above target, a downward slope means that the
process is below target and a horizontal portion of the development means
exactly the desired value.
The scale ratio is determined by the rapport of the distance between
corresponding samples points on the abscissa and the double means standard
error, determined by Eq. (4) (Oakland, 2003), on the ordinate. It is
recommended that this ratio is between 0.8 to 1.5 (Oakland, 2003),
SE =
(4)
208
Fig. 3 Cusum chart.
Fig. 4 Manhattan chart.
To see if the process is under statistical control compares the slope with
this gradient. A slope exceeding the limit means the occurrence of special
causes of process variability. The general appearance of the chart signify
process tend to perform below the target.
2.2. Manhattan Charts
This chart is the particular case of cumulative sheet, showing successive

stages in process evolution. Thus related products with slightly different
features can be separated and can be delivered to customers with varying
requirements.
209
An example is shown in Fig. 4.

Based on mean control and Cusum charts analysis, have been identified
several phases in process evolution (samples 1-3; 4-7; 8-11; 12-16; 17-20). For
each average was determined and represented graphic.
3. Conclusions
1. Using the most suitable type of control charts for the process be kept
under control should be a concern for the quality control department and for the
entire administration.
2. EWMA charts are used when available data about the process arriving
at a relatively high periods of time. It shows the general evolution of the process
and has a calming role, to prevent process override.
3. Cumulative charts highlight the general tendency of the process. They
can be used to separate the different developmental stages of the process.
REFERENCES
Borror C. M., Champ C. W., Rigdon S. E., Poisson EWMA Control Chart. Journal of
Quality Technology, 30, 352-361 (1998).
de Vargas V. C., Lopes L. F. D., Souza A. M., Comparative Study of the Performance
of the CUSUM and EWMA Control Charts. Computers & Industrial Engineering,
46, 707724 (2004).
Friker R. D., Knitt M. C., Hu C. X., Comparing Directionally Sensitive MCUSUM and
MEWMA Procedures with Application to Biosurveillance. Quality Engineering,
20, 478-494 (2008).
Han S. W., Tsui K. L., Ariyajunyab B., Kimb S. B., A Comparison of CUSUM, EWMA,
and Temporal Scan Statistics for Detection of Increases in Poisson Rates. Quality
and Reliability. Engineering International, 26, 279-289 (2010).
Oakland J. S., Statistical Process Control. Butterworth Heinemann, Oxford, 2003.
Shu L., JIang W., Wu S., A One-sided EWMA Control Chart for Monitoring Process
Means. Communications in StatisticsSimulation and Computation, 36, 901-920
(2007).
Shu L. J., Jiang W., Tsui K. L., A Weighted CUSUM Chart for Detecting Patterned
Mean Shifts. Journal of Quality Technology, 40, 194-213 (2008).
CONSIDERAII PRIVIND FIELE DE CONTROL UTILIZATE N CONTROLUL
STATISTIC AL PROCESELOR
II. Fie de control pentru date rare i cumulative
(Rezumat)
Cea mai simpl cale de atingere a obiectivelor organizaiei din domeniul calitii
este nvarea i aplicarea de ctre toi salariaii a instrumentelor simple de control i
asigurarea a calitii, n special a diferitelor tipuri de fie de control. Fiele EWMA se
210
folosesc atunci cnd sunt disponibile relativ puine date despre proces. Ele au un efect
de calmare i mpiedic suprareglarea procesului. Fiele CUSUM prezint tendina
general de evoluie a procesului. O variant a acestora poate separa diverse stadii de
dezvoltare din proces.

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS FOR MODELING

THE RESERVOIR EMPTYING PROCESS
THROUGH A SMALL EMPTYING ORIFICE
BY
DNU ZAHARIEA*
Gheorghe Asachi Technical University of Iai
Abstract. In this paper the emptying process of a reservoir with constant

cross-sectional area through an emptying small orifice will be investigated. Two
types of reservoir will be considered: with constant head and with variable head.
The pressure at the water surface and also the velocity of this surface, as well as
the flow discharge coefficient of the emptying orifice will be considered. The
fundamental equations governing the reservoir emptying process will be
presented (the analytical method). For modeling and simulating the reservoir
emptying process two functional diagrams based on MATLAB/Simscape
computational approach suited to analyze the real physical systems consisting of
real physical functional blocks will be presented (the functional diagrams
method). The functional diagrams allow obtaining the graphical representation of
the level of the liquid from the reservoir during the time of the emptying process
but also the graphical representation of the flow rate of the liquid through the
orifice. Using the measured values of flow rate, the velocity and the Reynolds
number can be calculated. A comparative analysis of the numerical results for the
emptying time for constant head and for variable head reservoirs, obtained with
the analytical and the functional diagram methods will be presented.
Key words: constant cross-sectional area reservoir, emptying time, emptying
orifice, functional diagram, MATLAB.
*
e-mail: dzahariea@yahoo.com
212
Dnu Zahariea
1. Introduction
Safe operating procedures of the hydraulic systems equipped with
reservoirs must consider, from the point of view of the industrial process
management, two principal conditions: the volume of liquid inside the reservoir
must be high enough for uninterrupted supplying the industrial process
(emptying or consumption phase); the storage capacity of the reservoir must be
high enough for a safety liquid volume storage thus the continuity of the
industrial process being achieved (filling or supplying phase). The liquid
volume inside the reservoir must be known on every moment of the industrial
process, the more that for certain periods of time the two working phases can
take place simultaneously. From this point of view three important elements can
be mentioned: the supplying system, the emptying system and the reservoir.
Reservoirs can have constant or variable cross-sectional area and constant or
variable head. The emptying system can have an emptying orifice or an
emptying pipe. In this paper the emptying process of a constant cross-sectional
reservoir using an emptying orifice placed on the bottom side of the reservoir
will be analysed using two methods: the analytical method, (Bartha, 2004),
(Idelcik, 1984), (Panaitescu & Cacenko, 2001), based on the fundamental
equations governing the emptying process and the functional diagrams method,
(Zahariea, 2010), (Mathworks), based on MATLAB/Simscape computational
approach to analyze the real physical systems.
2. Analytical Method
Let us consider a vertical reservoir with variable cross-sectional
area Ar (z ) , z [0, H ] where H is the reservoir maximum level, Fig. 1a. The
emptying orifice has the section Ao , the local head loss coefficient o and the
flow discharge coefficient o . The flow through the orifice generates a
contraction phenomenon characterized by the contraction coefficient
= Ac Ao . The liquid volume variation produced during the emptying time dt
by level change from z to z dz will be equal with the liquid volume flowing
through the emptying orifice in the same time dt.
Assuming Ar = Dr2 4 = ct. (Fig. 1b) and considering the conditions t =
= 0 H = H i and t = T H = H f , where H i and H f are the initial and the
final liquid levels, the emptying time can be expressed by
T=
Ar
Ac
Hi
dz ,
H f v( z )
(1)
where: v( z ) is the liquid velocity through the emptying orifice which will be
obtained starting from the Bernoullis equation for incompressible flow between
characteristic sections 1 and 2.
213
Fig.1 Reservoir with emptying orifice: characteristics:

a variable cross-section reservoir, b constant cross-section reservoir.
Different expressions can be obtained depending of the reservoir type:

i) for constant head reservoir, the emptying time is
Hi H f
Ar
Tc =
o Ao
A 2
2 g 1 o
A
p pa
Hi + 1
;
(2)
ii) for variable head reservoir, the emptying time is
p1 pa
p pa
Hf + 1
H i +
,
A 2
2 g 1 o
A
2 Ar
Tv =
o Ao
where o = is the discharge coefficient, = 1 1 + o
(3)
the velocity
coefficient, = g the specific weight, the liquid density, p1 the

pressure at the liquid surface in the reservoir, pa the atmospheric pressure.
The emptying time rate is defined by the emptying time of the variable head
reservoir divided by the emptying time of the constant head reservoir
kT =
Tv
Tc
(4)
214
Dnu Zahariea
In Fig. 2a are presented the comparative results for emptying times of

constant and variable head reservoirs with respect to the percent of reservoir
emptying ( 1 k H [%], k H = H f H i ).
In Fig. 2b the emptying time rate is presented with respect to the same
parameter 1 k H [%].
The numerical values of the characteristic parameters are: H i =1 m, the
reservoir section Ar = Dr2 4 with the reservoir diameter Dr =1 m, the
emptying orifice section Ao = Do2 4 with the emptying orifice diameter Do =
=.01 m, the discharge coefficient of the emptying orifice o = 0.7, the pressure
inside the reservoir p1 = pa .
a
b
Fig. 2 Reservoir with emptying orifice: numerical results:
a emptying time; b emptying time rate.
3. Functional Diagrams Method

Based on the MATLAB/Simscape computational techniques, two
functional diagrams for modelling and simulating the emptying process of a
constant cross-sectional reservoir with constant and variable head has been
developed.
In Fig. 3a the functional diagram for constant head reservoir is presented.
There are three subsystems: the level meter, Fig. 3b, the flow meter (Fig. 3c)
and the calculation block which will calculate the velocity and the Reynolds
number starting with the flow value (Fig. 3d).
The condition for simulation stop is defined with the Check Static
Lower Bound block which is set to stop the simulation when the liquid level
will be equal with the imposed value H f (for this case H f =0). There are four
Display blocks for the final values presentation of the four constant
characteristic parameters: emptying time [s], velocity [m/s], Reynolds number
and flow [m3/s].
215
d
Fig. 3 Functional diagram for constant head reservoir:
a diagram, b level meter subsystem, c flow meter subsystem,
d calculation block subsystem.
In Fig. 4 the functional diagram for variable head reservoir is presented.

There are three subsystems, the same like in the previous case: the level meter
(Fig. 3b) the flow meter (Fig. 3c) and the calculation block (Fig. 3d). There are
four Scope blocks for the final values presentation of the four variable
and flow [m3/s].
In Fig. 5 the numerical results are presented for the emptying process of a
variable head reservoir (for this case H f =0).
A comparative analysis of the numerical results for the emptying time for
constant head and for variable head reservoirs, obtained with the analytical and
the functional diagram methods is presented in Fig. 6a and Fig. 6b. The error
216
Dnu Zahariea
rates defined by c = Tc f Tca Tca 100 [%] and v = Tv f Tva Tva 100 [%]
are presented in Fig. 6c and Fig. 6d.
Fig. 4 Functional diagram for variable head reservoir.
Fig. 5 Numerical results with respect to time [s]:

a level [m], b flow rate [m3/s], c velocity [m/s], d Reynolds number.
217
Fig. 6 Comparative analysis:

a emptying time, b error rate - for constant head reservoir;
c emptying time, d error rate - for variable head reservoir.
4. Conclusions
1. The analytical method is based on the fundamental relationship for the
emptying time for both reservoirs, with constant head and with variable head.
The emptying time for variable head reservoir is greater than for constant head
reservoir, and this difference is increasing with the percent of emptying. The
emptying time rate is also increasing with the percent of emptying having the
maximum value of 2 for full reservoir emptying.
2. The functional diagrams method is based on the MATLAB/Simscape
development methodology using Simscape functional blocks like: reservoir
with constant head, reservoir with variable head, orifice with constant section,
flow meter, etc. The Simulink blocks are used for data input and for data output
respect to the functional diagram; input and output converters are required.
3. For the functional diagram with constant head reservoir the output data
are constant, so simple Display blocks have been used for single value data
display. For the functional diagram with variable head reservoir the output data
are variable, so Scope blocks have been used for graphical representation. For
the variable head reservoir, the numerical values of flow, velocity and Reynolds
218
Dnu Zahariea
number are decreasing in time, but starting with the same values obtained for
the constant head reservoir.
4. For both functional diagrams with constant head and variable head
reservoir a simulation stop condition has been used. This condition consists in a
comparative test between the actual liquid level and the imposed final liquid
level in the reservoir. When this condition will become true, the simulation will
be stopped and the final simulation time will be displayed.
5. A very good agreement between the numerical results obtained by both
analytical and functional methods has been observed for emptying times, as
well as for error rates: Tca and Tva are the emptying times determined using the
analytical method for constant and variable head reservoirs; Tc f and Tv f are the
emptying times determined using the functional diagram method. The
maximum error rate is no greater than 0.02% for constant head reservoir and
0.055% for variable head reservoir.
REFERENCES
Bartha I., Javgureanu V., Marcoie N., Hidraulic. Ed. Performatica, Iai, 2004.
Idelcick I. E., ndrumtor pentru calculul rezistenelor hidraulice. Ed. Tehnic,
Bucureti, 1984.
Panaitescu V., Tcacenco V., Bazele mecanicii fluidelor. Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti, 2001.
Zahariea D., Simularea sistemelor fzice n MATLAB. Ed. PIM, Iai, 2010.
*** Mathworks, Simscape Model and Simulate Multidomain Physical Systems.
www.mathworks.com
DIAGRAME FUNCIONALE PENTRU MODELAREA PROCESULUI DE
GOLIRE A UNUI REZERVOR PRINTR-UN ORIFICIU DE GOLIRE
(Rezumat)
n lucrare se analizeaz procesul de golire al unui rezervor cu seciune constant
printr-un orificiu de golire plasat la baza rezervorului. Sunt considerate dou tipuri de
rezervoare: cu sarcin constant i cu sarcin variabil. Sunt prezentate dou metode de
analiz: metoda analitic i metoda diagramelor funcionale. n cadrul metodei analitice
se prezint relaiile fundamentale pentru calculul timpului de golire, la determinarea
crora s-au considerat: presiunea la nivelul liber al lichidului din rezervor, viteza de
coborre a nivelului liber, coeficientul de debit al orificiului de golire. n cadrul metodei
funcionale se prezint dou diagrame funcionale elaborate n MATLAB/Simscape la
elaborarea crora s-au utilizat elementele funcionale specifice pentru simularea
sistemelor fizice reale. Diagramele funcionale permit obinerea reprezentrilor grafice
pentru variaia cantitii de lichid din rezervor (i prin calcul, a poziiei nivelului liber al
lichidului), precum i pentru debitul de lichid care trece prin orificiul de golire (i prin
calcul, a vitezei de curgere i a parametrului Reynolds). Se prezint o analiz
comparativ a rezultatelor obinute prin cele dou metode de analiz (metoda analitic i
metoda diagramelor funcionale).

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAMS FOR MODELING THE RESERVOIR

EMPTYING PROCESS THROUGH AN EMPTYING PIPE
BY
DNU ZAHARIEA*
Gheorghe AsachiTechnical University of Iai
Abstract. In this paper the emptying process of constant head and variable
head reservoirs with constant cross-sectional area through an emptying pipe will
be investigated. The pressure at the water surface and also the velocity of this
surface, as well as the head loss due to friction along the emptying pipe will be
considered. Two methods will be presented: the analytical method based on the
fundamental equations governing the reservoir emptying process and the
functional diagrams method based on MATLAB/Simscape computational
approach suited to analyze the real physical systems. A comparative analysis of
the numerical results for the emptying time for constant head and for variable
head reservoirs, obtained with the analytical and the functional diagram methods
will be presented.
Key words: constant cross-sectional area reservoir, emptying time, emptying
pipe, functional diagram, MATLAB.
1. Introduction
The supplying systems, as well as the emptying systems connected to a
reservoir, are generally composed by network pipes. Let us consider the
simplest case in which the emptying system of a supply reservoir is composed
by a single pipe connected at the right bottom side of the reservoir. The
reservoir emptying time problem can be formulated as follows: if all
geometrical and functional characteristics of the reservoir and the emptying pipe
*
e-mail: dzahariea@yahoo.com
220
Dnu Zahariea
are known, what is the time for the liquid level to decrease from the initial value
to a final imposed value? Three complementary parameters must be determined:
the flow rate, the velocity and the Reynolds number for the liquid flow through
the emptying pipe.
Two resolution methods can be developed: the analytical method and the
functional diagram method. The analytical method consists in determining the
equation of the emptying time (Bartha, 2004), (Panaitescu & Tcacenko, 2001).
Despite the apparent simplicity of this method, there are two important aspects
to be mentioned: for the variable head reservoir case, the linear loss head
coefficient is liquid level dependent, thus the velocity coefficient will be
liquid level dependent too, (Idelcik, 1984). Considering this observation, the
integrals involved in the emptying time equations for variable head reservoir
can be solved only using numerical methods. The second important aspect
refers to obtaining of the linear loss head coefficient. Three different
relationships will be used for laminar, turbulent and transition fluid flow
regimes. The functional method allows developing functional diagrams used for
complete analyse of the reservoir emptying process (Zahariea, 2010),
(Mathworks). All four parameters will be determined: the liquid level, the flow
rate, the liquid velocity and the Reynolds number.
In this paper, both the analytical and the functional diagram methods for
analysing the emptying process of a reservoir through an emptying pipe will be
presented.
2. Analytical Method
Let us consider a vertical reservoir with constant cross-sectional
area Ar = Dr2 4 = ct. , z [0, H ] where H is the reservoir maximum level,
Fig. 1. The characteristics of the emptying pipe are: diameter Dc ,
section Ac = Dc2 4 , length Lc , local head loss coefficients at the input i and
output e , linear head loss coefficient .
Fig. 1 Reservoir with emptying pipe: characteristics.
221
The liquid volume variation produced during the emptying time dt by

level change from z to z dz will be equal with the liquid volume flowing
through the emptying pipe in the same time dt.
Using the conditions t = 0 H = H i and t = T H = H f , where H i
and H f are the initial and the final liquid levels, the emptying time T will be
A
T= r
Ac
Hi
v ( z ) dz ,
(1)
Hf
where v(z) is the liquid velocity through the emptying orifice which will be
obtained starting from the Bernoullis equation for incompressible flow between
characteristic sections 1 and 2.
Different expressions can be obtained depending of the reservoir type:
i) for constant head reservoir, the emptying time is
Tc =
Hi H f
Ar
( H i ) Ac 2 g
p pa
Hi + 1
(2)
ii) for variable head reservoir, the emptying time is
Tv =
Ar
Ac 2 g
Hi
Hf
dz
p pa
( z ) z + 1
(3)
where = g is the specific weight, the liquid density, p1 the pressure

at the liquid surface in the reservoir, pa the atmospheric pressure, the
velocity coefficient.
The velocity coefficient is defined by
( z ) =
A
L
1 + ( z ) c + i + e c
Dc
Ar
(4)
where linear head loss coefficient is obtained using different expressions,

depending on the Reynolds number:
L = 64 e, e e L = 2000 ,
1
T =
, e eT = 4000 ,
2
1.11
1.8 lg 6.9 e + ( e 3.7 Dc )
T L
= L +
( e e L ) , e L < e < eT . .
eT e L
(5)
222
Dnu Zahariea
The emptying time rate is defined by the emptying time of the variable
head reservoir divided by the emptying time of the constant head reservoir
kT =
Tv
.
Tc
(6)
In Fig. 2a are presented the comparative results for emptying times of

constant and variable head reservoirs with respect to the percent of reservoir
emptying ( 1 k H [%], k H = H f H i ). In Fig. 2b the emptying time rate is
presented with respect to the same parameter 1 k H [%].
The numerical values of the characteristic parameters are: H i =1 m, the
reservoir section Ar = Dr2 4 with the reservoir diameter Dr =1 m, the
emptying pipe section Ac = Dc2 4 with the emptying pipe diameter Dc =0.01
m, the emptying pipe length Lc = 2 m, the local head loss coefficients at the
input i = 0.5 and output e = 1, the pressure inside the reservoir p1 = pa .
Fig. 2 Reservoir with emptying pipe: numerical results.

a emptying time, b emptying time rate.
3. Functional Diagrams Method

Based on the MATLAB/Simscape computational techniques two
functional diagrams for modelling and simulating the emptying process of a
constant cross-sectional reservoir with constant and variable head has been
developed.
In Fig. 3a the functional diagram for constant head reservoir is presented.
There are three subsystems: the level meter (Fig. 3b) the flow meter (Fig. 3c)
and the calculation block which will calculate the velocity and the Reynolds
number starting with the flow rate value (Fig. 3d).
223
The condition for simulation stop is defined with the Check Static
Lower Bound block which is set to stop the simulation when the liquid level
will be equal with the imposed value H f (for this case H f =0.0125 m). There
are four Display blocks for the final values presentation of the four constant
and flow [m3/s].
d
Fig. 3 Functional diagram for constant head reservoir:
a diagram, b level meter subsystem, c flow meter subsystem,
d calculation block subsystem.
In Fig. 4 the functional diagram for variable head reservoir is presented.

There are three subsystems, the same like in the previous case: the level meter,
(Fig. 3b) the flow meter (Fig. 3c) and the calculation block (Fig. 3d). There are
four Scope blocks for presentation of variable characteristic parameters:
emptying time [s], velocity [m/s], Reynolds number and flow [m3/s].
In Fig. 5 the numerical results are presented for the emptying process of a
variable head reservoir (for this case Hf =0.0125 m).
224
Dnu Zahariea
A comparative analysis of the numerical results for the emptying time for
constant head and for variable head reservoirs, obtained with the analytical and
the functional diagram methods is presented in Fig. 6a and Fig. 6b. The error
rates defined by c = Tc f Tca Tca 100 [%] and v = Tv f Tva Tva 100 [%] are
presented in Fig. 6c and Fig. 6d.
Fig. 4 Functional diagram for variable head reservoir.
Fig. 5 Numerical results with respect to time [s]:

a level [m], b flow rate [m3/s],
c velocity [m/s], d Reynolds number.
225
d
Fig. 6 Comparative analysis:
a emptying time, b error rate - for constant head reservoir;
c emptying time, d error rate - for variable head reservoir.
4. Conclusions
1. The analytical method is based on the fundamental relationship for the
emptying time. The linear loss head coefficient will be calculated using three
different relationships depending of the fluid flow regimes. An iterative
computation block have been developed having the validation condition based
on the Reynolds number criterion. The emptying time for variable head
reservoir is greater than for constant head reservoir, and this difference is
increasing with the percent of emptying. The emptying time rate is also
increasing with the percent of emptying.
2. The functional diagrams method is based on the MATLAB/Simscape
development methodology using Simscape functional blocks for simulate real
physical elements, like: reservoir with constant head, reservoir with variable
head, pipe, flow meter, etc. The Simulink blocks are used for data input and for
data output respect to the functional diagram, when input and output converters
are required.
3. For both functional diagrams with constant head and variable head
reservoir a simulation stop condition has been used. This condition consists in a
226
Dnu Zahariea
comparative test between the actual liquid level and the imposed final liquid
level in the reservoir. When this condition will become true, the simulation will
be stopped and the final simulation time will be displayed (this time correspond
with the emptying time).
4. A good agreement between the numerical results obtained by both
analytical and functional methods has been observed for emptying times, as
well as for error rates: Tca and Tva are the emptying times from analytical
method for constant and variable head reservoirs; Tc f and Tv f are the emptying
times from the functional diagram method for constant and variable head
reservoirs. The maximum error rate is no greater than: 3.35% for constant head
reservoir and 5.5% for variable head reservoir.
REFERENCES
*** Mathworks, Simscape Model and Simulate Multidomain Physical Systems.
www.mathworks.com
Bartha I., Javgureanu V., Marcoie N., Hidraulic. Ed. Performatica, Iai, 2004
Idelcick I. E., ndrumtor pentru calculul rezistenelor hidraulice. Ed. Tehnic,
Bucureti, 1984.
Panaitescu V., Tcacenco V., Bazele mecanicii fluidelor. Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti, 2001.
Zahariea D., Simularea sistemelor fzice n MATLAB. Ed. PIM, Iai, 2010.
DIAGRAME FUNCIONALE PENTRU MODELAREA PROCESULUI DE GOLIRE

A UNUI REZERVOR PRINTR-O CONDUCT DE GOLIRE
(Rezumat)
n lucrare se analizeaz procesul de golire al unui rezervor cu seciune constant
printr-o conduct de golire. Sunt considerate dou tipuri de rezervoare: cu sarcin
constant i cu sarcin variabil. Sunt prezentate dou metode de analiz: metoda
analitic i metoda diagramelor funcionale. n cadrul metodei analitice se prezint
relaiile fundamentale pentru calculul timpului de golire, la determinarea crora s-au
considerat: presiunea la nivelul liber al lichidului din rezervor, viteza de coborre a
nivelului liber, pierderile locale i liniare de sarcin de pe condcucta de golire. n cadrul
metodei funcionale se prezint dou diagrame funcionale elaborate n
MATLAB/Simscape la elaborarea crora s-au utilizat elementele funcionale specifice
pentru simularea sistemelor fizice reale: rezervorul cu sarcin constant sau variabil,
conducta de golire, traductorul de debit, etc. Diagramele funcionale permit obinerea
reprezentrilor grafice pentru variaia cantitii de lichid din rezervor (i prin calcul, a
poziiei nivelului liber al lichidului), precum i pentru debitul de lichid care trece prin
orificiul de golire (i prin calcul, a vitezei de curgere i a parametrului Reynolds).
Pentru cele dou tipuri de rezervoare (cu sarcin constant i cu sarcin variabil) se
prezint o analiz comparativ a rezultatelor obinute prin cele dou metode de analiz
(metoda analitic i metoda diagramelor funcionale).

Publicat de
Secia
CONSTRUCII DE MAINI
A PLEADING FOR THE MODERNIZATION OF

MACHINE TOOLS IN NATIONAL INDUSTRY
BY
DAN POPESCU*
University of Craiova,
Department of Electrotechnics
Accepted for publication: Sptember 2, 2011
Abstract. Numerical controls have a great role in increasing the efficiency

of the electric drive of the machine tool, thus in the energy saving. Measurements
were done for two of those (one equiped with numerical control and a converter
for the asynchronous motor of the main drive, and another with no numerical
control and with a converter for the d.c. motors of the main drive). Measurements
were done using a kit which was specialized in aquiring and handling energetic
data. This project presents the diagrams resulted from the measurements in a
comparative study. The monitored parameters were the following: actual values
of voltage and currents during the three phases, the content of harmonics, or the
frequency spectrum for all three phases, the frequency of the feeding voltage,
active and reactive power, energy, and the power factor.
Key words: numerical controls, active and reactive power, energy, converter.
1. Introduction
Lately, the technical needs in the area of mechanic processing of materials
have evolved. The increased complexity of the machine and of the workpiece
calls for more qualified and more thorough manpower. These two attributes are
usually dominated by human subjectivism: tiredness, neglection, inattention,
lack of promptitude in critical situations - which make humans imperfect
operators. In time, mankind was prone to discover methods of avoiding
unpleasant situations during the productive process. One of these methods was
automatization, with its top element, numerical control (Minciu & Predincea,
1985). Numerical controls are mainly necessary for increasing work
*
e-mail: popescumincu@yahoo.com
228
Dan Popescu
productivity while maintaining high precision. It is because of this need that

they have continuousy evolved, until human error was eliminated from the
execution of workpieces. As shown in their name,computer assisted numerical
controls(CNC) have as main element a computer, similar to a pc, not very
powerful, but adapted to industrial needs (increased protection for adapting to
the environment and an operating safety suited to demands) .
2. Functioning of CNC Equipped Machine Tools
A CNC system also consists of a peripherics connection unit, an external
memory, an interface between the computer and the machine and a control
panel. All these equipments (system hardware) function according to the basic
software. The software is based on Windows NT, which is compatible with the
numerical control software, for starting and operating, of the original
manufacturing equipment. For instance, lets consider a Sinumerik 840
numerical control made by Siemens, with which a lathe is equipped. The lathe is
placed in a light mechanical processing department and it provides the serial
production of the pieces which are to be produced. The lathe is also equipped
with a tool storage space, thus ensuring low time intervals for the execution of
technological operations. The processing programs are stocked on a memory
card. The command system of the machine consists of:
i) the control panel, which includes the operator panel, the display, the
control panel of the machine, keyboard and mouse;
ii) mains infeed module (MS), which provides energy for the drive
modules, the regenerativ feedback, braking or braking resistance modules;
iii) the numerical control unit (NCU);
iv) the supplies power for the axis modules- it generates continuous
tension for the convertors of the motors;
v) blocks of the feed drive digital system, one for each axis, depending of
the configuration of the machine tool. They hold tension and frequency PWM
convertors, ensuring high energetic performances.
The input/output modules and the feed drive modules are connected with
a Profibus 12 MBaud base bus (Mrgineanu, 2005).
Numerical controls also have a great role in increasing the efficiency of
the electric drive of the machine tool, thus in the energy saving. First of all, they
assess a machine which is extremely well built. This machine must be precise,
in order to ensure the meeting of processing demands, it must not have friction
or displacement during steering.
The direct consequence is a smaller power needed for the drive. Second
of all, numerical controls allow choosing and respecting an optimal working
condition for the advance and for the splinting, also forcing the static frequency
and tension changers, which also increase their efficiency, to have an economic
energetic state. These were also the conclusions of the measurements that were
done, because the equipment allowed comparison between the same type of
machines, some of them with numerical controls and some without.
Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXII), Fasc. 1, 2012
229
3. Measuring Process- Observations

Measurements were done for the boring machine AFP 160 CNC
(equiped with numerical control and Fanuc converter for the asynchronous
motor of the main drive) and for the the boring machine AFP160 (with no
numerical control and with a converter for the continuos power motor of the
main drive). Measurements were done using a kit (AR-5 network analyser)
which was specialized in aquiring and handling energetic data. We must
mention that the two machines executed the same operation (finishing).
The boring dust resulted from the processing was compared and
dimensions or the chips were found to be similar. This project presents the
diagrams resulted from the measurements in a comparative study. The
monitored parameters were the following: actual values of tensions. In the case
of active powers, in the most charged phase, the energy consumption is three
times higher for non-upgraded machine, and this ratio is also mantained in the
case of reactive powers, disfavouring the non-upgraded machine, currents
during the three phases, the content of the harmonics or the frequency spectrum
for all three phases, the frequency of the feeding tension, active and reactive
power and energy, and the power factor.
Frequency spectrums of the harmonics content of the voltage waves and
the variation of harmonics while monitoring look like in Figs. 1 and 2. We can
see that especially harmonics three and five are almost two times smaller for
machine no 1. This means in the case of non-upgraded machine, the superior
harmonics of the flux and rotoric current (of different orders and sequences)
determin disturbing couples to appear (Ciobanu, 2008). The amplitude of those
couples is independent of the charge, overlapping asincronous couple produced
by the fundamental. If the feeding frecquency is high, their effect is unnoticed.
At small rotation speeds of the asyncronous motors, the swinging couples can
produce an abrupt(or in several steps) movement of the engine rotor.
Fig.1 Armonics for machine AFP160 CNC. Fig.2 Armonics for machine AFP160.
Their presence actually limits the minimum speed at which the motor can
be used. There are different ways to reduce the effects of these couples, either
operating on the motor, or on the constructive plan of the convertors (Bizon,
230
Dan Popescu
2008), (Cmpeanu, 2008). At low speeds, although the harmonics content

increases, the effective value of the current decreases with the decreasing of the
speed. All these couples, dued to the superior harmonics, tend to decrease the
maximum torque of the engine, in comparison to network feeding.
Fig. 3 Active power for AFP 160CNC.
Fig. 4 Active power for AFP160.
Fig. 5 Reactive power for AFP160CNC.
Fig. 6 Reactive power for AFP160.
This means that a reserve is necessary (variation of 10-15% of the

engine power), in order to handle the effects of the harmonics. In the case of
active powers, in the most charged phase, the power consumption is two times
higher for for non-upgraded machine (Figs. 3 and 4) and this ratio is also
mantained in the case of reactive powers, disfavouring the non-upgraded
machine (Figs. 5 and 6).This thing leads to obvious drastic decrease of the
power factor which can cause additional costs in order to compensate it.
231
Variation graphs of the actual values of currents look like in Figs. 7 and
8. During the most charged phase we can notice a significant growth of the
absorbed current, especially when the machine drive breaks and accelerates.
Fig.7 Current consumption for AFP160CNC. Fig.8 Current consumption or FP160.
4. Economic Considerations
These benefits are noticeable if we do a basic economic calculationdetermination of the recovery period and the project profitability (Leca, 1997).
Nr.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Table 1
Calculus of static indicators
Indicators
M.U.
Economy by introducing CSF
kW/hour
Functioning hours
hours/year
Annual energy economy
MWh
The price/ energy
lei /MWh
The cost of the energy save/ year
lei/year
The cost of the installation
lei
Results
1,4
3840
5,36
311.98
1677
560 000
From the absorbed active power diagrams we notice a difference of

about 1,4kW in favour of upgraded machine. Considering that the machinery
works in only two shifts, that the owner has proposed a moderate yearly profit,
about 100 000 lei after he spent 560 000 lei on upgrading the machinery, by
carrying the appropriate calculations we obtain the static indicators grouped in
Table 1. Calculus of static indicators (Leca, 1997) shows an acceptable recovery
period, less than five years, which confirms once more the profitability resulted
from the machinery upgrades.
It should be noted that there are no additional maintenance costs
because on one side the machinery is under warranty for a long period of time,
and on the other side modern equipments are higly reliable. It may also be noted
that the owner may not bear all modernization costs.
232
Dan Popescu
The costs can decrease spectacularly by accesing European funds

intended for energy saving.
5. Conclusions
1. We can conclude that as numerical controls evolve, they become more
and more accesible to operators and to projecting engineers. Difficulties remain
for software developers, who must find more and more accesible programmes,
thus lowering the costs by reducing the work time, reducing the energetic
consumption (by optimization of feed controls) and reducing expenses with
personnel.
2. The boards of factories in the processing branch can easily decide the
modernization of the existing machine tools, considering both the high
productivity and the small amount of time in which the investment will be
recovered. According to calculations, in all the cases we studied the investment
is easily recuperated, thus attractive. The attractivity increases as there are
numerous European programmes in the energy field, according to which the
investor only has to cover part of the investment. All these also contribute to
general economic development, by creating and developing import, assembling
and service firms, and also creating firms with connected activities.
3. The considerable progress in the field of electrical systems with
variable speed made the investment necessary for such systems to be just a
fraction of the total cost of the energy used during their functioning.
4. All these also contribute to general economic development, by
creating and developing import, assembling and service firms, and also creating
firms with connected activities. From all the above, we can conclude the
following advantages of using static converters: precise control of the energetic
process and especially of the systems speed; very low maintenance; energy
save; smooth start/stop, without blows of controllable acceleration and
deceleration; almost inexistent noise.
Command pulse time modulation inverters, which eliminate the superior
harmonics. (Delesega&Andea, 2002), (Mircea, 1999) have represented an
important step in the establishment of the driving with an asynchronous motor
as a solution for the future. This is why, while the static tension and frequency
converters are being modernized, the balance is towards the driving with an
asynchronous motor against the D.C. one.
REFERENCES
*** Convertor valutar. available at: http://www.dobanzi.ro accessed: 2011-06-10.
*** Siemens SINUMERIK 840Di Documentation, 2001.
Bizon N., Convertoare. Ed. Matrix Rom, Bucureti, 2008.
Cmpeanu A., Maini electrice. Ed. Universitaria, Craiova, 2008.
Ciobanu L., Sisteme de acionri electrice. Ed. Matrix Rom, Bucureti, 2008.
233
Delesega I., Andea P., Procese de comutaie. Calitatea energiei electrice. Ed.
Orizonturi Universitare, Timioara, 2002.
Leca A., Principii de management energetic. Ed.Tehnic. Bucureti, 1997.
Mrgineanu I. , Automate programabile. Ed. Albastr, Cluj Napoca, 2005.
Minciu C., Predincea N., Maini unelte cu comand numeric. Ed. Tehnic, Bucureti,
1985.
Mircea I., Sisteme eficiente energetic pentru instalaii cu debite reglabile. Ed.
Universitaria, 1999.
O PLEDOARIE PENTRU MODERNIZAREA MAINILOR UNELTE

ACTUALE DIN INDUSTRIA NAIONAL
(Rezumat)
O contribuie deosebit o au comenzile numerice n eficientizarea acionrilor
electrice a utilajelor, i deci n economia de energie pe care o aduc. n primul rnd, ele
impun un utilaj bine construit din punct de vedere mecanic. Acesta trebuie s fie precis,
pentru asigurarea exigenelor de prelucrare, s nu aib frecri i jocuri mari n ghidaje.
Consecina direct este o putere necesar pentru acionare mai mic. n al doilea rnd,
comenzile numerice permit alegerea i respectarea unui regim optim de avans i
achiere, impunnd i convertizoarelor statice de tensiune i frecven, care la rndul lor
au un randament din ce n ce mai ridicat, un regim economic din punct de vedere
energetic. Acest lucru a reieit i din msurtorile fcute, unde graie dotrii
ntreprinderii s-au putut face comparaii pe acelai tip de maini, unele fiind
convenionale, iar altele fiind proaspt echipate cu comenzi numerice.
Pentru confirmarea celor de mai sus n ceea ce privete economia de energie
pentru utilajele modernizate s-au fcut comparativ mai multe msurtori pe utilaje de
acelai tip, ncrcate cu aceleai repere n vederea prelucrrii. S-a urmrit ca regimurile
de achiere s fie aceleai pentru acurateea comparaiilor ulterioare.
S-au fcut msurri pe maina de alezat i frezat cu pinol AFP180 CNC,
echipat cu comand numeric i convertizor Fanuc pentru motorul asincron de
acionare principal, i pentru maina de alezat i frezat cu pinol AFP180, fr
comand numeric, echipat cu convertizor pentru motorul de curent continuu de
acionare principal.
Parametrii monitorizai au fost: valorile efective ale tensiunilor i curenilor pe
cele trei faze, coninutul n armonici sau spectrul de frecven al tensiunilor pentru toate
fazele, frecvena tensiunii de alimentare, puterea i energia activ i reactiv, precum i
factorul de putere. Se observ n cazul puterilor active c pe faza cea mai ncrcat
consumul este de circa de dou ori mai mare la utilajul nemodernizat, iar n cazul
puterilor reactive proporia se respect n defavoarea aceluiai utilaj. Acest lucru
conduce evident i la scderea drastic a factorului de putere ceea ce determin costuri
suplimentare pentru compensarea lui.
Pe faza cea mai ncrcat se observ o cretere semnificativ a curentului
absorbit mai ales n momentele de frnare i accelerare ale platoului utilajului.
Din calculele economice fcute reiese c n toate cazurile studiate investiiile se
recupereaz rapid, ceea ce face s fie atractiv investiia. Atractivitatea const i n
existena mai multor programe europene n domeniul energetic n care investitorul vine
numai cu un anumit procent din suma investit. Toate acestea contribuie i la
234
Dan Popescu
dezvoltarea economic general, prin apariia i activitatea firmelor de import, montaj i

service n domeniu, dar i la apariia altor firme din domenii pe orizontal ale activitii.
Se poate trage concluzia din cele prezentate c pe msura evoluiei lor,
comenzile numerice devin din ce n ce mai accesibile att operatorilor, ct i inginerilor
din proiectarea uzinal. Dificultile se deplaseaz n zona dezvoltatorilor software care
trebuie s gseasc programe din ce n ce mai accesibile, reducnd astfel costurile prin
reducerea timpului de lucru, reducerea consumurilor energetice prin optimizarea
comenzilor acionrilor i reducerea cheltuielilor de calificare cu personalul.

CM1 Din 2012

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CM1 Din 2012

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

BULETINUL

Tomul LVIII (LXII)

BULETINUL INSTITUTULUI POLITEHNIC DIN IAI

GHEORGHE ASACHI TECHNICAL UNIVERSITY OF IAI

Editorial Advisory Board

Prof.dr.eng. Dorel Leon, Gheorghe Asachi Technical

Papers presented at the

Papers published with the support of

Conf.univ.dr.ing. Irina Cozmnc

BULETINUL INSTITUTULUI POLITEHNIC DIN IAI

ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI i GAVRIL AXINTI, Modele dinamice pentru

CONSTANTIN CHIRI, ANDREI GRAMA i DUMITRU ZETU,

ANDREI GRAMA, CONSTANTIN CHIRI, DUMITRU ZETU i MIHAI

DANIELA IONESCU, ION BOGDAN i GABRIELA APREOTESEI, Asupra

ALIN LUCA, MIRCEA COZMNC i ANA MARIA MATEI, Stabilirea

IRINA MARDARE i IRINA TIA, Senzor de for inclus ntr-un sistem

ANA-MARIA MATEI, MIRCEA COZMNC i ALIN LUCA, Cercetri

MEHRAN DOULAT ABADI (Malaezia) i SHARI MOHD YUSOF

LUCIANA-CRISTIANA STAN i VLADIMIR MRSCU-KLEIN, Rolul

industria naional (engl., rez. rom.)........................................................... 227

BULETINUL INSTITUTULUI POLITEHNIC DIN IAI

FLORINA-CRISTINA FILIP, Effective Methods of Cost Breakdown for

ANDREI GRAMA, CONSTANTIN CHIRI, DUMITRU ZETU and

BRUNO RDULESCU and MARA-CRISTINA RDULESCU, The Costs

National Industry (English, Romanian summary)...................................... 227

BULETINUL INSTITUTULUI POLITEHNIC DIN IAI

MIHAI AFRSINEI1, DORU CLRAU2, VASILE DAMASCHIN*1,

Received: September 12 2011

Corresponding author: e-mail: vasile.damaschin@hydramold.ro

Mihai Afrsinei et al.

Fig. 1 The structure of the adaptive hydraulic transmission.

Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXII), f. 1, 2012

Mihai Afrsinei et al.

3. Numerical Simulation of the Adaptive Hydraulic Transmission

Fig. 2 The simulation model of the adaptive hydraulic transmission.

The aim of the experimental tests by numerical simulation is to

Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXII), f. 1, 2012

Fig. 3 The unit step responses at hydraulic motor load variation.

Mihai Afrsinei et al.

Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXII), f. 1, 2012

ANALIZA PRIN SIMULARE NUMERIC A UNUI SISTEM HIDRAULIC

BULETINUL INSTITUTULUI POLITEHNIC DIN IAI

DYNAMIC MODELS FOR TRACTION SYSTEMS

ADRIAN SORIN AXINTI and GAVRIL AXINTI

Abstract. The work presents a classification of traction systems as a function

1. Classification of Traction Systems

Corresponding author: e-mail: axinti@ugal.ro

Adrian Sorin Axinti and Gavril Axinti

connected between them with elements of transmission being considered elastic

This traction system is characterized by the ensemble achieved between

Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXII), f. 1, 2012

It is characterized as the fact the accomplished system between the heat

Fig. 2 The model of mechanical traction systems STMH: a equipments on tyre; b

Adrian Sorin Axinti and Gavril Axinti

This, by average used-up liquid as the hydraulic agent, conduces to the

It is characterized by the action between the heat engine as the source of

Fig. 3 The model of hydrostatical systems traction STIH. MT heat engine;

The integral mechanical traction system STIM, having the same

Bul. Inst. Polit. Iai, t. LVIII (LXII), f. 1, 2012

motive thermic axle, characterized of the angle of rotation. The moment of

In the situations presented, mostly the aspect of accomplishing of the

Adrian Sorin Axinti and Gavril Axinti

The mechanic hydraulical traction system-STMH, is reduced to a